Digital PDFs

AA-EX13C-TC

August 1990

352 pages

Original

11MB

Document:	RSTS/E Quick Reference Guide
Order Number:	AA-EX13C-TC
Revision:	0
Pages:	352
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/pdp11/rsts_e/V10/AA-EX13C-TC_RSTS_E_V10_Quick_Reference_Aug90.pdf

OCR Text

RSTS/E Quick Reference Guide
Order Number: AA-EZ13C-TC

August 1990

This manual describes the use of Del, System Utility Programs, and general
programming information on RSTS/E.

Operating System and Version: RSTS/E Version 10.0
Software Version:

digital equipment corporation
maynard, massachusetts

RSTS/E Version 10.0

August 1990
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear
in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment not
supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its affiliated companies.
Restricted Rights: Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.s. Government is
subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1 )(ii) of the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013.

© Digital Equipment Corporation 1990. All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
The postpaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this document
requests the user's critical evaluation to assist in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

ALL-IN-l
DEC/CMS
DECdx
DECIFMS-ll
DECmail
DECnet
DECnet/E
DECSA
DECserver
DECsystem-lO
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECworld
DELUA
DEQNA

DEUNA
DIBOL
EDT
lAS
LA
LNOI
Micro/RSX
OS/8
PDP
PDP-ll
PDT
Q-BUS
RMS-ll
RSTS

RSX
RT
RT-ll
TOPS-IO
TOPS-21
ULTRIX
UNIBUS
VAX
VAXmate
VMS
VT

WPS-PLUS
Rainbow

mamaamD™

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
RMS is a trademark of American Management Systems, Inc.

Contents
Preface

1 System Information
Files _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1-4
File Specification _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1-4
File Specification Switches
File Protection Codes
Device Names
logical Names
RSTS/E Multiple Privileges

1-8
1-11
1-13
1-15
1-16

2 DCl Commands
Rules for Entering DCl Commands, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--'2 1
Uppercase and lowercase letters
2 1
Numbers
2-1
Spaces and Tabs
2-1
Qualifiers
2-2
Entering Qualifier Arguments
2-2
Command Line labels
2-2
Abbreviating Commands
2 3
2 3
Continuing Commands on More Than One Line
Entering File Specification Lists
2-4
Absolute Date Formats
2-4
Absolute Time Formats
2-4

iii

Combining Absolute Dates and Times
Relative Dates and Times
Combining Absolute and Relative Dates and Times
DCL Commands and Qualifiers
@file-spec [P1 [P2 [ ... P8]]]
ALLOCATE dev[:] [Iogical-name[:]]
APPEN D [node: :]input-filespec[, ... ] [node: :]output-filespec
ASSIGN dev:[(p,pn]] logical-name[:]
ASSIGN/PORT port-name[:] server-name
ASSIGN/QUEUE queue-name[:] server-name[:]
ATTACH job-number
BACKUP input-filespec[, ...] output-backup-set-spec
BACKUP/COPY input-filespec[, ... ] output-filespec
BACKUP/DIRECTORY backup-set-spec
BACKUPIIMAGE input-disk: output-disk:
BASIC
BROADCAST destination[, ... ] "message"
CC filespec[, ...]
CCl system-command
CLOSE channel-number
CLOSE/lOG_FILE
CLOSE/QUEUE queue-name[:]
COBOL filespec
COpy [node::]input-filespec[, ...] [node::]output-filespec
CREATE filespec
CREATE/ACCOUNT [dev:][p,pn]
CREATE/PORT [port-name]
CREATE/SERVICE/LAT service-name
CREATE/VIRTUAL_DISK disk-size
DEALLOCATE dev[:]
DEASSIGN logical-name[:]
DEASSIGN/PORT port-name[:]
DEASSIGN/QUEUE queue-name[:] server-name[:]
DEFINE/COMMAND/SYSTEM command-name program-filespec
DELETE [node: :]filespec[,. .. ]
iv

2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-10
2-10
2-14
2-19
2-21
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-28
2 30
2-33
2 34
2-37
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-42
2-42
2-43

DELETE/ACCOUNT [dev:][p,pn], _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-J;.2-44
2-45
DELETE/COMMAND/SYSTEM command
DELETE/ENTRY {entry-spec I entry-number
2-45
DELETE/PORT port-name[:]
2-46
DELETE/QUEUE queue-name[:]
2-46
DELETE/SERVER server-name[:]
2-46
DELETE/SERVICE/LAT service-name
2-47
DELETE/SYMBOL symbol-name
2-47
DELETE/VIRTUAL_DISK
2-47
DETACH job-number
2-48
DIBOL filespec[, ... ]
2-48
DIFFERENCES input-filespec compare-filespec
2-49
DIRECTORY [node::][filespec[, ...]] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---S-2~9
(For disks) DISMOUNT disk-device-name[:] [pack-id] _ _ _ _ _ _ _~2 51
(For tapes) DISMOUNT tape-device-name[:] [label]
2 51
DUMP/SYSTEM
2-52
EDIT filespec
2 52
$EOD
2-53
EXIT [status-code]
2 53
FORCE destination[, ...] "string"
2-53
FORTRAN {lF77 I /FOR} filespec[, ... ]
2 54
GOSUB label-name
2 56
GOTO label-name
2-57
HANGUP KB[c]n[:]
2-57
HELP topic [subtopic [subsubtopic [ ...]]]
2 57
IF expression THEN [$] command
2 57
(For disks) INITIALIZE disk-device-name[:] pack-id
2-57
(For tapes) INITIALIZE tape-device-name[:] [label]
2-59
INITIALIZE/QUEUE queue-name[:]
2-60
INITIALIZE/SERVER server-name[:]
2-61
INQUIRE symbol-name ["prompt-string"]
2-62
INSTALL/ERROR_FILE [filespec]
2-63
INSTALL/LIBRARY library-name
2-64
INSTALL/OVERLAY_FILE [filespec]
2-65
INSTALL/RUNTIME_SYSTEM name
2-66

INSTALL/SWAP_FILE [=]index [filespec]
LINK filespec[, ... ]
LOAD/INDEX [dev[:]]
LOAD/OVERLAY overlay-name[, ... ]
LOGIN [p,pn]
LOGOUT
MACRO {lRSX111/RT11} filespec[, ... ]
MERGE input-filespec[, ... ]output-filespec
(For disks) MOUNT disk-device-name[:] pack-id [Iogical-name[:]]
(For tapes) MOUNT tape-device-name[:] [label]
ON CONTROL_C THEN [$] command
ON severity-level THEN [$] command
OPEN channel-number filespec
OPEN/LOG_FILE filespec
OPEN/QUEUE queue-name[:]
PRINT [node: :]filespec[, ...] [entry-spec]
READ channel-number symbol-name
RECALL {[integer] I leading-substring}
REMOVE/ERROR_FILE
REMOVE/JOB job-number
REMOVE/LIBRARY library-name
REMOVE/OVERLAY_FILE
REMOVE/RUNTIME_SYSTEM name
REMOVE/SWAP_FILE [=]Index
RENAME old-filespec[, ...] new-filespec
REPLY [[n]message-text[n]]
REQUEST [n]request-text[n]
RESTORE input-backup-set-spec output-filespec[:]
RESTORE/DIRECTORY backup-set-spec
RETURN [status-code]
RUN filespec
SET ACCOUNT dev:[p,pn]
SET CACHE
SET CONTROL=C
SET DATA
vi

2-67
2-68
2-70
2-71
2-71
2-72
2-72
2 73
2-75
2-76

2-n
2-n
2-n
2-78
2-78
2-79
2-80
2-81
2-81
2-82
2-82
2-82
2-83
2-83
2-83
2-85
2-86
2-87
2-91
2-93
2-93
2-93
2-95
2-96
2-96

SET DATE date[:tlme] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _2-97
SET DEVICE dev[:]
SET ECHO
SET ENTRY {entry-spec I entry-number}
SET FILE filespec
SET HOST [=] [ _ ]node[::][ _node::][m]
SET JOB [job-number]
SET LOG_FILE
SET NOCONTROL=C
SET NODATA
SET NODE/LAT
SET NOECHO

2 97
2-97
2-98
2-99
2 100
2 101
2-102
2-102
2-102
2-102
2-104

SET NOON _______________________ 2-104
SET NOVERIFY _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-&.2-104
SET ON

2-105
SET OPERATOR_SERVICES---------------2-105
SET PASSWORD [dev:[p,pn]] _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~2 105
SET PORT port-name[:]
SET PRINTER dev[:]
SET PROMPT [prompt]
SET PROTECTION[=]n filespec[, ... ]
SET QUEUE queue-name[:]
SET SERVER server-name[:]
SET SERVICE/LAT service-name
SET SYSTEM
SET TERMINAL [KB[c]n[:l1
SET TIME [date:]time
SET VERIFY
SHOW ACCOUNT [dev:[p,pnl1
SHOW BUFFERS
SHOW CACHE
SHOW COMMAND/SYSTEM [command-name]
SHOW COUNTERS/LAT [server-name]
SHOW DATE
SHOW DAYTIME

2-106
2-107
2-109
2-109
2 110
2-112
2-113
2-113
2 116
2-121
2-122
2-122
2-123
2-123
2-123
2-124
2-125
2-125
vii

SHOW DEVICE [dev[:]]
SHOW DEVICE/ALLOCATED
SHOW DISKS
SHOW ENTRY [entry-spec I entry-number]
SHOW FILES/OPEN [disk-name[:]]
SHOW FILE/SYSTEM
SHOW JOB Uob-number]
SHOW JOB/PRIVILEGE Uob-number]
SHOW LIBRARY
SHOW LOGICALS [logical-name]
SHOW MEMORY
SHOW NETWORK
SHOW NODE/LAT
SHOW OPERATOR_SERVICES
SHOW PORT [port-name]
SHOW PRINTER [dev[:]]
SHOW QUEUE [queue-name[:]]
SHOW RECEIVERS
SHOW REQUESTS
SHOW RUNTIME_SYSTEM
SHOW SERVER [server-name[:]]
SHOW SERVICES/LAT [service-name]
SHOW SESSIONS [server-name]
SHOW SYMBOL [symbol-name]
SHOW SYSTEM
SHOW TERMINAL [KB[c]n[:]]
SHOW TERMINAL_SERVERS/LAT [server-name]
SHOW TIME
SHOW USER [[p,pn]]
SORT input-filespec[, ... ] output-filespec
START/LAT Ethernet-device:
START/OPERATOR_SERVICES
START/QUEUE queue-name[:]
START/QUEUE/MANAGER
START/SERVER server-name[:]
viii

2-125
2-126
2-126
2-126
2-128
2-128
2-129
2-130
2-130
2-130
2-131
2-131
2-132
2-132
2-132
2-134
2-134
2-135
2-135
2-137
2-138
2 138
2-139
2-139
2-140
2 140
2-141
2-141
2 141
2-142
2-144
2 144
2-145
2-145
2 146

STOP
STOP/lAT [Ethernet-device:]
STOP/OPERATOR_SERViCES
STOP/QUEUE queue-name[:]
STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER
STOP/SERVER server-name[:]
SUBMIT filespec[, ... ] [entry-spec]
TYPE [node::]filespec[, ...]
UNLOAD/INDEX [dev[:]]
UNLOAD/LIBRARY library-name
UNLOAD/OVERLAY overlay-name[, ...]
UNLOAD/RUNTIME_SYSTEM name
WAIT [delta-time]
WRITE channel-number data[, ...]

2-146
2-147
2-147
2-147
2 148
2 148
2-148
2 150
2-151
2-151
2-151
2-152
2-152
2-152

3 Del Functions
Format of DCl Functions
F$ACCESS
F$ASCII
F$CHR
F$CVTIME
F$EDIT
F$ENVIRONMENT
F$INSTR
F$INTEGER
F$JOB
F$lEFT
F$lENGTH
F$MESSAGE
F$MID
F$NODE
F$PARSE

3-1
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4

3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-5

F$PRIVILEGE
F$RIGHT
F$SEARCH
F$STRING
F$TERMINAL
F$TIME
F$TVPE
F$USER
F$VERIFV

System Utility Programs

COpy
DIRECT
FILCOM
FIT
GRIPE
HELP
ODT
PIP
PMDUMP
SVSTAT
TALK

4-1
4-2
4-7
4-10
4-12
4-12
4-14
4-17
4-26
4-27
4-36

Programming Information

RMSDES Utility Summary
RMSIFL Utility Summary
RMSCNV Utility Summary
RMSDSP Utility Summary
RMSBCK Utility Summary
RMSRST Utility Summary
x

3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6

5-1
5-6

5-7
5-9
5-9
5-11

BASIC-PLUS _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,5-12
5-12
Commands
Statements
5-17
Statement Modifiers
5-29
Variable Types
5-30
Functions
5-31
5-42
Arithmetic, Numeric and String Relational Operators
Numeric and String Internal Data Storage
5-43
Logical Operators
5-44
Logical (Boolean) values in BASIC-PLUS
5-45
Integer Data
5-46
Floating-Point Data
5-47
Stiing Data _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 5-48
Reserved Keywords _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,5-49
BASIC-PLUS Cross-Reference Program (BPCREF)
5-50
Devices
5-52
Disks
5-53
SPEC% Function for Disks
5-54
Flexible Diskettes
5-55
SPECO/o Function for Flexible Diskettes
5--56
Magnetic Tape
5-58
MODE Values for Non-File-Structured Magnetic Tape (FIRQB + FQMODE)--5-58
SPECO/o Function for Magnetic Tape
5-59
Line Printers
5-59
Terminals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 5-61
SPEC% Function for Terminals
Pseudo Keyboards
SPECO/o Function for Pseudo Keyboards
Character Sets
RADIX-50 Character/Position Table
RSTS/E System Errors
Syntax and Parsing
Command Syntax
Command Parsing

5-63
5-64
5-65
5-65
5-65
5-76
5-91
5-91
5-92

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

BATCH (OPSER-based) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,A-1
QUE
RESTOR

A-12
A-15

Tables
1-1 Control Characters and Terminal Keys _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
3-1
3-2
3-3
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7

File Types
1-6
Individual Protection Codes
1-11
Executable Protection Codes
1-11
Commonly Used Protection Codes
1-12
RSTS/E Device Designators
1-13
Summary of RSTS/E Multiple Privileges
1-16
Edit-Code Values for F$EDIT Function
3-7
Keywords and Return Values for F$ENVIRONMENT Function
3-8
Field Keywords for F$PARSE Function
3-9
ODT Characters and Symbols
4-14
ODT Question Responses
4-17
Abbreviations for Full SYSTAT Report
4-31
Abbreviations for Open File Reports
4-35
Attribute Settings
5-1
Variable Types
5-30
1% Values for CVT$ Function
5-33
Relational Operators
5-42
Reserved Keywords for BASIC-PLUS and BASIC-PLUS-2
5-49
MODE Values for File-Structured Disk Access (FIRQB + FQMODE)---.5-53
MODE Values for Non-Fife-Structured Disk Access (FIRQB +
FQMODE)
5-54
5-8 MODE Values for Flexible Diskettes (FIRQB + FQMODE)
5-55
5-9 RECORD Values for Flexible Diskettes (XRB + XRBLK)
5 56
5-10 MODE Values for File-Structured Magnetic Tape (FIRQB + FQMODE)-5-58

xii

5-11 MODE Values for Line Printers (FIRaB + FaMODE)
5-12 RECORD Values for Line Printers (XRB + XRMODE)
5-13 MODE Values for Terminals (FIRaB + FaMOD)
5-14 RECORD Values for Terminal Input (XRB + XRMOD)
5-15 RECORD Values for Terminal Output (XRB + XRMOD)
5-16 MODE Values for Pseudo Keyboards (FIRaB + FaMODE)
5-17 RECORD Option Bit Values for Pseudo Keyboard Output (XRB +
XRMOD)
5-18 RADIX-50 Character/Position Numeric Values
5-19 ASCII-to-RADIX-50 Conversion
5-20 ASCII Character Set
5-21 Severity Standard in Error Messages
5-22 RSTS/E Error Messages
5-23 RMS Error Messages
5-24 BPSTATUS Variable Bits
A-1 RESTOR Dialogue Summary
A-2 LOADINDEX Dialogue Summary
A-3 LIST Dialogue Summary
A-4 RESTOR Interruption Commands

5-60
5-60
5-61
5-62
5-62
5-64
5-64
5-66
5-67
5-68
5-76
5=75
5-86
5-93
A-16
A-18
A-20
A-22

xiii

Preface

Purpose of This Guide
This manual describes the use of DCL (Digital Command Language),
System Utility Programs, and general programming information on
RSTSIE.

Terms Used in This Guide
The following terms are used throughout this guide:
Command Line

The part of a command string you type on one line on your terminal.
Command String

A complete command, including the command name, parameters, and
switches or qualifiers (if any).
Default

A built-in value that the system assumes when you do not supply a
particular value. For example, when you do not supply a device name
in a file specification, the system assumes the public disk structure.

Parameter

Part of a command string that specifies what the command is acting
on. For example, the COpy command acts on files, so its parameters
are file specifications.
Qualifier

In DCL, part of a command string that modifies the command's action
in some way. For example, the PRINT command's /COPIES qualifier
lets you print several copies of a file. All qualifiers start with a slash
(/).

Switch

A synonym for qualifier; that is, part of a command string that modifies the command's action in some way. For example, using the IDE
switch in a PIP command causes PIP to delete the specified file. Like
qualifiers, all switches start with a slash (I).
This guide uses the term switch instead of qualifier when describing
system utility programs and command environments other than DCL.

xvi

Conventions
[ ]

Indicates an optional part of a command. This does not apply to
[p,pn] where the brackets ([ ]) are part of the required command
syntax.

{}

Indicates a required choice of one item among two or more
possibilities.
Indicates a choice of one item among two or more possibilities.
Indicates that you can repeat the preceding item in the command
format.

color

Indicates examples.
Indicates that you can use a DCL qualifier over the DECnet
computer network (if your system has DECnet/E).

CtrVx

Represents the Ctrl key and another character, represented here
by x. For example, enter CtrllU by holding down the Ctrl key and
pressing the key labeled U. RSTS echoes or displays the character
at your terminal as AU.

Summary of Technical Changes for RSTS/E V10.0
RSTSIE VI0.0 is a major release of the RSTSIE PDP-II operating
system. This manual describes the following new features:
•
•
•
•

Extended logicals
Host initiated (Outbound) LAT
Command line editing and recall
OperatorlMessage Services (OMS)

xvii

Chapter 1

System Information
This chapter provides system information. Table 1-1 lists the RSTSlE
control characters and terminal keys.
Table 1-1: Control Characters and Terminal Keys
Key

Function

CtrllA or F14

Toggles from overstrike editing mode to insert
mode, or vice versa, while editing a command line.
Effective only until a delimiter is entered, then the
mode reverts back to the terminal setting.

CtrllB or Up Arrow

Recalls the previous command typed by the user
at the current command level. When CtrllB or Up
Arrow is entered, the current line, if any, is erased
and the next previous command from the recall
buffer is put in its place. The cursor is positioned
at the end of the recalled command, regardless of
the position of the cursor previous to the recall.

CtrllC

Halts execution of the current command or program
and usually returns control to the job keyboard
monitor. (In some programs, CtrllC may return you
to the program's command level.) CtrllC echoes on
the terminal as "C. You can lose data with CtrllC
because it causes an immediate halt.

CtrllD or Left. Arrow

Moves the cursor to the left. or backwards one
character position in the command line. If the
cursor is already at the beginning of the command
line, the key is ignored.

System Information 1-1

Table 1-1 (Cont.):

Control Characters and Terminal Keys

Key

Function

CtrllF or Right Arrow

Moves the cursor to the right or forward one character position in the command line. If the cursor is
already at the end of the command line, the key is
ignored.

CtrllH, BACKSPACE, or
F12

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command
line. If the cursor is already at the beginning of the
command line, the key is ignored.

CtrllE

Moves the cursor to the end of the command line.
If the cursor is already at the end of the command
line, the key is ignored.

CtrllI or TAB

Moves the cursor to the next tab stop on the terminalline. By default, tab stops are eight spaces
apart (see the SET TERMINAUTAB command).

CtrllJ, LINE FEED, or
F13

On terminals that do not support line editing, ends
the current line. LINE FEED moves the cursor
to the next line but does not return the cursor to
the left side of the screen. On terminals that do
support line editing, deletes the word to the left of
the cursor.

CtrllL or FORM FEED

Sends a typed line to the system for processing
and skips four lines on a video terminal. FORM
FEED and CtrllL advance the paper to the top of
the next page on hardcopy terminals (see the SET
TERMINAUFORM_FEED command).

CtrllN or Down Arrow

Performs a function similar to CtrllB or UpArrow
except it moves forward in the recall list, obtaining
the next command entered. Requesting a forward
recall when at the most recent entered command
of the recall buffer results in erasing the current
command line on the screen and no line is recalled.

CtrllO

Stops and restarts terminal output while a program
is running. CtrllO does not affect program execution; however, the system discards all terminal
output the program produces between the time you
stop output and restart it again. CtrllO echoes on
the terminal as "0.

1-2 System Information

Table 1-1 (Cont.): Control Characters and Terminal Keys
Key

Function

Ctr1lQ

Resumes terminal output suspended by Ctr1lS
while a program is running. You can use Ctr1lQ
only if the DCL TTSYNC (or STALL) characteristic
is set for the terminal.

CtrllR

Redisplays all characters you typed since the
last time you terminated a line, as well as any
characters you typed ahead that the system has not
yet processed.

Ctr1lS

Suspends terminal output while a program is running. You can use Ctr1lS only if the DCL TTSYNC
(or STALL) characteristic is set for the terminal.
\V-hen you use CtriiS, the system saves all terminal output that the program produces instead of
discarding it (as it does when you use Ctr1l0).

CtrllT

Displays a one-line status report for your job. The
report includes your job number, keyboard number,
job state, current run-time system, and other
information.

CtrllU

Erases all characters from the beginning of the line
to the cursor. The remaining characters are shifted
to the beginning of the command line. CtrllU erases
characters from the screen on terminals which
support line editing. On multiline commands,
deletes only the portion of the command from the
cursor to the left margin.

CtrllX

Deletes all type-ahead including the current terminal line. CtrllX echoes as 1\X and moves the cursor
to the next line.

Ctr1lZ

Exits most RSTSIE system programs. Ctr1JZ also
signals the end of a terminal input file.

Ctr1l[, ESCAPE, or
ALTMODE

Sends a typed line to the system for processing
or starts an escape sequence if the terminal is set
/ESCAPE_SEQUENCE. ESCAPE, ALTMODE, and
Ctrl/[ echo on your terminal as a dollar sign ($).

System Information

1-3

Table 1-1 (Cont.):

Control Characters and Terminal Keys

Key

Function

DELETE or RUBOUT

Erases the character to the left of the cursor. Any
characters to the right of the cursor are shifted to
the left. On hardcopy terminals, erased characters
are displayed between backslashes.

NO SCROLL

Performs the same function as CtrllS and CtrllQ on
the VT100, VT101, VT125, and other VT100-family
terminals. The DCL SET TERMINAUrTSYNC (or
STALL) characteristic must be set for the terminal.

HOLD SCREEN

Performs the same function as NO SCROLL on the
VT200 and VT300-family terminals.

RETURN

Sends a typed line or command to the system for
processing. Pressing RETURN moves the cursor to
the beginning of the next line.

Files
This section provides information on the file specification format, file
types, file specification switches, and file protection codes.

File Specification
A file specification is the full name and location of a file. It has the
format:
node: :device:[p,pn]filename. typ/switches

1-4 System Information

where:
node::

Specifies a node name on the DECnet network. The default
node is your system. You can specify a node name only
in certain DCL and DECnetiE commands. You use node
names only if your system is part of a DECnet network.

device:

Specifies a physical or logical device name. The default
device is the public disk structure.

[p,pn]

Specifies the directory on the device, identified by its
project-programmer number (PPN). The default is your
current account. You can include a dollar sign ($) in place
of a PPN to indicate directory [1,2], which is the system
library. You can include a percent sign (%) in place of a
PPN to indicate directory [1,4]. You can include an ampersand (&) in place of a PPN to indicate directory [1,5]. You
can include a pound sign (#) in place of a PPN to indicate
directory [your project number,O].

filename

Specifies a one- to six-character file name.

typ

Specifies a one- to three-character file type. The deiault file
type depends on the command or program you are using.

/switches

Specifies one or more RSTSIE file specification switches:
!PROTECTION, /CLUSTERSIZE, IFILESIZE, !POSITION,
IRONLY, or !MODE. These switches specify the file protection code, cluster size, and other values.
You cannot use RSTSIE file specification switches in DCL
except where specified as a valid qualifier in the command
description. Instead, you use DCL commands and qualifiers
to set these values. Note that !MODE and !POSITION
switches have no DCL equivalent.

The next three sections provide more detail on file types, :file specification switches, and file protection codes. Table 1-2 lists RSTSIE file
types and their meanings.

System Information

1-5

Table 1-2:
File Type

File Types

.B2S

BASIC-PLUS-2 source file

.BAC

BASIC-PLUS compiled file

.BAK

Backup file created by several types of utility programs

.BAS

BASIC-PLUS source file

.BCK

BACKUP container set (or RMSBCK container set)

A program written in C language.

Meaning

.CBL

COBOL source file

.CMD

Command file

.COM

DCL command file (or PBS Batch command file)

.CRF

Cross-reference listing file

.CTL

Batch control file (or OPSER based Batch)

.DAT

Data file

.DBL

DIBOL source file

.DIF

DIFFERENCES or FILCOM output file

.DIR

A file produced by the DIRECTORY command

.DOC

RUNOFF output file

.EDT

EDT initialization file

.ERR

System error file

.ESC

Terminal SETUP file

.FLB

FMS-ll form library file

.FOR

FORTRAN-N source file

.FTN

FORTRAN-77 source file

.HLP

System program help text file

.LIB

Resident library file

.LNK

Input file used by the LINK command (Digital supplied)

.LOG

Batch output log file

.LST

Listing file

.MAC

MACRO source file

.MAl

DECmaillRSTS mailbox file

1-6 System Information

Table 1-2 (Cont.):

File Types

File Type

Meaning

.MAP

Map file created by the LINK command or Task Builder

.MLB

MACRO Library file used by the RSX-based MACRO assembler

.MSG

DECmail message file

.OBJ

Object file, which is a compiled BASIC-PLUS-2, COBOL, DIBOL,
FORTRAN, or MACRO program

.ODL

Overlay Description Language input file used by the Task Builder

.OLB

Object module library file used by the Task Builder

.OMS

OperatorlMessage Services log file

.PMD

Postmortem dump file

.RNO

RUNOFF input file

.RTS

Run-time system

.SAV

Executable FORTRAN-IV or MACRO program produced by the
LINK command or the RTli-based LiNK program

.SIL

Save Image Library used by the RSTSIE monitor or system
program

.SKL

Skeleton file produced by the COBOL-8I compiler

.SML

RTll source MACRO library

.SRT

SORT-II file

.STB

Symbol table file produced by the Task Builder or linker

.SYS

System file, usually reserved for use by the system

.TEC

TECO source file

.TES

TECO source program

.TMP

Temporary file created by a system program (deleted when you
log out or if the disk is rebuilt)

.TSK

Executable BASIC-PLUS-2, COBOL, DIBOL, FORTRAN-77, or
MACRO program produced by the LINK command or the Task
Builder

.TXT

ASCII text file

.ULB

A universal library

.UNI

Default file type for universal library files

System Information 1-7

File Specification Switches
This section lists the RSTSIE file specification switches.

ICLUSTERSIZE
Specifies the cluster size for a disk file. A cluster is one or more
contiguous disk blocks that the system treats as a unit when it creates
or extends a file. Using a large cluster size for a large file speeds access
to the data.
You can specify a cluster size of 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 blocks,
depending on the type of disk. The default (and minimum) value is the
disk's pack cluster size.

Format
ICL[USTERSIZE]:[-][#]n[.]
where:
Specifies a negative cluster size, which prevents an error if you
specify a cluster size less than the disk's pack cluster size.
'#

Specifies that n is an octal number.

Specifies the cluster size in blocks.
Specifies that n is a decimal number. The default is decimal.

Example
/CL:-8

Assigns a cluster size of 8 or the disk's pack cluster size, whichever is
larger.

IFILESIZE
ISIZE
Reserves space on disk for the file. When you create a file, use this
switch to pre-extend the file to its final size. IFILESIZE and ISIZE are
the same. When you do not pre-extend a file, system assigns a size of 0
blocks when it creates the file and extends the file as data is written to
it.

1-8

System Information

Format
IFI[LESIZE]:[#]n[.] or /SI[ZE]:[#]n[.]
where:
#

Specifies that n is an octal number.

Specifies the number of blocks to pre-extend the file.
Specifies that n is a decimal number. The default is decimal.

Example
/FI:3000

Pre-extends a disk file to 3000 blocks.

IMODE
Lets you pass up to 15 bits of information to a device driver when
you open a file. The meaning of the bits differs for each device and
determines the read/write mode for data transfers.

Format
/MO[DE]:[#]n[.]
where:
#

Specifies that n is an octal number.

Specifies the mode value, which can range from 0 to 32767 (decimal).
Specifies that n is a decimal number. The default is decimal.

Example
/MO:16

Specifies a contiguous disk file.

System Information 1-9

IPOSITION

Specifies the physical location of a file on disk.
Format
IPO[SITION]:n
where:
n specifies the device cluster nwnber (in decimal) at which to place the
first block of the file. Valid device cluster nwnbers depend on the disk
size.
Example
jPO:4000

Causes the system to locate the disk file starting at device cluster
nwnber 4000.
IPROTECTION

Assigns a protection code to the file. The default protection code is 60.
Format
IPR[OTECTION]:[#]n[.]
where:
#

Specifies that n is an octal number.
Specifies the protection code.
Specifies that n is a decimal number. The default is decimal.

Example
/PR: 40

Specifies a protection code of 40.
IRONLY

Sets read-only mode for a disk file. IRONLY is the same as
IMODE:8192 for disk files.
Format
IRO[NLY]

1-10

System Information

File Protection Codes
You assign protection codes to files in all RSTS/E command environments except DCL by using the !PROTECTION switch. In DCL, you
assign protection codes to files using the SET PROTECTION command
or the !PROTECTION qualifier in several DCL commands. Table 1-3
and Table 1-4 list RSTS/E protection codes and their meanings.
Table 1-3:
Code

Individual Protection Codes
Meaning

Protection against reading by the owner

Protection against writing by the owner

Protection against reading by the owner's group

Protection against writing by the owner's group

Protection against reading by anyone not in the owner's group

Protection against writing by anyone not in the owner's group

Executable program, which can be run

128

A protected data file; overwritten with zeros when deleted

When you add individual codes to executable protection code 64, the
system interprets these codes differently from those previously listed.
Table 1-4: Executable Protection Codes
64 + Code

Meaning

Protection against executing by the owner

Protection against reading and writing by the owner

Protection against executing by the owner's group

Protection against reading and writing by the owner's group

Protection against executing by all others not in the owner's
group

Protection against reading and writing by all others not in the
owner's group

128

Program with privileges (cannot be used on .com files)

System Information

1-11

1b detennine the protection code you assign to a file, add up the
individual code numbers for the types of protection you want. For
example, the usual system default <60> protects against reading,
writing, and deleting by all users except its owner, because it is the
sum of 4, 8, 16, and 32.
Table 1-5 lists some common protection codes and their meanings.

Table 1-5: Commonly Used Protection Codes
Code

Sum of Codes

Meaning

232

128+64+32+8

Executable file that is privileged and protected against reading and writing by anyone
except the owner. However, anyone can
execute the file.

124

Executable file that is protected against
reading, writing, and execution by anyone
except the owner.

104

Executable file that is protected against
reading and writing by anyone except the
owner and that anyone can execute.

Protection against reading by anyone except
the owner. Protection against accidental
deletion or modification by the owner or
anyone else.

32+16+8+4

Protection against reading and writing by
anyone except the owner.

32+16

Protection against reading and writing by
anyone not in the owner's group. Can be
read or written by anyone in the owner's
group.

42
40

1-12

System Information

Protection against writing by anyone including the owner, but is readable by everyone.

32+8

Protection against writing by anyone except
the owner, but is readable by everyone.
No protection (any user can read, write, and
delete).

Device Names
Each device on a RSTS/E system has a physical device name, also
called a device designator or device specification.
A physical device name consists of two or three letters, an optional
unit number, and a colon (:). For example, "KBO:" is a "keyboard,"
or terminal, with the unit number o. Other terminals on your system
have similar device names assigned to them, such as "KB7:" or "KB35:".
Three letter names are valid for keyboards only (see Table 1-6).
If you do not specify a physical device name, the system assumes the
public disk structure. For non-file-structured devices (line printer, and
so forth), you need only specify the physical device name; the system
ignores any file name, file type, or directory that you specify.
If you do not specify a unit number, the defaults are:
Disk - Public structure
Tape - Unit 0
Keyboard - Yours
Line printer - Unit 0
Flexible diskette - Unit 0
Table 1-6 lists RSTSIE device designators.
Table 1-6:

RSTS/E Device Designators

Designator

Device

DK:, DL:, DM:,
DP:, DR:, DB:, DU:,

RSTSIE public disk structure

SY:
SYO:

System disk

DKO: toDK7:

RK05 disk units 0 through 7

DLO: to DL3:

RLOlIRL02 disk units 0 through 3

DMO: to DM7:

RK06IRK07 disk units 0 through 7

DRO: to DR7:

RM02IRM03IRM05IRM80 disk units 0 through 7

DBO: to DB7:

RP04IRP05IRP06 disk units 0 through 7

System Information

1-13

Table 1-6 (Cont.):

RSTS/E Device Designators

Designator

Device

DUO: to DU15:

RA601RA701RA801RA8l1RA821RA901RC251RD31/RD32
IRD51IRD52IRD53IRD541RX.331RX50 disk units 0
through 15

CR:

CR11 punched or CMI1 mark sense card reader

CD:

CD11 punched card reader

KB:

Your terminal

KBn:

Terminal n on your system

KBAnn:

Terminal on subline nn of a DL11 A,B type single line
interface

KBBnn:

Terminal on subline nn of a DLll C,D type single line
interface

KBCnn:

Terminal on subline nn of a DL11E type single line
modem interface

KBDnn:

Terminal on subline nn of a static pseudo keyboard

KBFnn:

Terminal on subline nn of the DH multiplexers

KBGnn:

Terminal on subline nn of the DZlDZVIDZQ multiplexers

KBHnn:

Terminal on subline nn of the DHVIDHUIDHQlCX
multiplexers

KBInn:

Dynamic terminal number nn

MTO: to MT7:

TE10trU10fI'S03 magnetic tape units 0 through 7

MMO: toMM7:

TE16!I'U16fI'U45trU77 magnetic tape units 0 through 7

MSO: to MS3:

TS11fI'U80trS05trK25 magnetic tape units 0 through 3

MUO: to MU1:

TK50trU81fI'U81E magnetic tape units 0 or 1

LPO: to LP7:

Line printer units 0 through 7

TTn:

Terminal n in the system (synonym for KBn:)

TT: or TI:

Your terminal (synonyms for KB:, the terminal that
started the job)

NL:

The null device

PKn:

Pseudo keyboard n

DXO: to DX7: or
DYO: to DY7:

RX01IRX02 flexible diskette units 0 through 7

1-14 System Information

NOTE

If your system has only TSll, TU80, or TSV05 tape units,
MS: and MT: are synonyms. If your system has only
TE16, TU16, TU45, or TU77 tape units, MM: and MT: are
synonyms. If your system has only TK50, TU8l, or TU8lE
tape units, MU: and MT: are synonyms. On systems that
have the COlI card reader, CR: is a synonym for CD:.

Logical Names
You can assign a logical name to a physical device name, a directory,
or a device/directory combination. A logical name consists of up to 15
alphanumeric characters followed by a colon (:). Boih user and system
logical names al!o\v the the underscore L) character. Ho\vever, the
dollar sign ($) character is only allowed in the system logical names.
Logical names provide a convenient way to refer to devices and directories that you USe often. Logical nameS are also USeful in programs
and batch control files because they make them independent of physical
locations of files and devices. For example, when you use a physical
device name in a program, the program works correctly only if the
device you refer to is mounted on the drive you specify. But when you
use a logical name, you can mount the device on any free drive and
assign the logical name to the device before running the program.
Using the ASSIGN command, you can assign a logical name in any
RSTSIE command environment. The command syntax is:
ASSIGN dev:[[p,pn]] logical-name[:]
In DCL, you can include a colon at the end of the logical name. In
other RSTSIE command environments, such as BASIC-PLUS, you
cannot include the colon.
The following command assigns the logical name INDEX: to tape drive
MMO:.
ASSIGN MMO: INDEX

Any logical name you assign applies only to your job. The logical name
stays in effect until you deassign it with the DEASSIGN command or
log out.

System Information 1-15

RSTS/E Multiple Privileges
Table 1-7 provides a swnmary of the RSTSIE multiple privileges.
Table 1-7:
Privilege

1-16

Summary of RSTS/E Multiple Privileges
Description

none

Most normal activity except those listed below.

DATES

Change system clock and file dates.

DEVICE

Access restricted devices.

EXQTA

Exceed disk quota or memory maximum. (Not usually given
to users; used by privileged programs.)

GACNT

Perform accounting operations on accounts in the user's
group.

GREAD

Read or execute any file in the user's group, regardless of
protection code.

GWRITE

Write or create/rename any file in the user's group, regardless of protection code.

HWCFG

Set hardware configuration parameters; for example, set
terminal characteristics.

HWCTL

Control devices; for example, disable a device or hang up a
dialup line.

INSTAL

Install run-time systems, swap files, and resident libraries.

JOBCTL

Manipulate other jobs; for example, detach or kill a job.

MOUNT

Mount or dismount disks other than NOSHARE.

OPER

Show, delete, or reply to operator requests and messages,
and control the OperatorlMessage Services (OMS) package.

PBSCTL

Control printlbatch services; for example, tum servers on or
off, change printer forms.

RDMEM

PEEK at memory. (Not usually given to users; used by
privileged programs.)

RDNFS

Read disks non-file-structured.

SEND

Broadcast to terminals and send messages to restricted
receivers.

SETPAS

Change your own password.

System Information

Table 1-7 (Cont.): Summary of RSTS/E Multiple Privileges
Description
Privilege
SHUTUP

Shut down the system.

SWCFG

Set software configuration parameters; for example, installation name.

SWCTL

Control software components; for example, turn DECnet on
and off.

SYSIO

Perform restricted 110 operations; for example, gain write
access to files in account [0,*], or set the privilege bit in
data files (files with the executable bit <64> not set).

SYSMOD

Perform functions that could easily modify the system; for
example, poke memory.

TMPPRV

Control the setting of the privilege bit <128> in the protection code of an executable program (files with the executable
bit <64> set).

TUNE

Control system tuning parameters; for example, caching or
job priority.

USERl-8

Available for customer applications. Not used by RSTSIE.

WACNT

Perform accounting operations on any account.

WREAD

Read or execute any file regardless of protection code.

WRTNFS

Read/write a non-file-structured disk.

WWRITE

Write any file regardless of protection code. Create/rename
any file except account [0,*].

System Information

1-17

Chapter 2

DCl Commands
This chapter describes how to enter DeL commands. It provides
infonnation on each DeL command such as privileges required and
command qualifiers.

Rules for Entering DCl Commands
This section describes the rules for entering DeL commands.

Uppercase and Lowercase Letters
You can use any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters in DeL
commands.

Numbers
DeL treats all numbers as decimal integers.

Spaces and Tabs
You must enter at least one space or tab between the command name
and the first parameter and at least one space between additional
parameters. You can use multiple spaces and tabs in all cases where
you can use a single space or tab. For example:
COpy DAY.DAT

NIGHT. OAT

DCl Commands

2-1

DCL ignores spaces and tabs at the beginning and end of a command
string; around commas, plus signs, and equal signs; and around colons
that delimit qualifier values. You cannot use spaces and tabs in file
specifications, dates and times, keywords, and numbers.

Qualifiers
You type a qualifier after the command name but before pressing
RETURN. You must precede each qualifier with a slash (t). You can
include any number of spaces or tabs before or after the slash. For
example:
PRINT STATUS.RPT

/COPIES=5

Entering Qualifier Arguments
Many qualifiers have arguments, which can be keywords, file specifications, character strings, or numbers. You must separate a qualifier and
its argument with either an equal sign (=) or a colon (:). For example:
SET TERMINAL/WIDTH=132
SET TERMINAL/WIDTH:132

Command Line Labels
Command line labels identify lines in a command procedure to which
control passes when a GOTO or GOSUB command executes. Labels
can be 1 to 255 characters long using the characters A-Z, 0-9, $,
and _. Labels must appear as the first item on a command line, must
be preceded by a dollar sign ($), and must be followed by a colon (:).
For example:
$LABEL1:

You cannot use labels that begin with a dollar sign ($), or include
embedded spaces or tabs. You can specify only one label on a command
line. You cannot use a label name more than once in a command
procedure.

2-2

DCl Commands

Abbreviating Commands
You can abbreviate command names, command keyword parameters,
qualifiers, and qualifier keyword values:
•

You can always abbreviate command names, parameters, qualifiers,
and qualifier arguments to the first four characters, excluding
slashes and underscores. You can further abbreviate to the first
two or three characters as long as the abbreviation is unique within
DeL. For example:
PR STATUS.RPT/FO=NORMAL

•

Some qualifiers permit a negated form. For example, INOJOURNAL
is the negated form of the IJOURNAL qualifier. When applying the
minimum four-character rule, do not include the NO prefix as iwo
of the four characters. For example:
EDIT/NOJOUR FILE.DAT

Continuing Commands on More Than One line
The entire specification of a command is called the command string,
which can be one or more physical command lines. You can enter up to
132 characters on each physical line. When you use multiple physical
command lines to continue a command string, type a hyphen (-) as the
last character on each line before pressing RETURN. You can use as
many physical lines as you want as long as the complete command
string does not exceed 255 characters.
For example:
PRINT STATUS.RPT/COPIES=S,Continue: CHKBK.B2S/COPIES=2,Continue: CHAP3.TXT/COPIES=10

If you include a comment on the command line, the hyphen must be
the last nonblank character before the comment. For example:
PRINT STATUS.RPT/COPIES=2-!THIS IS A DRILL REPORT

When you recall a command that has been entered on more than one
line, the entire command is displayed on one line with the hyphens
removed.

DCl Commands

2-3

Entering File Specification Lists
When you enter more than one file specification, separate them with
commas (,) or plus signs (+). Any number of spaces or tabs can precede
and follow the commas or plus signs. For example:
DELETE JUNK.TXT,OLDPRG.B2S
APPEND PART1.TXT +PART2.TXT+

PART3.TXT WHOLE. TXT

Absolute Date Formats
You can specify any date from 1-JAN-70 to 31-DEC-99. Use one of the
following formats:
•

•

The alphanumeric format dd-mmm-yy. In this format, you specify
June 13, 1989 as 13-JUN-89. You do not have to include leading
zeros. You can also specify four digits for the year. When you omit
the year, the current year is the default.
The numeric format yy.mm.dd. In this format, you specify April 9,
1989 as 89.4.9. You do not have to include leading zeros. You can
also specify four digits for the year.
The keywords TODAY, TOMORROW, or YESTERDAY. The current
system date determines the values for these keywords.

Absolute Time Formats
Use one of the following formats:
•

The 24-hour format hh:mm. In this format, hh is the hour in the
range 0 to 24 and mm is the minute in the range 0 to 59. The
minute is optional.
00:00 is midnight, and is considered the beginning of the specified
date.
12:00 is noon. 24:00 is midnight, and is considered the end of the
specified date.

2-4

DCl Commands

•

The AMlPM format hh:mrnAM, hh:mmPM. or 12:00M. In this
format, hh is the hour in the range 1 to 12, mm is the minute in
the range 0 to 59, and M stands for meridian (noon). Do not include
a space between the minute and AM, PM, or M. Use 12:00AM to
specify midnight.

Combining Absolute Dates and Times
To specify both date and time, use date:time, where date and time are
any of the absolute date and time formats previously described. For
example:
16-DEC-89:11:00AM
TOMORROW:l:00AM

If you specify only a time, the date default is TODAY. If you specify only
a date when using the JAFfER qualifier, the time default is 11:59PM.
That is, the job is processed at the end of the specified day.

Relative Dates and Times
Use one of the following formats:

•

To change the date using relative dates, use the format +nD[AYS]
or -nD[AYS]. For example:
+23D, which increments the specified absolute date by 23 days. If
you do not specify an absolute date, the date default is TODAY.
To change the time in a DATE:TIME specification, use +nH[OURS]
or -nH[OURS] to change the hour. To change the minute, use
+nM[INUTES] or -nM[lNUTES]. For example:
-2HOURS-20MINUTES indicates a time 2 hours and 20 minutes
from the absolute time. If you do not specify an absolute time, the
time default is the current time.

You can specify these formats in any order and in any combination.

Del Commands 2-5

Combining Absolute and Relative Dates and Times
When you combine absolute and relative dates and times, you must
specify the absolute date and time first, immediately followed by the
relative date and time. For example:
lO-AUG-89:10:12AM-2DAYS+3HOURS+30MINUTES

returns 8-Aug-89 at 1:42PM.

DCl Commands and Qualifiers
This section lists RSTS/E DCL commands and qualifiers.

@file-spec [P1 [P2 [... P8]]]
Executes a DeL command procedure.
Privilege required: Read access to the command procedure file.

ALLOCATE dev[:] [Iogical-name[:]]
Reserves a device, if it is not currently allocated by another user, so
that only you can use it. Optionally assigns a logical name to the
device. A logical name consists of up to 15 alphanumeric characters
and can include underscores L).
Privilege required:
•
•

DEVICE if the device is restricted
HWCTL to use the ISEIZE or IJOB qualifier for an account other
than your own

Command Qualifiers
IJOB=n
Allocates the device to the specified job number.

2-6

DCl Commands

I[NO]QUEUED
Specifies the queuing characteristic of the local LAT port you are
allocating. This setting is in effect until you deallocate the device. If
IQUEUED is specified, connections initiated by this local LAT port to
a tenninal server will be placed on the server's queue if the server
supports queuing and the remote port is busy. If INOQUEUED is
specified and the remote port is busy, connections will not be queued
and it will fail.

Use the SHOW PORT command to display the port's connection status.
If the port is set IQUElJED and the remote port is busy, a connection
status of "In Progress" and the position in the queue will be shown.
The default is the queued setting of the port when it was created or
assigned.
ISEIZE
Reallocates the device currently allocated to another job to the specified
job, unless the device is currently in use by the other job.

APPEND [node::]input-filespec[, ... ] [node::]output-filespec
Adds the contents of one or more files to the end of an existing file.
Privilege required:
•
•

Read access to the input files
Write access to the output file

Command Qualifiers
IBEFORE=date
ICREATED
!MODIFIED
ISINCE=date
Appends files created or modified before or since the specified date.
![NO]CONFIRM
Indicates whether to prompt before appending files and is a synonym
for I[NO]QUERY. The default is INOCONFIRM.
![NO]LOG~

Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for each file
appended. The default is /LOG.
DCl Commands

2-7

I[NO]QUERY ~
Indicates whether to prompt before appending files. The default is
INOQUERY.
ISELECT

=SIZE=n
=SIZE=MINIMUM=n

}

{ =SIZE=~UM=n
=SIZE=(MINIMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n)
Selects files based on their size. The specified size can be:
n

Selects only those files with size equal to n.

MINlMUM=n

Selects only those files with size greater
than or equal to n.

MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size less than
or equal to n.

MINlMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size between m
and n inclusive.

ASSIGN dev:[[p,pn]] logical-name[:]
Assigns a logical name to a directory or a physical device. A logical
name consists of up to 15 alphanumeric characters and can include
underscores (_). Systemwide logical names can also include dollar signs
($).

Privilege required: INSTAL to use the ISYSTEM qualifier

Command Qualifier
I[NO]REPLACE[ =QUE RY]
Replaces a logical name if it already exists and is used with the
ISYSTEM or /uSER qualifiers. If not specified with ISYSTEM, the
default is !REPLACE=QUERY. If not specified with /USER, the default
is !REPLACE.
ISYSTEM
Assigns a systemwide logical name to a device and/or PPN.IUSER is
the default if neither ISYSTEM nor /uSER is specified.

/uSER
Assigns a user-defined logical name to a device and/or PPN. /uSER is
the default if neither ISYSTEM nor /uSER is specified.

2-8 Del Commands

ASSIGN/PORT port-name[:] server-name
Assigns a local LAT port on the RSTSIE node to a remote terminal
server. You must select a remote service and/or a remote port offered
by the specified terminal server.
The port-name parameter specifies the name of the local port that will
be assigned to the terminal server. The port-name must be in the form
of KBIn: or KBn: where n is a value from 0 through 127. The servername specifies the name of a remote terminal server to which the port
can be connected. The server-name can be up to 16 alphanumeric
characters in length.

Privilege required: SVICFG
Command Qualifier
IAPPLICATION
Specifies that this port is to be used as an application terminal. The
default is IAPPLICATION.
fLAT
Assigns a LAT port. The default is fLAT.
![NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message after the port is
assigned. The default is fLOG.
I[NO]QUEUED
Indicates whether the connection to a terminal server will be placed on
the server's queue if the remote port is busy and the server supports
queuing. If INOQUEUED is specified and the remote port is busy, the
connection will not be queued and it will fail. The default is IQUEUED.

Use the SHOW PORT command to display the port's connection status.
If the port is set IQUEUED and the remote port is busy, a connection
status of "In Progress" and the position in the queue will be shown.
IREMOTE_PORT=remote-port-name
Specifies the name of a remote port on the terminal server to which the
local LAT port is to be connected. The remote port name can be up to
16 alphanumeric characters in length.
You must select either a remote port or a service.

DCl Commands

2-9

ISERVICE=service-name
Specifies the name of a remote service offered at the terminal server to
which the local LAT port is to be connected. The service name can be
up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length.
You must select either a remote port or a service.

ASSIGN/QUEUE queue-name[:] server-name[:]
Assigns a server to a queue.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

ATTACH job-number
Attaches you to a detached job. If the job is running under an account
other than your own, you must enter the password for that account
unless you have GACNT or WACNT privilege, as appropriate.
Privilege required:
•
•

GACNT to attach to a job in your group without using a password
WACNT to attach to a job in any account without using a password

BACKUP input-filespec[, ... ] output-backup-set-spec
Copies individual disk files or entire volumes onto a tape or disk
backup saveset.
Privilege required:
•
•
•
•
•

2-10

Read access to input files
Create access to backup set file
INSTAL to exceed system dynamic region limit
TUN~ to use the lBUFFER_SIZE qualifier and for better system
performance
WACNT or GACNT to use the IACCOUNT_DATA qualifier

DCl Commands

Command Qualifiers
I[NOJACCOUNT_DATA

Indicates whether to create the infonnation necessary to restore or update account data for each account that meets the selection criteria. If
you specify !NOACCOUNT_DATA, BACKUP will back up file data only
and will not back up account infonnation. The default is lAC COUNT_
DATA.
![NO]ASSIST
Indicates how to send media mount requests to an operator. By specifying IASSIST, you can send the disk or tape media mount requests to an
operator through the OperatorlMessage Services (OMS). The default,
INOASSIST, sends media mounts requests through your tenninal.
IBLOCK_SIZE=n
Specifies the number of bytes written to each record (block) of the
output saveset file; valid range for n is 2048 to 28672 for tapes and
disks. Specify block size for tapes in multiples of 16; specify block
size for disks in multiples of 512. You can aiso specify MINIMUM or
MAXIMUM. The default is 28672 bytes for disks and 16384 bytes for
tapes.
IBUFFER_SIZE=n
Specifies the size in k-words of the backup buffer in memory. Larger
values may improve perfonnance at the expense of greater system
impact. The valid range for n is 3 to 255 or MAXIMUM. You can also
specify OPTIMUM or 55. The default is the minimum usable size,
except when using an MS- or MU-class tape drive in which case the
default is 55.
![NO]CRC
Indicates whether to calculate and include a cyclic redundancy check
(CRC) value for each block of data written to the backup file. The
default is !NOCRC.
ICREATED=date

ICREATED=(BEFORE=date:time,AFrER=date:time)
IMODIFIED=date
IMODIFIED=(BEFORE=date:time,AFTER=date:time)
Backs up files created or modified on, before, after, or between the
specified date:times. The date:time argument can be any valid DCL
date and/or time.

DCl Commands

2-11

IDENSITY=n
Specifies the recording density of the output tape. Specify any valid
density for the magnetic tape you are using for output. Currently
available densities are 800, 1600, 6250, 6667,8000, and 10000 bpi. You
can also specify MINIMUM or MAXIMUM, which causes the system to
set the density to the minimum or maximum the tape drive supports.
If you do not specify a density, BACKUP uses the system default

density.
If you specify a density that the tape drive does not support, you receive
a warning message and the system selects the next higher density the
tape drive supports.
If you specify a density that is higher than the highest density the tape
drive supports, you receive a warning message and the system selects
the tape drive's maximum density.
IEND={[NO]REWlND I [NO]DISMOUNT}
Specifies whether to rewind the output tape drive or dismount the
output disk following the successful completion of the backup operation.
The default for disks is IEND=DISMOUNT. The default for tapes is
IEND=NOREWIND.
IEXCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Excludes files transferred to the saveset.
I[NO]FILE_DATA
Indicates whether to transfer files to the saveset. The default is IFILE_
DATA.
I[NO]GROUP_SIZE[ =n]
Specifies the group size for XOR redundancy; the valid range for n is 0
to 100. The default is IGROUP_SIZE=10.

/INCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Specifies the files or accounts you want transferred to the saveset.
I[NO]INITIALIZE[ =([NO]ERASE,[NO]EXERCISE,EXERCISE=n,
CLUSTER_SIZE=n,[NO]QUERY)]
Indicates whether to initialize the output tape or disk before creating
the backup file. For tape volumes, /INITIALIZE specifies that the tape
be initialized as a standard ANSI tape.

2-12

DCl Commands

For disk volumes, IINITIALIZE specifies that the disk be initialized
based on the attributes (pack ID, pack cluster size, etc.) of the input
disk. The arguments ail ow you to have more control over the initializing of disks in the backup operation. For IINITIALIZE=EXERCISE=n,
n can be 0, 1, 2, or 3. For IINITIALIZE=CLUSTER_SIZE=n, n can be
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64. The default is INOINITIALIZE.
IIN_LABEL=name
Specifies the name you want compared to the source volume ID.
I[NO]LIST_FILE[=filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
backup events. The log contains information about the accounts and
files transfelTed, and the disk volumes used. The default is ILIST_
FILE=KB: or your terminal.
IOUT_LABEL=name
Specifies the name used for the output volume ID and provides a
means to ensure that you are referencing the correct output device.
If the !1}UTIALIZE qualifier is not specified and the volume ID does
not match the one found on the specified output device, then BACKUP
displays an error and rejects the command. If the /INITIALIZE qualifier is specified, then the output device label will be set to the name
specified with lOUT_LABEL.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
backup events and is a synonym for I[NO]LIST_FILE. The log contains
information about the accounts and files transferred, and the disk
volumes used. The default is IOUTPUT=KB: or your terminal.
I[NO]PROMPr
Indicates whether to prompt for the first volume name. _The default is
IPROMPr.
I[NO]QUERY
Indicates whether to prompt before transferring each file meeting the
selection criteria. The default is INOQUERY. Answer Y or YES to
transfer the file displayed, or N or NO to skip the file and continue
with the next file. The default, INOQUERY, transfers each file selected
without prompting.

Del Commands 2-13

You can also specify /ALL with the YES or NO reply to indicat.e that
the reply applies to all remaining file transfers. This eliminates further
queries. YES/ALL causes all remaining files to be transferred and
NO/ALL causes all remaining files to be skipped.
I[NO]REWIND
Indicates whether to rewind a magnetic tape saveset volume before
processing. The default is INOREWIND.
I[NONERIFY[=ONLy]
Indicates whether to perform a comparison operation of all data transferred. If you specify NERIFY, then BACKUP performs a second pass
through the input disk, comparing each account and file transferred
with that on the output backup set. BACKUP reports any differences
found.
You can use BACKUPNERIFY=ONLY to perform a verify operation
without transferring any data. It also allows you to create several
backup sets on one tape and verify the sets all at once; thus, you do not
have to wait for the tape to rewind and position itself before each verify
operation. The default is INOVERIFY.

BACKUP/COPY input-filespec[, ... ] output-filespec
Copies files and/or accounts from one disk to another. Note that the
default for the output PPN is the input PPN.
Privilege required:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

2-14

Read access to input files
Create access to output files
DATES to preserve file creation and access dates
INSTAL to exceed system dynamic region limit
SYSIO to copy files to [0,1]
TUNE to use the /BUFFER_SIZE qualifier and for better system
performance
WACNT or GACNT to use the /ACCOUNT_DATA qualifier

DCl Commands

Command Qualifiers

I[NOJACCOUNT_DATA
Indicates whether to create or update accounts on the output disk.
/ACCOUNT_DATA creates any account that does not already exist
on the output disk. If the account exists on the output disk, then
BACKUP/COPY updates the account's attributes to match those of
the account on the input disk. If you specify /NOACCOUNT_DATA,
BACKUP/COPY will not transfer any files to an account that does not
exist on the output disk. The default is /ACCOUNT_DATA.
/[NO]ASSIST
Indicates how to send media mount requests to an operator. By specifying /ASSIST, you can send the disk media mount requests to an
operator through the OperatorlMessage Services (OMS). The default,
,,!,-~OASSIST, sends media mount requests through your tenninal.
/BLOCK_SIZE=n
Specifies the number of bytes written to each record (block) of the
output saveset file; valid range for n is is 2048 to 28672. Specify
block size in multiples of 512. You can also specify MINIMUM or
MAXIMUM. The default is 28672 bytes.
/BUFFER_SIZE=n
Specifies the amount of memory in k-words to allocate for buffering
data, in the range 4 to 255, or MAXIMUM. BACKUP/COPY uses
buffers which are multiples of 4K-words. If you specify a value which
is not a multiple of 4, BACKUP/COPY rounds your value down to the
next lower multiple of 4.
The maximum /BUFFER_SIZE value allowed is the largest free area
in memory with sufficient additional space to support one job at the
defined "swap maximum".
ICREATED=date:time
/CREATED=(AFTER=date:time,BEFORE=date:time)
IMODIFIED=date:time
IMODIFIED=(AFTER=date:time,BEFORE=date:time)
Copies files created or modified on, before, after, or between the specified date:times. The date:time argument can be any valid DCL date
and/or time.

DCl Commands

2-15

IEND=[NO]DISMOUNT
Specifies whether to dismount the output disk following the successful
completion of the operation. The default is IEND=DISMOUNT.
IEXCLUDE=filespec[, ... ]
Specifies one or more files that should not be transferred. This qualifier
is useful when you use wildcards to select a group of files, but want
to exclude particular files from the group. You do not need to list files
that have been set to IGNORE (see "SET FILE").
/[NO]FILE_DATA
Indicates whether to transfer file data - or only account data - from
the input to the output disk. Specify INOFILE_DATA in conjunction
with /ACCOUNT_DATA to create or update accounts on the output disk
without transferring any files. The default is !FILE_DATA.
IINCLUDE=filespec[, .. .]
Specifies one or more files that should be transferred, regardless of any
other selection criteria. For example, if you select files based on their
creation date, you can still transfer files that would not otherwise be
selected.
![NO]INITIALIZE[=([NO]ERASE,[NO]EXERCISE,EXERCISE=n,
CLUSTERSIZE=n, [NO]QUERY)]
Indicates whether to initialize the output disk before creating the backup file. The arguments allow you to have more
control over the initializing of disks in the backup operation.
For /INITIALIZE=EXERCISE=n, n can be 0, 1,2, or 3. For
IINITIALIZE=CLUSTERSIZE=n, n can be 1,2,4,8, 16,32, or 64.
The default is INOINITIALIZE.
If you specify /INITIALIZE, the output disk will be initialized based on

the attributes (pack ID, pack cluster size, etc.) of the input disk. The
default is INOINITIALIZE.
IIN_LABEL=label
Specifies the pack ID of the input disk and provides a means to ensure
that you are referencing the correct input disk. If the pack ID does
not match the one found on the specified input disk, then BACKUP
displays an error and rejects the command.

2-16

DCl Commands

I[NO]LIST-....FILE[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
backup events. The log contains infonnation about the accounts and
files transferred, and the disk volumes used.
I[NO]OPTIMIZE
IOPTIMIZE=CLUSTER_SIZE
IOPTIMIZE=DIRECTORY
Indicates whether to optimize file cluster sizes, file directories, or
both on the output disk. The default, IOPTIMIZE, perfonns both
optimizations.
IOUT_LABEL=label
Specifies the name used for the pack ID of the output disk and provides
a means to ensure that you are referencing the correct output disk. If
the tINITIALIZE qualifier is not specified and the pack ID does not
match the one found on the specified output disk, then BACKUP displays an error and rejects the command. If the /INITIALIZE qualifier
is specified, then the output disk label win be set to the name specified
with lOUT_LABEL.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
backup events and is a synonym for I[NO]LIST_FILE. The log contains
information about the accounts and files transferred, and the disk
volumes used.
IPLACED_POSITION=position
Indicates where to position files that you are transferring and are
marked as placed; position can be:
INDEX.

Place files near the master file index on the output
disk (recommended location).

MIDDLE

Place files at the logical center of the output disk.

ORIGINAL

Places files at or after their location on the input
disk. Generally, you should not use ORIGINAL when
transferring placed files to an output disk whose size is
different than the input disk.

The default is IPLACED_POSITION=INDEX.
![NO]PROMPT
Indicates whether to prompt before beginning the BACKUP operation.
The default is !PROMPT.
Del Commands 2-17

/[NO] QUERY
Indicates whether to prompt before copying each file selected.
Specifying /QUERY displays the name of each file selected and asks
if you want to copy that file. Answer Y or YES to copy the file displayed, or N or NO to skip the file and continue with the next file. The
default, INOQUERY, copies each file selected without prompting.
You can also specify /ALL with the YES or NO reply to indicate that
the reply applies to all remaining file transfers. This eliminates further
queries. YES/ALL causes all remaining files to be copied and NO/ALL
causes all remaining files to be skipped.
/[NO]REPLACE[ =QUERY]
Indicates what action should be taken if a file to be copied already exists on the output disk. If you specify !REPLACE, then BACKUP/COPY
replaces the file if it exists; any existing file is deleted. If you specify
INOREPLACE, then BACKUP issues a warning and does not replace
the file if it already exists.
The default, !REPLACE=QUERY, prompts you to replace any file that
already exists. Answer Y or YES to replace the current file. Answer N
or NO to not replace the existing file and proceed with the next file.
You can also specify /ALL with the YES or NO reply to indicate that
the reply applies to all remaining file replacements. This eliminates
further queries. YES/ALL causes all remaining files to be replaced and
NO/ALL causes all remaining files to be skipped.
/[NONERIFY[ =ONLY]
Indicates whether to perform a comparison operation of the all
data transferred to the output disk. If you specify NERIFY, then
BACKUP/COPY performs a second pass through the input disk, comparing each account and file transferred with that on the output disk.
BACKUP/COPY reports any differences found.
You can use BACKUP/COPYNERIFY=ONLY to perform a verify
operation without transferring any data. The default is INOVERIFY.

2-18

DCl Commands

BACKUP/DIRECTORY backup-set-spec
Lists files within a backup saveset.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

Read access to the backup set file
INSTALL to exceed system dynamic region limit
TUNE to use the /BUFFER_SIZE qualifier

Command Qualifiers

I[NO]ASSIST
Indicates how to send media mount requests to an operator. By specifying /ASSIST, you can send a disk or tape media request to mount a
saveset to an operator through the Operator/Message Services (OMS).
The default, INOASSIST, sends media mounts requests through your
terminal.
!BRIEF
Displays a format similar to the DCL full directory (minus file attributes) and is the default qualifier. The default is /BRIEF.
/BUFFER_SIZE=n
Specifies the size in k-words of the backup buffer in memory. Larger
values may improve performance at the expense of greater system
impact. The valid range for n is 3 to 255 or MAXIMUM. You can also
specify OPTIMUM or 55. The default is the minimum usable size,
except when using an MS- or MU-class tape drive in which case the
default is 55.
/CREATED=date
/CREATED=(BEFORE=date: time,AFTER=date: time)
IMODIFIED=date
IMODIFIED=(BEFORE=date:time,AFTER=date:time)
Lists files created or modified on, before, after, or between the specified
date:times. The date:time argument can be any valid DCL date and/or
time.
IEND={[NO]REWIND I [NO]DISMOUNT}
Specifies whether to rewind the output tape drive or dismount the
output disk following the successful completion of the backup operation.
The default for disks is IEND=DISMOUNT. The default for tapes is
IEND=NOREWIND.
Del Commands 2-19

IEXCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Specifies one or more files that should not be listed.
!FULL

Displays detailed information for each file on multiple lines.

To display information for specific files use ISELECT or /EXCLUDE
with BACKUPIDIRECTORY.
IINCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Specifies the files or accounts that should be listed.
IIN_LABEL=name
Specifies the name you want compared to the source volume ID.
![NO]LIST_FILE[=filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
backup events. The log contains information about the accounts and
files transferred, and the disk volumes used. The default is ILIST_
FILE=KB: or your terminal.
IOCCURRENCE=number
Specifies the occurrence of the named backup set used in the BACKUP
process. The default is the first occurrence.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
BACKUP events and is a synonym for I[NO]LIST_FILE. The default is
IOUTPUT=KB: or your terminal.
![NO]PROMPT
Indicates whether to prompt for the first volume name. The default is
!PROMPT.
I[NO]REWIND
Indicates whether to rewind a magnetic tape saveset volume before
processing. The default is INOREWIND.
ISELECT=(filespec-list)
Specifies the files you want to list. The default is all files in the backup
set.

2-20

DCl Commands

BACKUP/IMAGE input-disk: output-disk:
Copies all accounts and files from one disk volwne to another and
makes the output volwne bootable if the file [0,1]INIT.SYS is copied.
Privilege required:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Read access to input files
Crea te access to output files
DATES to preserve file creation and access dates
INSTAL to exceed system dynamic region limit
RDNFS, WRTNFS, and SYSMOD to make the output disk bootable
SYSIO to copy files to [0,1]
TlJNE to use the lBlJFFER_SIZE qualifier and for better system
performance

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]ASSIST

Indicates how to send media mount requests to an operator. By specifying IASSIST, you can send the disk media mount requests to an
operator through the Operator/Message Services (OMS). The default,
INOASSIST, sends media mounts requests through your terminal.
/BLOCK_SIZE=n
Specifies the number of bytes written to each record (block) of the
output saveset file; valid range for n is is 2048 to 28672. Specify
block size in multiples of 512. You can also specify MINIMUM or
MAXIMUM. The default is 28672 bytes.
/BUFFER_SIZE=n
Specifies the amount of memory in k-words to allocate for buffering
data, in the range 4 to 255, or MAXIMUM. BACKUPIIMAGE uses
buffers which are multiples of 4K-words. If you specify a value which
is not a multiple of 4, BACKUPIIMAGE rounds your value down to the
next lower multiple of 4.
The maximwn /BUFFER_SIZE value allowed is the largest free area
in memory with sufficient additional space to support one job at the
defined "swap maximum".

DCl Commands

2-21

IEND=(NO]DISMOUNT
Specifies whether to dismount the output disk following the successful
completion of the backup operation. The default is IEND=DISMOUNT.
IIN_LABEL=label
Specifies the pack ID of the input disk and provides a means to ensure
that you are referencing the correct input disk. If the pack ID does
not match the one found on the specified input disk, then BACKUP
displays an error and rejects the command.
![NO]INITIALIZE[=([NO]ERASE,[NO]EXERCISE,EXERCISE=n,
CLUSTERSIZE=n, [NO]QUERY)]
Indicates whether to initialize the output disk before creating
the backup file. The arguments allow you to have more control over the initializing of disks in the backup operation. For
IINiTIALIZE=EXERCISE=n, n can be 0, 1, 2, or 3. For
IINITIALIZE=CLUSTERSIZE=n, n can be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64. The
default is INOINITIALIZE.
If you specify /INITIALIZE, the output disk will be initialized based on
the attributes (pack ID, pack cluster size, etc.) of the input disk. Use
the lOUT_LABEL qualifier to specify a different pack ID for the output
disk. The default is INOINITIALIZE.
![NO]LIST_FILE[=filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
backup events. The log contains information about the accounts and
files transferred, and the disk volumes used.
I[NO]OPrIMIZE
IOPrIMIZE=CLUSTER_SIZE
IOPrIMIZE=DIRECTORY
Indicates whether to optimize file cluster sizes, file directories, or
both on the output disk. The default, IOPrIMIZE, performs both
optimizations.
Use IOPrIMIZE=CLUSTER_SIZE to perform cluster size optimization
without directory optimization. Likewise, use IOPrIMIZE=DIRECTORY
to perform directory optimization "ithout performing cluster size
optimiza tion.

2-22

DCl Commands

I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
backup events and is a synonym for ![NO]LIST_FILE. The log contains
information about the accounts and files transferred, and the disk
volumes used.
IOUT_LABEL=label
Specifies the name used for the pack ID of the output disk and provides
a means to ensure that you are referencing the correct output disk. If
the /INITIALIZE qualifier is not specified and the pack ID does not
match the one found on the specified output disk, then BACKUP displays an error and rejects the command. If the /INITIALIZE qualifier
is specified, then the output disk label will be set to the name specified
with lOUT_LABEL.
/PLACED_POSITION=position
Indicates where to position files that you are transferring and are
marked as placed; position can be:
Place files near the master file index on the output
disk (recommended location).

MIDDLE

Place files at the logical center of the output disk.

ORIGINAL

Places files at or after their location on the input
disk. Generally, you should not use ORIGINAL when
transferring placed files to an output disk whose size is
different than the input disk.

The default is !PLACED_POSITION=INDEX.
I[NO]PROMPT
Indicates whether to prompt before beginning the BACKUP operation.
The default is !PROMPT.
![NO]REPLACE[=QUERY]
Indicates what action should be taken ii a file to be transferred already
exists on the output disk. If you specify !REPLACE, then BACKUP
replaces the file if it exists. Any existing file is deleted. If you specify
INOREPLACE, then BACKUP issues a warning and does not replace
the file if it already exists.
The default, !REPLACE=QUERY, prompts you to replace any file that
already exists. Answer Y or YES to replace the current file. Answer N
or NO to not replace the existing file and proceed with the next file.

DCl Commands

2-23

You can also specify fALL with the YES or NO reply to indicate that
the reply applies to all remaining file replacements. This eliminates
further queries. YESfALL causes all remaining files to be replaced and
NOfALL causes all remaining files to be skipped.
f[NOJVERIFY[ =ONLY]
Indicates whether to perform a comparison operation of all data
transferred to the output disk. If you specify NERIFY, then
BACKUPIIMAGE performs a second pass through the input disk,
comparing each account and file transferred with that on the output
disk. BACKUPIIMAGE reports any differences found.
You can use BACKUPIIMAGENERIFY=ONLY to perform a verify
operation without transferring any data. The default is INOVERIFY.

BASIC
Invokes the BASIC-PLUS or BASIC-PLUS-2 programming environment.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers

IBP2
Invokes the BASIC-PLUS-2 programming environment. IBP2 is the
default when no qualifier is specified.
IBPLUS
Invokes the BASIC-PLUS programming environment.

BROADCAST destination[, ... ] "message"
Sends a message to the specified users or terminals; destinations
can be PPNs that include wildcard characters or keyboard device
specifications. You must specify a destination, or use the fALL or
/LOGGED_IN qualifiers. You can broadcast a single- or multiline
message, or a complete file.
Privilege required: SEND

2-24

DCl Commands

Command Qualifiers

fALL
Broadcasts the message to all terminals. You cannot specify a destination with fALL.
f[NO]BELL
Indicates whether to include a BELL character ahead of the message.
The default is INOBELL.
f[NO]HEADER
Indicates whether to include a header before the message. The default
is !HEADER.
/LOGGED_IN
Broadcasts the message to all logged-in terminals. You cannot speciiy a
destination with /LOGGED_IN.

CC filespec[, ... ]
Invokes the PDP-11 C compiler to compile C source programs.
Command Qualifiers

IDEFINE=("identifier[(param, ... )] token-string" [, ... ])
Defines a token string or macro to be substituted for every occurrence
of a given identifier in the program.
IENVIRONMENT=([NO]FPU,[NO]PIC)
Specifies the type of environment in which the generated code is to
execute and/or in which the object module(s) is to be linked.
f[NO]ERROR_LIMIT[ =qualifier]
Indicates whether to specify the error count at which compilation will
stop. The default is IERROR_LIMIT=30.
I[NO]INCLUDE_DIRECTORY=(pathname[, ... ])
Indicates whether to provide an additional level of search for include
files. The default is INOINCLUDE_DIRECTORY.
I[NO]LIST[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a listing file. The default is INOLIST. The
default output file extension is .LST.

DeL Commands

2-25

I[NO]MACRO[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a macro listing file. The default is
INOMACRO. The default output file extension is .MAC.
I[NO]MEMORY[ =qualifier]
Determines the amount of extended memory to allocate in a PDP-II
host environment. The default is INOMEMORY.

I[NO]MODULE=(identifier I "string"[,identifier I "string"])
Controls the compiler produced output module header for the program
file.
![NO]OBJECT[=filespec]
Indicates whether to create an object file. The default output file
extension is .OBJ.
ISHOW[ =option, ... ]
Displays information about the file being compiled. Option can be:
ALL

Prints all infonnation

[NO]CONDITIONALS

Prints condition program segments. Default is
CONDITIONALS.

[NO]EXPANSION

Prints final macro expansions. The default is
NOEXPANSION.

[NO]INCLUDE

Prints contents of #include files. The default is
NOINCLUDE.

[NO]lNTERMEDIATE

Prints intennediate macro expansions. The
default is INTERMEDIATE.

NONE

Prints no listing infonnation.

[NO]MACHINE_CODE

Prints the generated machine code. The
default is MACHINE_CODE.

[NO]SOURCE

Prints the source file statements. The default
is SOURCE.

![NO]STANDARD[=( option, ... )]
Determines what language features are allowed or flagged as nonstandard. The default is ISTANDARD=ANSI.
![NO]TERMINAL[=[NO]SOURCE]
Indicates whether to display compiler messages at the terminal. The
default is ITERMINAL=NOSOURCE, or as established during installation of PDP-II C.

2-26

DCl Commands

f[NO]TITLE=(identifier)
Controls the compiler produced output list header for the program file.
The default is INOTITLE.
f[NO]UNDEFINE=(identifier[, ... ])
Indicates whether to undefine the predefined PDP-II C preprocessor
constants. The default is INOUNDEFlNE.
f[NO]WARNINGS[ =( option, ... )]
Indicates whether to force the compiler to print both informationals and
warnings. Option can be NOINFORMATIONALS or NOWARNINGS.
The default is !WARNINGS.
/[NO]WORK_FILE_SIZE=integer-number
Indicates whether to allocate the number of 512-byte disk blocks for
the work file. The integer-number is an integer value between 1 and
65535. The default is IWORK_FILE_SIZE=2048. Use with the !LIST
qualifier to set or cancel specific listing options.

CCl system-command
Allows you to use a system CCL command that has the same name as
a DCL command.
Privilege required: Execute access to the system command program

CLOSE channel-number
Closes a file that you opened using the OPEN command and removes
the associated channel number from the list of open channels.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
fALL
Closes all currently open channels.

DCl Commands 2-27

CLOSE/LOG_FILE
Closes a log file that you opened using the OPENILOG_FILE command.
Use the CLOSEILOG_FILE command to close an open log file either
during a session at your terminal or within a command procedure.
Privilege required: none

CLOSE/QUEUE queue-name[:]
Closes a print or batch queue to prevent other users from placing any
additional PRINT or SUBMIT requests in the queue.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

COBOL filespec
Compiles a COBOL-81 source program into an object program. You can
compile only one source file at a time in COBOL-81.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers
I[NO]ANSI_FORMAT
Indicates whether to specify that the source program format is ANSI
COBOL instead of Digital terminal format. The default is INOANSI_
FORMAT.

I[NO]CHECK
ICHECK=[NO]BOUNDS
ICHECK=[NO]PERFORM
Indicates whether to enable checking for subscript and index ranges
and nested PERFORM statements.
IC81
Specifies the COBOL-81 compiler. This is the default.
ICODE[ =[NO]CIS]
Indicates whether to generate Commercial Instruction Set (CIS) code.

2-28

DCl Commands

I[N01CONDITIONALS[=(A[,B,C ... ])]

Indicates whether to compile conditional compilation lines. You can
specify compilation lines with letter labels A through Z. If no lines are
specified, all conditional compilation lines are compiled.
/[NO] CROSS_REFERENCE
Indicates whether to include cross-reference listing in compiler listing.
The default is INOCROSS_REFERENCE.
I[NO]DEBUG

Indicates whether to include symbolic debugging information in the
object file. The default is INODEBUG.
![NO]DIAGNOSTICS[=diagfile]
Indicates whether to generate a diagnostics file.
![NO]LIST[==!istp]e]
Indicates whether to produce an output listing file. The default is
INOLIST.
/[NO]l\f~

Indicates whether to generate PROCEDURE and DATA DIVISION
maps in the LST file. This is a synonym for ISHOW=[NO]MAP.
INAMES=suffix
Specifies a two-character suffix for program section names; the default
is INAMES=SC.
I[NO]OBJECT[ =objfile]

Indicates whether to produce an object file. The default is IOBJECT.
ISHOW[=[NO]MAP]
I[NO]SHOW

Indicates whether to generate PROCEDURE and DATA DIVISION
maps in the LST file. The default is INOSHOW.
I[NO]STANDARD=option
Specifies either V2 or 85 as the standard option. The default is
INOSTANDARD.
![NO]SUBPROGRAM
Indicates whether to treat this program as a Sub (Main) program. The
default is INOSUBPROGRAM.
/TEMPORARY=device
Stores temporary work files on the specified device.
DCl Commands

2-29·

![NO]TRUNCATE
Indicates whether to enable decimal truncation on COMP data items
instead of binary truncation. The default is INOTRUNCATE.
!WARNINGS[=[NO]INFORMATI ONAL]
I[NO]WARNINGS
Indicates whether to enable informational diagnostics. The default is
!WARNINGS.

COpy [node::]input-filespec[, ... ] [node: :]output-filespec
Duplicates a file. You can:
•
•
•

Copy one file to another file
Merge one or more files into another file
Copy a group of files to another group of files

Privilege required:
•
•
•
•

•

Crea te/rename access to the output file
Read access to each input file
Wri te access if replacing a file
SYSIO and Write access to set the privilege bit <128> in the
protection code for non-executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> not set).
TMPPRV and Write access to set the privilege bit <128> in the
protection code for executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> set).

Command Qualifiers

IALLOCATION=n
PreaIIocates n 512-byte blocks for the output file.
IBLOCK_SIZE=n
Specifies block size for magnetic tape output files; the valid range is
even integers 18 to 4096. The default is IBLOCK_SIZE=512.

2-30

DCl Commands

/CLUSTER_SIZE=n
Specifies the output disk file cluster size. The value of n must be a
power of two in the range of -256 to 256, depending on the type of
disk. The system uses the absolute value of the specified cluster size,
or the output disk pack cluster size, whichever is greater. The default
is the disk pack cluster size. To use clustersize optimization, specify
ICLUSTER_SIZE=O.
![NO] CONFIRM
Indicates whether to prompt before copying each file and is a synonym
for ![NO]QUERY.
![NO]CONTIGUOUS B
Indicates whether to copy disk files into consecutive physical disk
blocks.
IBEFORE=date
ICREATED

!MODIFIED
ISINCE=date
Copies files created or modified before or since the specified date.
![NO]LOG~

Indicates whether to display a confirming message for each file copied.
The default is /LOG.
![NO] OVERLAY

Indicates whether to copy input file to an existing output file, replacing
output file data with input file data. The default is INOOVERLAY.
IPOSITION=position
Specifies where copied files are stored on the disk; position can be:
n

Files stored at first available position after disk cluster number
n; the default is IPOSITION=O.

INDEX

Files stored at first available position after the master file
directory index.

MIDDLE

Files stored at first available position after the middle of the
disk.

IPROTECTION=n
Specifies the output file protection code.

DCl Commands

2-31

I[NO]QUERY ~
Indicates whether to prompt before copying each file. The default is
INOQUERY.
I[NO]REPLACE
Indicates whether to delete an existing file having the same file specification as the specified output file. The default is INOREPLACE.
I[NOJRETAIN_DATES
For disk output, indicates whether to retain the creation date-time and
access date of the input file. The default is INORETAIN_DATES.
ISELECT {

:~~~::~nNIMUM=n

=SIZE=~UM=n

}

=SIZE=(MINIMUM=m,MAXlMUM=n)
Selects files based on their size. The specified size can be:
n

Selects only those files with size equal to n.

MINlMUM=n

Selects only those files with size greater
than or equal to n.

MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size less than
or equal to n.

MINlMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size between m
and n inclusive.

ITRANSFER_MODE={BLOCK I RECORD I AUTOMATIC} ~
Specifies which transfer mode, block or record, should be used to
copy the file to a remote node. This qualifier only applies to network
file copy operations (node included in either the input or output file
specifications) and is not valid in local file copy operations.
ITRANSFER_MODE=BLOCK copies the file as binary data consisting
of 512-byte blocks. This mode of transfer is generally faster than record
mode. However, it is only applicable for RSTS-to-RSTS file transfers,
since other operating systems may not have compatible file attributes
and blocksizes.
ITRA..,l\fSFER_MODE=RECORD copies the file as a collection of records
based on the file record format. Although it is slower than block mode,
record mode allows otherwise incompatible file systems to exchange
files. This mode is recommended for file transfers involving TOPSI0/20,
ULTRIX, RT-ll, and DECnet-DOS systems.

2-32

DCl Commands

ITRANSFER_MODE=AUTOMATIC selects the most appropriate mode
of transfer and is the default.

CREATE filespec
Opens a file so you can enter text.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

•

Create/rename access to the file you are creating
Write access if you are replacing a file
SYSIO and Write access to set the privilege bit <128> in the
protection code for non-executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> not set).
TMPPRV and Write access to set the privilege bit <128> in the
protection code for executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> set).

Command Qualifiers
/ALLOCATION=n
Preallocates n 512-byte blocks for a file. The default is /ALLOCATION=O.
/CLUSTER_SIZE=n
Specifies a file cluster size of n blocks. The value of n must be a power
of two in the range of -256 to 256, depending on the type of disk.
The system uses the absolute value of the specified cluster size, or
the output disk pack cluster size, whichever is greater. The default
is the disk pack cluster size. To use clustersize optimization, specify
/CLUSTER_SIZE=O.
I[NO]CONTIGUOUS
Indicates whether to specify the file is to occupy consecutive physical
disk blocks. The default is /NOCONTIGUOUS.

DCl Commands

2-33

IPOSITION=position
Specifies the starting position of the file you are creating on the disk;
position can be:
n

File created at first available position after the device cluster
number (DON) n; the range of n is 0 to the maximum DON.
The default is IPOSITION=O.

INDEX

File created at first available position after the storage allocation table.

MIDDLE

File created at first available position after the middle of the
device.

IPROTECTION=n
Specifies the file protection code. The default is IPROTECTION=60.
I[NO] RE PLACE

Indicates whether to delete an existing file that has the same file
specification as the one you specify.

CREATE/ACCOUNT [dev:][p,pn]
Sets up a new account.
Privilege required: GACNT or WACNT
Command Qualifiers
I[NO] CAPTIVE

Indicates whether the account is to be a captive account. The default is
/NOCAPTIVE.
ICLUSTER_SIZE=ufd-cl uster-size
Specifies the number of 512-byte blocks in each cluster within a user
file directory (UFD). The default is the pack cluster size.
IDETACHED_JOB_QUOTA=detached-job-quota
Specifies the number of detached jobs that can exist at one time for an
account; detached-job-quota can be:

o to 63

Sets detached job quota

UNLIMITED

No quota enforced

The default is IDETACHED_JOB_QUOTA=O.

2-34

DCl Commands

![NO]DIALUP
Indicates whether to allow logins via a dial-up facility. The default is
lDIALl:JP.
I[NO]EXPIRE[=date]
Indicates whether to expire at the end of the date specified. The default
is INOEXPIRE.
!IN_QUOTA=logged-in-quota
Specifies an account's disk space quota (in blocks) at log in; logged-inquota can be:

o to 16777214

Block quota

UNLIMITED

No quota enforced

The default is !IN_QUOTA=UNLIM:ITED.
![NO]lNTERACTIVE
Indicates whether to allow interactive access to the account. Batch jobs
can still run under the account. The default is !INTERACTIVE.
IJOB_QUOTA=job-quota
Specifies the total number of jobs that can exist at one time for an
account; job-quota can be:

o to 63

Sets total job quota

UNLIMITED

No quota enforced

The default is IJOB_QUOTA=UNLIMITED.
![NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display an account creation message. The default
is !LOG.
I[NO]LOOKUP

Indicates whether to store passwords in a manner that follows RSTS/E
VS.O lookup rules. Passwords for LOOKUP accounts must be 6 characters long; passwords for NOLOOKUP accounts can be 6 to 13
characters long. The default is INOLOOKUP.
IMESSAGE_QUOTA=message-quota
Specifies the number of outstanding messages that a job running under
this account can request when declaring itself to be a receiver. The
range for message-quota is 0 to 65534 or UNLIMITED. The default is
IMESSAGE_QUOTA=12.

DCl Commands

2-35

INAME="account-name"
Specifies the account name; can be 1 to 13 characters from the ASCII
character set whose decimal values are 9, 32 to 126, and 161 to 254.
I[NO]NETWORK
Indicates whether to let any network connections into this account.
The default is !NETWORK.
IOUT_QUOTA=logged-out-quota
Specifies an account's disk space quota (in blocks) at log out; loggedout-quota can be:

o to 16777214

Block quota

UNLIMITED

No quota enforced

The default is IOUT_QUOTA=UNLIMITED.
I[NO]PASSWORD_PROMPT
Indicates whether to prompt for and require a password to log in to the
account. The default is /PASSWORD_PROMPT.
/POSITION=position
Specifies where to create a UFD on a disk; position can be:
n

UFD created at first available position after
the device cluster number (DCN) n; the range
of n is 1 to the maximum DCN.

INDEX

UFD created as near as possible to the storage
allocation table.

MIDDLE

UFD created as near as possible to the middle
of the device.

The default is /POSITION=INDEX.
/PRIVILEGES=(priv[, ... ])
Specifies the account privileges. Priv can be:
ALL

All privileges granted

NONE

All privileges denied

Privilege keyword

Specified privilege granted

Privilege keyword with "NO"
prefix

Specified privilege denied

The default is IPRIVILEGES=SETPAS.
See Table 1-7 for a list of RSTSIE privilege keywords.
2-36

DCl Commands

IRIB_ QUOTA=rib-quota
Specifies the maximum number of receiver ID blocks (RIBs) that a job
rw,.ning under tl-Js account can set up for itself as a message receiver;
the range for rib-quota is 0 to 256 or UNLIMITED. The default is
IRIB_QUOTA=3.
ISIZE=ufd-size
SPECIFIES the initial size of a new account's UFD expressed in
clusters. The range of ufd-size is 1 to 7. The default is ISIZE=1.
ITEMPLATE=dev:[p,pn]
Indicates that the specified account's parameters are to be used as
defaults for the new account's parameters. The default value for dev:
is SYO. The default PPN is your PPN.
![NO]USER
Indicates the type of account to create. !USER means create an account
with login attributes and file storage capabilities. mOUSER means
create an account for file storage only and is the default.

CREATE/PORT [port-name]
Creates a logical terminal port used to connect to a remote device
connected to a terminal server.
The port-name parameter specifies the name of the port to be created
in the form of KBIn: or KBn: where n is a value from 0 through 127.
If the form KBn: is used, n must be greater than the highest keyboard
number physically attached to the system or an error will occur. If the
port-name is not specified, the monitor will select the first available
port and report the port-name back to the user.
Privilege required: SWCTL

Command Qualifiers
IAPPLICATION
Specifies that this port is to be used for the purpose of connecting to an application terminal on a terminal server. The default is
IAPPLI CATI ON. This qualifier is allowed only for VMS compatibility
and will be ignored on the CREATEIPORT command.
fLAT
Creates a LAT port. The default is fLAT.
DCl Commands

2-37

I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message. This is useful if
you have not specified a port-name because the port selected will be
displayed. The default is /LOG.
/LOGICAL_NAME
Assigns a user logical name to the new port. The name you assign is
in effect until you log out, log in to another account, or deassign the
logical name using the DEASSIGN command.
Logical names can be up to 15 characters long. Only alphanumeric
characters and underscores are allowed; dollar signs are allowed in
system logical names only. Use the ISYSTEM qualifier to assign a
systemwide logical name to the new port. The default is /uSER.
If the logical name you specify is currently assigned, then it is replaced
by the new assignment.
![NO] QUEUED

Indicates whether the connection to a terminal server will be placed on
the server's queue if the remote port is busy and the server supports
queuing. If INOQUEUED is specified and the remote port is busy, the
connection will not be queued and it will fail. The default is IQUEUED.
Use the SHOW PORT command to display the port's connection status.
If the port is set IQUEUED and the server is busy, a connection status
of "In Progress" and the position in the queue will be shown.
IREMOTE_PORT=remote-port-name
Specifies the name of a remote port on the terminal server to which the
local port is to be connected. The remote port name can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. This qualifier requires !TERMINAL_
SERVER.
/SERVICE=service-name
Specifies the name of a remote service offered at the terminal server
to which the local port is to be connected. The service name can be
up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. This qualifier requires
!TERMINAL_SERVER.
/SYSTEM
Assigns a systemwide logical name to the new port. Unlike user
logica1s, system logica1s can be used by all jobs on the system.

2-38

DCl Commands

System logical names are in effect until the system is shut down or you
deassign the system logical name using the DEASSIGN command.
If the system logical name you specify is currently assigned, then it is
replaced by the new assignment.
You must specify the /LOGICAL_NAME qualifier with ISYSTEM.
ITERMINAL_SERVER=server-name
Specifies the name of a terminal server to which the local port you
are creating is to be assigned. The server name can be up to 16
alphanumeric characters in length. If you use this qualifier, you must
select a remote port or service by using /REMOTE_PORT, ISERVICE,
or both.

,USER
Assigns a user logical name t.o t.he new port. The name you assign is
in effect until you log out, log in to another account, or deassign the
logical name using the DEASSIGN command.
If the logical name you specify is currently assigned, it is replaced by
the new assignment.
You must specify the /LOGICAL_NAME qualifier with IUSER.

CREATEISERVICE/LAT service-name
Creates a service which is then offered by the LAT host node. The
service-name can be up to 16 characters in length. These characters
inel ude the following:
•
•
•

The letters A through Z both upper case and lower case
The numbers 0 through 9
The dollar sign ($), the hyphen (-), the period (.), and the
underscore L)

•

The 8-bit ASCII characters from 192 to 253.

Privilege required: SWCFG

DCl Commands

2-39

Command Qualifiers

IIDENTIFICATION="service-id"
Specifies a description for the service. This description is used to
further identify the service being offered. It can be up to 64 characters
in length. The characters include the 7-bit ASCII characters from 32 to
126 and the 8-bit ASCII characters from 170 to 253.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for the requested
action. The default is INOLOG.

ISTATIC_RATING=rating
Specifies the static rating associated with the service. This rating
directs terminal server users away from or toward a particular node.
The range of values is 0 to 255. A value of 255 is highly available to
users while a value of 0 is not available to users. The default static
rating is 255.

CREATE/VIRTUAL_DISK disk-size
Reserves a section of memory for use by the virtual disk where size is
in blocks and should be a multiple of 4. If you specify a size that is
not a multiple of 4, it is rounded up and an informational message is
printed. You must use the INITIALIZE and MOUNT commands, as
with any other RSTSIE disk.
Privileges required: HWCFG and INSTAL
Command Qualifiers

IADDRESS=n
Specifies the physical location of the memory where n is the address
in K-words. If you do not specify this qualifier, RSTS/E selects an
appropriate location. The default is the highest available memory.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for the requested
action. The default is !LOG.

2-40

DCl Commands

DEALLOCATE dev[:]
Releases a device that you reserved for private use so that other users
may have access to the device. DEALLOCATE does not deassign any
logical name you may have set up for the device.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
fALL
Deallocates all devices you currently have allocated. If you specify the
device, the command deallocates the device only.

DEASSIGN logical-name[:]
Cancels logical name assignments you made with the ASSIGN or
ALLOCATE commands.
Privilege required: INSTAL to use the fSYSTEM qualifier

Command Qualifier
fALL
Cancels all user logical names that you assigned. If you also specify a
logical name, the system cancels the specified logical name only. fALL
is not valid with fSYSTEM.
fSYSTEM
Deassigns a systemwide logical name.
/uSER
Deassigns a user logical name. /uSER is the default.

DEASSIGN/PORT port-name[:]
Deassigns a local LAT port on the RSTSIE node from the remote
terminal server to which it was assigned.
The port-name is the local port which will be deassigned. The portname must be in the form of KBIn: or KBn: where n is a value from 0
through 127.
DCl Commands

2-41

Privilege required: SWCFG

Command Qualifier
ILAT
Deassigns a LAT port. The default is /LAT.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confinnation message. The default is
!LOG.

DEASSIGN/QUEUE queue-name[:] server-name[:]
Deassigns a server or all servers from a queue. Any job already started
on a deassigned server is not affected.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

Command Qualifier
fALL
Deassigns all servers currently assigned to the queue. If you specify
fALL and a server-name, PBS deassigns the server-name only.

DEFINE/COMMAND/SYSTEM command-name program-filespec
Defines a system (CCL) command.
Privilege required: INSTAL

Command Qualifiers
!LINE_NVMBER=entry-point
Defines the entry point in the command program. The valid range for
entry-point is 0 to 32,767. Other values for entry-point are:
eeL

30,000

CHAIN

31,000

DeL

30,500

The default is ILINE_NUMBER=O.

2-42

DCl Commands

I[NO]PRIVILEGE
Indicates whether to retain program temporary privileges. The default
is /NOPRIVILEGE.
I[NO]REPLACE[ =QUERY]
Indicates what action to take if the system command specified is
already defined. /NOREPLACE returns an error message if the system
command is already defined. !REPLACE replaces the existing system
command with the new definition. !REPLACE=QUERY prompts you
to replace the existing system command with the new definition if the
system command already exists. The default is INOREPLACE.

DELETE [node: :]filespec[,=-=]
Deletes a disk file on a local or remote node.
Privilege required: Write access to each file you want to delete
Command Qualifiers

IBEFORE=date
ICREATED
!MODIFIED
ISINCE=date
Deletes files you created or modified before or since the specified date.
The default is ICREATED.
I[NO] CONFIRM
Indicates whether to display each file specification and prompt before
deleting that file. I[NO]CONFIRM is a synonym for ![NO]QUERY. The
default is /NOCONFIRM.

!ERASE
Zeros the file before deleting it.
I[NO]LOGB
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for each file
deleted. The default is /LOG.
I[NO]QUERY B
Indicates whether to display each file specification and prompt before
deleting that file. The default is /NOQUERY.

DCl Commands

2-43

ISELECT

=SIZE=n
=SIZE=MINIMUM=n

}

{ =SIZE=~UM=n
=SIZE=(MINIMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n)
Selects files based on their size. The specified size can be:
n

Selects only those files with size equal to n.

MINIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size greater
than or equal to n.

MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size less than
or equal to n.

MINIMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size between m
and n inclusive.

I[NO]WARNINGS
Indicates whether to display an error message if the specified files are
not found. The default is !WARNINGS.

DELETE/ACCOUNT [dev:][p,pn]
Deletes an account from a disk.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

GACNT or WACNT
GWRITE or WWRITE
SYSIO to delete an account in [0, *]

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]CONFIRM
Indicates whether to prompt before deleting the account and is a
synonym for I[NO]QUERY. The default is INOCONFIRM.
![NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message after deleting an
account. The default is /LOG.
I[NO]PURGE[=QUERY]
Indicates whether to delete files and the account. QUERY prompts
for permission to continue if the account contains files. The default is
IPURGE=QUERY.

2-44

DCl Commands

f[NO]QUERY
Indicates whether to prompt before deleting the account. If you specify
INOQlJERY, the system prompts only if the account has nonzero
accounting data. The default is INOQUERY.
I[NO]RESET[ =QUERY]
Indicates whether to delete the account if accounting data is nonzero.
QUERY prompts for permission to continue if the accounting data is
nonzero. The default is IRESET=QUERY.
I[NO]USER
Restricts deletions to accounts of a specific type (user or nonuser). The
default is to search all accounts.
DElETE/COMMAND/SYSTE~.1! command

Deletes a command from the list of defined systemwide commands.
Privilege required: INSTAL

Command Qualifier
fALL

Deletes all systemwide commands. If you also specify a command, the
system deletes the specified command only.

DELETE/ENTRY {entry-spec I entry-number
Deletes one or more job entries from a print or batch queue.
Privilege required:
•
•

GACNT to delete a job of another owner in your group
WACNT to delete a job of another owner not in your group

Command Qualifiers
!BATCH

Deletes batch queue entries only.
/PRINT
Deletes print queue entries only.

DCl Commands

2-45

DELETE/PORT port-name[:]
Deletes a logical terminal port that was created by the CREATEIPORT
command. If the port has an active session, then the port is not deleted
until the session is completed.
The port-name parameter specifies the name of the port to be in the
form of KBI n: or KBn: where n is a value between 0 and 127. The
port must have already been created by the CREATEIPORT command.
If the form KBn: is used, then n must be greater than the highest
keyboard number physically connected to the system or an error will
occur.
Privilege required: SWCTL
Command Qualifiers

I[NO]ABORT
Indicates whether to abort the connection if the port is in use.
Specifying IABORT terminates the current session, if any, and deletes
the port. Specifying INOABORT marks the port for deletion and deletes
it when the current session is finished. The default is INOABORT.
fLAT
Deletes a LAT port. The default is fLAT.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message. The default is
/LOG.

DELETE/QUEUE queue-name[:]
Deletes a print or batch queue.
Privilege required: SWCFG

DELETE/SERVER server-name[:]
Deletes a print or batch server.
Privilege required: SWCFG

2-46

DCl Commands

DELETE/SERVICE/LAT service-name
Deletes a service currently offered by the LAT host node.
Privilege required: SWCFG
Command Qualifier

f[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for the requested
action. The default is INOLOG.

DELETE/SYMBOL symbol-name
Deletes one or more DeL symbols from your local or global symbol
table.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers

fALL
Deletes all symbols. If you also specify a symbol name, the system
deletes the specified symbol only.
fGLOBAL
Deletes the specified symbol from the global symbol table. This is the
default for the interactive command level.
!LOCAL
Deletes the specified symbol from the local symbol table. This is the
default for all command levels except interactive.

DELETE/VIRTUAL_DISK
Deletes the virtual disk. You cannot delete the virtual disk if it is
mounted, assigned, or has open files.
Privileges required: HWCFG and INSTAL

DCl Commands

2-47

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for the requested
action.

DETACH job-number
Detaches a job from its terminal.
Privilege required: JOBCTL to detach jobs in other accounts.

Command Qualifier
![NO]CLOSE
Indicates whether to close all nonzero channels on which the job's
terminal is open before detaching. The default is ICLOSE.

DIBOL filespec[, ...]
Compiles up to six DIBOL-ll source files into a single object file.
Privilege required: Read access to the files you are compiling.

Command Qualifiers
![NO]DEBUG
Indicates whether to direct the compiler to use the DIBOL Debugging
Thchnique (DDT) when you run the program. The default is
INODEBUG.
![NO ]LIST[=listfile]

Indicates whether to generate an output listing file. The default is
INOLIST.
![NO]OBJECT[=objfile]
Indicates whether to produce an output object file. You can specify the
object file name. The default is IOBJECT.
![NO] OPTIMI ZE

Indicates whether to produce optimized code. The default is
INOOPTIMIZE.

2-48

DCl Commands

![NO]STANDARD[=ANSI I D83]
Specifies the syntax that the DIBOL compiler will accept. Specifying
/STAL~~ARD or /STAL~~ARD=AL~SI tens the compiler to accept AL~SI
DIBOL syntax. Specifying ISTANDARD=D83 tells the compiler to
accept DIBOL-83 syntax. The default is INOSTANDARD.
I[NO]WARNINGS

Indicates whether to produce diagnostic messages for warning conditions. The default is /WARNINGS.

DIFFERENCES input-filespec compare-filespec
Compares two text files and lists any sections of text that differ.

•
•

Read access to the files you are comparing
Write access to any output file you create

Command Qualifiers

IIGNORE=BLANK_LINES
Ignores blank lines while comparing files.
IMATCH=size
Specifies the nwnber of lines that must be identical to constitute a
match. The default is IMATCH=3.
IMAXIMUM_DIFFERENCES=n
Specifies the maximum number of differences before terminating
comparison. The default is IMAXIMUM_DIFFERENCES=300.
/OUTPUT=filespec
Writes the comparison output to a file. The default is to write the
output on your terminal.

DIRECTORY [node::][filespec[, ...]]
Displays information about files.
Privileges required:
•

None for files in your own account

DCl Commands

2-49

•

Read or execute access for files not in your account

Command Qualifiers

/BEFORE=date
/CREATED
!MODIFIED
ISINCE=date
Lists files created or modified before or since the specified date. The
default is /CREATED.
/BRIEF~

Lists only the file name and type of each file. The default is /BRIEF.
![NO]DATE[=ALL I CREATED I MODIFIED]
Indicates whether to display creation date and time or date of last
access or both. The default is INODATE.

IFULLB
Displays each file's file name and type, size in blocks, protection code,
date last accessed or modified, date and time created, cluster size, runtime system name, position of first block on disk, and file attributes
including IGNORE and BACKUP. The default is /BRIEF.
/OUTPUT=filespec B
Creates a file containing the output of a DIRECTORY listing, instead
of displaying the output at your terminal.
![NO]PROTECTION
Indicates whether to include protection codes in listing. The default is
!PROTECTION.
/SELECT

=SIZE=n
=SIZE=MINIMUM=n

}

{ =SIZE=~UM=n
=SIZE=(MINIMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n)
Selects files based on their size. The specified size can be:

2-50

Selects only those files with size equal to n.

MINlMUM=n

Selects only those files with size greater
than or equal to n.

MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size less than
or equal to n.

MINIMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size between m
and n inclusive.

DCl Commands

If you specify ISELECT together with the iSIZE=ALLOCATION qualifier, files are selected based on allocated size.
I[NO]SIZE[=ALLOCATION I USED]
Indicates whether to display the blocks allocated or used for a file. The
default is ISIZE=USED when you specify ISIZE with no argument.
!TOTAL~

Displays the total amount of space your files require, without listing
information about each file.

(For disks) DISMOUNT disk-device-name[:] [pack-id]
Releases a disk you previously mounted using the MOUNT command.
DISMOUNT also deallocates the device if it was allocated to you.
Privilege required:
•
•

None for disk drives that you own
MOUNT for disk drives mounted ISHARE or INOSHARE by others

Command Qualifier

!PUBLIC
Dismounts a public disk drive. You must have MOUNT privilege to
dismount a public disk drive.

(For tapes) DISMOUNT tape-device-name[:] [label]
Releases a tape you previously mounted using the MOUNT command.
DISMOUNT also deallocates the device if it was allocated to you.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
I[NO]UNLOAD
Indicates whether to unload the tape from the drive. The default is

!UNLOAD.

Del Commands 2-51

DUMP/SYSTEM
Records the current state of the system in the CRASH.SYS file.
Privilege required: SYSIO

EDIT filespec
Starts the EDT text editor program, which lets you create and edit text
files.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

Create/rename access to a file you create
Read/write access to a file you modify
Read access to a file you are reading (!READ_ONLY)

Command Qualifiers

I[NO]COMMAND[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to read and execute the commands in a command file before beginning the editing session. The default is
/COMMAND=EDTINI.EDT.
I[NO]CREATE
Indicates whether to open a new file when the specified does not exist.
The default is /CREATE.
/EDT
Makes sure that the EDIT command starts EDT.
IFORMAT={STREAM I VARIABLE}
Specifies that the file format is stream ASCII or variable-length. The
default is /FORMAT=STREAM.
I[NO]JOURNAL[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a journal file for the editing session. The
default is /JOURNAL.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to define the file specification of the file created
during the editing session. The default is /OUTPUT.

2-52 Del Commands

f[NO]READ _ONLY
Indicates whether to disable journaling and the creation of an output
file when you view a file. The default is INOREAD_ONLY.
f[NO]RECOVER
Indicates whether to read commands from a journal file before starting
the editing session. The default is INORECOVER.

$EOD
Signals the end of a data list and exits from a program within a
command procedure. The dollar sign ($) is required.
Privilege required: none

EXIT [status-code]
Ends the current-level command procedure and returns control to the
next higher command level.
Privilege required: none

FORCE destination[, ... ] "string"
Forces a string to the specified users or terminals; destinations can be
PPNs that include wildcard characters or keyboard device specifications. You must specify a destination, or use the fALL or /LOGGED_IN
qualifiers.
Privilege required: SYSIO

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Forces the string to all terminals. You cannot specify a destination
with fALL.
/LOGGED_IN
Forces the string to all logged-in terminals. You cannot specify a
destination with /LOGGED_IN.

DCl Commands

2-53

FORTRAN {/F77 I IFOR} filespec[, ...]
Invokes the FORTRAN compiler for up to six FORTRAN source files.
!F77 invokes FORTRAN-77 and !FOR invokes FORTRAN-Iv. The

default is 1F77 unless your system manager changes it.
Privilege required:
•
•

Read access to the files you compile
Create/rename access to any files you create

FORTRAN/F77 Qualifiers

![NO]CHECK
Indicates whether to produce extra code to check for program correctness at run time. The default is ICHECK.
ICONTINUATIONS=n
Specifies the maximum number of continuation lines permitted. The
valid range for n is any decimal number from 0 to 99. The default is
ICONTINUATIONS=19.
I[NO]D_LINES
Indicates whether to read and compile debugging lines. The default is
/NOD_LINES.
![NO]DEBUG
Indicates whether to direct the compiler to provide symbol table information for use by the PDP-11 FORTRAN-77 symbolic debugger. When
you specify /DEBUG, you should also use the /NO OPTIMIZE qualifier.
The default is INODEBUG.
![NO]I4
Determines how the compiler interprets INTEGER and LOGICAL
declarations that do not specify a length. INOI4 causes the compiler to
interpret the declarations as INTEGER2 and LOGICAL2. 114 allocates
two words (four bytes) for the default length of integer and logical
variables. The default is /NOI4.
I[NO]IDENTIFICATION
Indicates whether to display the FORTRAN-77 compiler identification and version numbers on your terminal. The default is
/NOIDENTIFI CATI ON.

2-54

DCl Commands

I[NO]LIST[ =listfile]
Indicates whether to create a listing file. The default is INOLIST.
I[NO]MACHINE_CODE

Indicates whether to include machine language code in the listing file.
The default is INOMACHINE_CODE.
![NO]OBJECT[=objfile]
Indicates whether to create an object output file. The default is
IOBJECT.
![NO]OPTIMIZE
Indicates whether to produce optimized code. The default is
IOPTIMIZE.
i[NO]STANDARD[=ALL i SOURCE i SYNTAX]
Indicates v;hether to check your source code for extensions to M-~SI
standard FORTRAN at the full-language level, where:

ALL

Checks for all extensions

SOURCE

Checks for lowercase letters and tab characters

SYNTAX

Checks for syntax extensions

The default is INOSTANDARD.
I[NO]WARNINGS
Indicates whether to produce diagnostic messages for warning conditions. The default is /WARNINGS.
IWORK_FILES=n
Specifies the number of temporary disk work files used during compilation. The valid range for n is 1 to 3. The default is
IWORK_FILES=2.
FORTRAN/FOR Qualifiers
ICODE={EAE I EIS I FIS I THR}

Selects either EAE, EIS, or FIS hardware or threaded code.
I[NOJD_LINES
Indicates whether to read and compile debugging lines. The default is
/NOD_LINES.
![NOJEXTEND_SOURCE
Indicates whether to allow source lines to contain significant characters
in columns 73 through 80. The default is /NOEXTEND_SOURCE.
DCl Commands

2-55

![NO]I4
Detennines how the compiler interprets INTEGER and LOGICAL
declarations that do not specify a length. INOI4 causes the compiler to
interpret the declarations as INTEGER2 and LOGICAL2. 114 allocates
two words (four bytes) for the default length of integer and logical
variables. The default is INOI4.
![NO]LINE_NVMBERS
Indicates whether to include internal sequence numbers in the executable program for routine diagnostics. The default is
!LINE_NUMBERS.
![NO]LIST[=listfile]
Indicates whether to create a listing file. The default is INOLIST.
![NO]MACillNE_CODE
Indicates whether to include machine language code in the listing file.
The default is INOMACHINE_CODE.
![NO]OBJECT[=objfile]
Indicates whether to create an object output file. The default is
IOBJECT.
![NO] OPTIMI ZE

Indicates whether to produce optimized code. The default is
IOPTIMIZE.
![NO]WARNINGS
Indicates whether to produce diagnostic messages for warning conditions. The default is !WARNINGS.

GOSUB label-name
Passes control to a labeled subroutine in a command procedure (not
valid at interactive level).
Privilege required: none

2-56

DCl Commands

GOTO label-name
Passes control to the labeled line in a command procedure (not valid at
in teractive level).
Privilege required: none

HANGUP KB[c]n[:]
Disconnects a dial-up terminal by dropping the carrier signal line.
Privilege required: HWCTL

HELP topic [subtopic [subsubtopic [ ... ]]]
Displays information about DCL commands and RSTSIE.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers

IOUTPUT=filespec
Writes the information to the specified file.
I[NO]PROMPT
Indicates whether to enable topic and subtopic prompting.

IF expression THEN [$] command
Tests the value of an expression and executes the DCL command
following the THEN keyword if the result of the expression is true. An
expression is true if the value is odd.
Privilege required: none

(For disks) INITIALIZE disk-device-name[:] pack-id
Creates a RSTSIE file structure on a disk.
Privilege required: RDNFS and WRTNFS

DCl Commands

2-57

Command Qualifiers

/CLUSTER_SIZE=n
Specifies the pack cluster size, which is the minimum allocation unit,
in 512-byte blocks, for the disk. The valid values for n are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,
32, and 64. The default is the device cluster size.
IDATE={ACCESSED I MODIFIED}
Maintain files by their date of last access or last modification. The
default is IDATE=MODIFIED.
![NO]ERASE
Indicates whether to erase data on the specified disk. The default is
!ERASE.
![NO]EXERCISE=n
Indicates whether to check for bad blocks on the disk. The valid values
for n are 0, 1, 2, 3 and FULL. The default is !EXERCISE=FULL.
IINDEX=position
Specifies where the SATT.SYS file is located on the disk; position can

be:
n

File located at device cluster n; valid values for n are 1
to the total device size divided by the device clustersize.

BEGINNING

File located at the beginning of the disk.

MIDDLE

File located at the middle of the disk.

The default is IINDEX=MIDDLE.
IMFD_CLUSTER_SIZE=n

Specifies the minimum allocation unit, in 512-byte blocks, for the
Master File Directory (MFD). The valid values for n are 4,8, or 16,
which must be greater than or equal to the value entered for the
CLUSTER_SIZE qualifier (but no larger than 16). The default is
IMFD_CLUSTER_SIZE=16.
!NEW_FILES={FIRST I LAST}
Specifies whether files stored on the disk will be placed at the beginning of an account (!NEW_FILES=FIRST) or at the end of an account
(!NEW_FILES=LAST). The default is !NEW_FILES=LAST.
!PRIVATE
Allows disk access only to users having an account on the disk.

2-58

DCl Commands

!PUBLIC
Allows disk access to all users having an account on the system. The
default is /PRivATE.
I[NO]QUERY
Indicates whether to request permission to continue when you select
a disk for initialization that already has a RSTSIE file structure. The
default is IQUERY.
I[NO]RETAIN
Indicates whether to use the existing bad block file. The default is
!RETAIN.
I[NO]WRITE
Indicates whether to allow read/write access instead of read-only access
when you mount the disk. The default is !WRITE.

(For tapes) INITIALIZE tape-device-name[:] [label]
Writes a new label on a tape and allocates the tape drive if it is not
already allocated.
Privilege required: DEVICE if the tape drive is restricted

Command Qualifiers
IDENSITY=n
Specifies the density in bits per inch (bpi). Depending on the tape drive,
n can be in the range 2 to 32766. Currently available densities are 800,
1600,6250,6667, and 10000 bpi. You can also specify MINIMUM
or MAXIMUM, which causes the system to set the density to the
minimum or maximum the tape drive supports.
p....ny density you specify overrides the system default density.
If you do not specify a density, INITIALIZE uses the system default
density. If the system default density is not valid for the tape drive,
the syste~ selects the next higher density the tape drive supports. If
the system default density is higher than the highest density the drive
supports, the system selects the tape drive's maximum density.
When you specify a density that the tape drive does not support, you
receive an error message.

DCl Commands

2-59

IFORMAT={ANSI I DOS}
Specifies the tape label format.

INITIALIZE/QUEUE queue-name[:]
Defines a print or batch queue.
Privilege required: SWCFG
Command Qualifiers
!BATCH
Specifies that you are initializing a batch queue.
/CLOSE
Initially closes the queue.
/CPU_LIMIT=(MAXlMUM=a,DEFAULT=b)
/CPU_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum and/or default CPU time limits (in minutes) you
can specify when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the /CPU_
LIMIT=n form, n specifies both the maximum and default limits. The
valid range for a, b, and n is 1 to 65535 in addition to UNLIMITED.
The default value cannot exceed the maximum value.
!DEFAULT
Initializes the default queue.
IFORMS=form-name
Specifies the name of the default forms for a print queue.
IPAGE_LIMIT=(MAXIMUM=a,DEFAULT=b)
IPAGE_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum and/or default page limits a user can specify
when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the IPAGE_LIMIT=n
form, n specifies both the maximum and default limits. The valid
range for a, b, and n is 1 to 4294967295 in addition to UNLIMITED.
The default value cannot exceed the maximum value. The default is
IPAGE_LIMIT=UNLIMITED.
IPRINT
Initializes a print queue.

2-60

DCl Commands

/PRIORITY=(MAXIMU1f=a,DEFAlJLT=b)
/PRIORITY=n
Specifies the maximwn andior default priorities a user can specify
when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the /PRIORITY=n form,
n specifies both the maximwn and default limits. The valid range for
a, b, and n is 1 to 255. The default value cannot exceed the maximwn
value. The default is /PRIORITY=255.
/PRIVILEGES=(priv[, ... ])
Specifies the set of privileges a user must have to enter jobs in queue.
Priv can be:

ALL

All privileges granted

NONE

All privileges denied

Privilege keyword

Specified privilege granted

Privilege keyword with "NO"
prefix

Specified privilege denied

The default is IPRIVILEGES=NONE. See Table 1-7 for a list of RSTS/E
privilege keywords.
trIME_LIMIT=(MAXIMUM=a,DEFAlJLT=b)
trIME_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximwn and/or default elapsed time limits (in minutes)
you can specify when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the
trIME_LIMIT=n form, n specifies both the maximum and default
limits. The valid range for a, b, and n is 1 to 65535 in addition to
UNLIMITED. The default value cannot exceed the maximum value.
The default is !rIME_LIMIT=UNLIMITED.

INITIALIZE/SERVER server-name[:]
Defines a print or batch server.
Privilege required: SWCFG

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]CONTROLS[=UP_ARROW]
Indicates how print servers handle control characters and escape
sequences. The default is ICONTROLS=UP_ARROW.

DCl Commands

2-61

IFORMS=form-name
Specifies the name of the forms installed on the printer.
!PRIORITY=n
Specifies the priority at which command procedures controlled by this
batch server run. The valid range for n is -120 to 120. PBS rounds the
priority down to the nearest multiple of S. You cannot specify a priority
that exceeds the PBS job priority. The default is !PRIORITY=-S.
IRUN_BURST=n
Specifies the run burst assigned to any command procedure controlled
by this batch server. The valid range for n is 1 to 127. The default is
IRUN_BURST=6.
![NO]SHAREABLE
Indicates whether to share the server's device with other jobs on the
system. The default is ISHAREABLE.

INQUIRE symbol-name ["prompt-string"]
Prompts for a value at your terminal and waits for a response. Mter
you enter a response, INQUIRE assigns the value as a string to the
specified symbol name. If you do not specify a prompt string, DCL uses
the symbol name to prompt for the value.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers

![NO]ECHO
Indicates whether to display responses to prompts on your terminal.
The default is /ECHO.
/EXIT[=label]
Specifies the action taken when you type CTRUZ. Passes control to
label, otherwise exits. The default is /EXIT.

IGLOBAL
Places the specified symbol in the global symbol table. The default is
!LOCAL.
!LOCAL
Places the specified symbol in the local symbol table for the current
command procedure.
2-62

DCl Commands

I[NO]PUNCTUATION
Indicates whether to append a colon (:) and space to the displayed
prompt string. The default is /PUNCTUATION.
ITIME_OUT=n
The amount of time (in seconds) the system waits for a response before
continuing without changing the symbol name value.

INSTALL/ERROR_FILE [filespec]
Installs the specified file as the systenl error message file. If you do not
specify a file, the default file _SYO:[O,l]ERR.SYS is used.
Privilege required:
•
•

INSTAL
Write access to the error file

Command Quaiifiers
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message after installing
the error file. The default is /LOG.

/POSITION=position
Places the error file at the specified position on the disk; position can
be:
n

Places the error file at first available position after the device
cluster number (DCN) n; the range of n is 0 to the maximum
DCN.

INDEX

Places the error file at the first available position after the
storage allocation table.

MIDDLE

Places the error file at the first available position after the
middle of the device.

The default is /POSITION=O.
ISIZE=n
Creates an error file if one does not exist and allocates n blocks to the
file.

DCl Commands 2-63

INSTALL/LIBRARY library-name
Adds the specified library as a resident library in memory.
Privilege required:
•
•

INSTAL
Read access to the library file

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]ADDRESS[=n]
Specifies the memory address where you want to load the resident
library. The valid range for n is lK to 2043K. INOADDRESS causes
the system to compute a new starting address each time it loads the
library. The system places the library in the highest part of memory
when you specify IADDRESS. The default is IADDRESS.
INOADDRESS[=RESTRICTED]
The restricted argument allows installation of size-restricted floating
libraries.
INOADDRESS=UNRESTRICTED
The unrestricted argument allows installation of unrestricted floating
libraries.
I[NO]ERROR_LOGGING
Indicates whether to log library errors. The default is IERROR_
LOGGING.
I[NO]LOCK
Indicates whether to lock the resident library in memory. The default
is INOLOCK.
IPROTECTION=n
Specifies the protection code you want to assign to the resident library.
The valid range for n is 0 to 63. The default is IPROTECTION=42.
I[NO]READ_ONLY
Determines whether you want to allow read only or read and write
access to the library. The default is fREAD_ONLY.
I[NO]SHAREABLE
Indicates whether to allow one or more than one user to access the
library at the same time. The default is ISHAREABLE.
2-64

DCl Commands

I[NO]UNLOAD
Indicates whether to remove the resident library from memory when it
is not in use. The default is INOlJNLOAD.

INSTALL/OVERLAY_FILE [filespec]
Installs the file you specify as the system overlay file. If you do not
specify a file, the default file _SYO:[O,l]OVR.SYS is used.
Privilege required:
•
•

INSTAL
Write access to the overlay file

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confinnation message after installing
the overlay file. The default is lLOG.

IPOSITION=position
Places the overlay file at the specified position on the disk; position can
be:
n

Places the file at the first available position after the device
cluster number (DeN) n; the range ofn is 0 to the maximum
DeN.

INDEX

Places the file at the first available position after the storage
allocation table.

MIDDLE

Places the file at the first available position after the middle of
the device.

The default is IPOSITION=O.
ISIZE=n
Creates an overlay file if one does not exist and allocates n blocks to
the file.

Del Commands 2-65

INSTALL/RUNTIME_SYSTEM name
Installs the specified run-time system in memory.
Privilege required:
•
•

INSTAL
Read access to the runtime system file

Command Qualifiers

I[NO]ADDRESS[ =n]
Specifies the memory address where you want to load the run-time
system. The valid range for n is lK to 2043K. The system places
the run-time system in the highest part of memory when you specify
IADDRESS. The system computes a new starting address each time it
loads the run-time system when you specify INOADDRESS. The default
is INOADDRESS.
I[NO]ERROR_LOGGING
Indicates whether to log run-time system errors. The default is
/ERROR_LOGGING.
I[NO]KEYBOARD_MONITOR
Indicates whether to install the run-time system as a keyboard monitor.
The default is INOKEYBOARD_MONITOR.
I[NO]LOCK
Indicates whether to lock the run-time system in memory. The default
is INOLOCK.
IMAXIMUM_SIZE=n
Specifies the maximum job size you want to allow a job running under
this run-time system. The valid range for n is lK to 28K.
IMINIMUM_SIZE=n
Specifies the minimum job size you want to allow a job running under
this run-time system. The valid range for n is lK to 28K.
IPOSITION=n
Places the run-time system block at position n after the primary runtime system in the linked list; the valid range for n is 0 to 255. If you
do not specify this qualifier, the system places the run-time system at
the end of the list.

2-66

DCl Commands

!PREFIX[=n]
Specifies the prefix code the system uses for emulator traps. The valid
range for n is 0 to 255. The default is ,PREFIX=255.
I[NO]READ_ONLY
Determines whether to allow read-only or read/write access to the
run-time system. The default is fREAD_ONLY.
I[NO]SHAREABLE
Indicates whether to allow one or more than one user access to the
run-time system. The default is ISHAREABLE.

ITYPE=filetype
Specifies the default file type for programs that execute under this
run-time system.
I[NO]lJl'~OAD

Indicates whether to remove the run-time system from memory when it
is not in use. The default is INOUNLOAD.

INSTALL/SWAP_FILE [=]index [filespec]
Installs the specified file as a swap file. The index value can be 0, 1, or
3. If you do not specify a file, the default file _SYO:[O,l]SWAPn.SYS is
used, where n is the index value.
Privilege required:
•
•

INSTAL
Write access to the swap file

Command Qualifiers
IDEVICE=disk-name[:]
Specifies that the disk is to be used exclusively as a non-file-structured
swapping disk. Any data or structure on the disk is destroyed when
jobs are swapped to it. You cannot use the /DEVICE qualifier with the
filespec parameter, or with the !POSITION or ISIZE qualifiers.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message after installing
the swap file. The default is /LOG.

DCl Commands

2-67

/POSITION=position
Places the file at the specified position on the disk; position can be:
n

Places the error file at first available position after the device
cluster number (DCN) n; the range of n is 0 to the maximum
DCN.

INDEX

Places the file at the first available position after the storage
allocation table.

MIDDLE

Places the file at the first available position after the middle of
the device.

The default is /POSITION=O.

ISIZE=n
Creates a swap file if one does not exist and allocates n blocks to the
file.

LINK filespec[, ... ]
Combines one or more object files to produce an executable program.
You can also specify an overlay structure for the program.
Privilege required:
•
•

Read access for the programs you are linking
Create/rename access to any files you create

language Qualifiers

!BASIC
1BP2

Links BASIC-PLUS-2 object files. If you do not specify a language
qualifier, RSTSIE assumes BASIC-PLUS-2 unless your system manager
changes it.

ICC
Links PDPII-C object files.
ICOBOL

ICBl
Links COBOL-Bl object files.
IDIBOL
Links DIBOL object files.
2-68 Del Commands

lF77
Links FORTRAN-77 object files.

/FOR
Links FORTRAN-IV object files.
/RSXll
Links object files produced by the RSX-based MACRO assembler
(MAC.TSK).
IRTll
Links object files produced by the RTll-based MACRO assembler
(MACRO.SAV).
Command Qualifiers

/CODE=[NO]DATA_SPACE
Indicates whether to create an instruction and data (I&D) space task.
You cannot use this qualifier with the /FOR or IRTll qualifiers. The
default is ICODE=NODATA_SPACE.
I[NO]DEBUG

Indicates whether to invoke the debugger associated with a programming language. The debugging tools are:
COBOL-81

Symbolic Debugger

DIBOL

DDT (DIBOL Debugging Technique)

FMS

Debug mode

MACRO

ODT (Octal Debugging Technique)

The default is INODEBUG.
IDESCRIPrION
Indicates that the input file is a Task Builder command file that
describes how to link the program.
I[NO]DMS
Indicates whether to link your DIBOL program with Data Management
Services (DMS) instead of RMS. The default is INODMS.
I[NO]EXECUTABLE[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to produce an executable file. The default is
!EXECUTABLE.

DCl Commands

2-69

I[NO]FMS[ =[NO]RESIDENT]

Indicates whether to link your program with the Forms Management
System (FMS) and Indicates whether to use the resident library instead
of the disk library. The default is INOFMS.
I[NO]MAP[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to produce a memory map file. The default is
INOMAP.
IOTS=[NO]RESIDENT
Specifies the resident library or the disk library for the language Object
Time System (OTS).
=[NO]RESIDENT }
I[NO]RMS { =SUPERVISOR
=USER
Indicates whether to link your program with the Record Management
Services (RMS) and when using the SUPERVISOR or USER argwnent
specifies which hardware mode the resident library should use. The
default is IRMS.
ISORT_AND_MERGE=[NO]RESIDENT
Indicates whether to use the SORTIMERGE clustered resident library
instead of the disk library in the user task.
ISTACK=n

Resets the allocation of stack space.
ISTRUCTURE
Prompts you for an overlay structure.

LOAD/INDEX [dev[:]]
Loads the SAT (Storage Allocation Table) for a disk device into memory
during timesharing. By making the SAT resident in memory, you can
improve the system's performance at the cost of increased memory
(XBUF) usage.
If you do not specify a device, the default is the system disk (SYO:).
Privilege required: SWCTL

2-70

DCl Commands

LOAD/OVERLAY overlay-name[, ... ]
Loads one or more monitor overlays into memory. Overlay-name can
be:
A'ITRIBUTE

Performs file and account attribute read/write
operations.

DCL

Performs file-related operations for DeL.

DELETE_RENAME

Performs file deletion and renaming.

DIRECTORY

Performs disk file lookup operations.

FILE_UTILITY

Performs the monitor file utility functions.

SYSTEM_CALLS

Performs the following monitor directives:
•

•
•
•

TERMINAL

Gets monitor tables (parts 1, 2, and 3)
Returns open file information
Converts dates and times
Returns job status

Performs the set terminal characteristics and the
hangup terminal directives.

Privilege required: SWCFG

Command Qualifier
fALL
Loads all monitor overlays into memory. If you also specify an overlay
name, the system loads only the specified overlay into memory.

LOGIN [p,pn]
Creates a new job by logging in to an account at a terminal, logs in your
current job under a different account, or resets your current job to its
initial logged-in state. You can also log in using a system logical name;
the logical name specified must be a system logical that translates into
a valid PPN.
Privilege required:
•

DEVICE to log in to an account at a restricted terminal

DCl Commands 2-71

•

GACNT or WACNT to log in to a new job under a different account
at a tenninal, or, without specifying a password

Command Qualifiers
![NO]OVERRIDE[=NOLOGINS]
Indicates whether the job should still be created if NO LOGINS is set.
The default is INOOVERRIDE.
IrERMINAL=KB[c]n[:]
Specifies the keyboard to log in.

LOGOUT
Ends a tenninal session.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifiers
!BRIEF
Displays nothing when you log out. The default is !FULL.
!FULL
Displays complete infonnation about your use of system resources when
you log out.

MACRO {/RSX111/RT11} filespec[, ...]
Invokes the MACRO-II assembler for up to six MACRO-II source files.
Privilege required:
•
•

Read access to the files you are assembling
Create/rename access to any files you create

Command Qualifiers
![NO]LIST[=listfile]
Indicates whether to create an output listing file. The default is !LIST.
![NO]OBJECT[=objfile]
Indicates whether to generate an output object file. The default is
/OBJECT.
2-72

DCl Commands

File Qualifier

/LIBRARY
Specifies that the file is a macro library.

MERGE input-filespec[, ... ]output-filespec
Invokes the PDP-II MERGE Utility to combine one or more previously
sorted input files into a single output file. All input files must have
been sorted on the same SORT key(s).
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers
i[NO]CHE CK_SE QUENCE

Indicates whether to examine the input files to make sure that they are
in order. The default is ICHECK_SEQUENCE.
/COLLATING_SEQUENCE={ASCII I EBCDIC I MULTINATIONAL}
Specifies the collating sequence. The default is
ICOLLATING_SEQUENCE=ASCII.

I[NO]DUPLICATES
Indicates whether to allow duplicate records. The default is
/DUPLICATES.
/KEY=(field[, ... ])
Defines up to 10 MERGE keys.
ISPECIFICATION[ =filespec]
Specifies the file containing commands, file qualifiers, and key field
definitions.
I[NO]STABLE
Indicates how input files containing records with equal keys are to be
merged in the output file. The default is /NOSTABLE.
I[NO]STATISTICS
Indicates whether to display a statistical summary after the MERGE
operation. The default is INOSTATISTICS.

DCl Commands

2-73

Input File Qualifiers

IFORMAT=(record-format[, ... ])
Specifies input record formats that override the existing data that
MERGE normally obtains through PDP-11 RMS.
/INDEXED_SEQUENTIAL[=n]
Specifies that the input file organization is indexed-sequential and
the number of keys; the valid range for n is 1 to 255. The default is
/INDEXED_SEQUENTIAL=1.
I[NO]SHAREABLE
Indicates whether to open the input files in write-shareable mode. The
default is /NOSHAREABLE.
ITREE_SPACE=n
Specifies the percentage distribution of available work area between
SORTIMERGE tree-related data structures and I/O-related data structures; the valid range for n is 1 to 100 percent (%). The default division
of work area is 30% to the merge list and 70% to I/O.
Output File Qualifiers

IALLOCATION=n
Specifies the number of 512-byte blocks allocated for the output file; the
maximum value for n is 4294967295.
/BUCKET_SIZE=n
Used with disk files, specifies the number of 512-byte blocks per bucket
for the output file; the maximum value for n is 32.
I[NO]CONTIGUOUS
Indicates whether to allocate contiguous disk space for the output file.
The default is /NOCONTIGUOUS.
1F0RMAT=(record-format[, ... J)
Defines the output file record format.
/INDEXED_SEQUENTIAL[=n]
Specifies that the output file organization is indexed-sequential and
the number of keys; the valid range for n is 1 to 255. The default is
/INDEXED_SEQUENTIAL=l.
/LOAD_FILL
Used only with indexed files, loads the buckets according to the fill size
established when the file was created.
2-74

DCl Commands

I[NO] OVERLAY
Indicates whether to overlay an existing file with the sorted records of
the input file. The default is INOOVERLAY.

!RELATIVE
Specifies that the output file organization is relative.
ISEQUENTIAL
Specifies that the output file organization is sequential.

(For disks) MOUNT disk-device-name[:] pack-id [Iogical-name[:]]
Prepares a disk drive for processing by system commands or user
programs.
Privilege required: MOUNT when mounting a disk drive mounted
ISHAREABLE or INOSHAREABLE by another user or mounted
INOREBUILD and the disk is dirty.

Command Qualifiers
IOVERRIDE[=IDENTIFICATION]
When you specify IOVERRIDE, MOUNT ignores the pack ID.
!PRIVATE
Mounts the disk as private, allowing access only to those users having
an account on the disk.
!PUBLIC
Mounts the disk as public, allowing access to all system users. The
default is !PRIVATE.
I[NO]QUOTA
Indicates whether to perform quota checking when the disk is mounted.

![NO]REBUILD
Indicates whether to rebuild a disk regardless of whether the disk was
initialized for read/write or read-only.
I[NO]RESTRICT
Indicates whether to restrict the use of MOUNT to those users having
MOUNT privilege. The default is INORESTRICT.

Del Commands 2-75

I[NO]SHAREABLE[ =n]
Indicates whether to allow access to all users having an account on
a private disk instead of only the specified job. ISHAREABLE, the
default, allows access to all jobs. INOSHAREABLE[ =n], where n
specifies a job number, allows access to only that job; the default for n
is your job.
I[NO]WRITE
Indicates whether to write data to the disk. The default is INOWRITE.

(For tapes) MOUNT tape-device-name[:] [label]
Prepares a tape drive for processing by system commands or user
programs.
Privilege required: DEVICE when mounting a restricted tape drive
Command Qualifiers

IDENSITY=n
Specifies the density, in bits per inch, at which a magnetic tape will be
read or written: n can be in the range 2 to 32766. Currently available
densities are 800, 1600, 6250, 6667, 8000 and 10000 bpi. You can also
specify MINIMUM or MAXIMUM, which causes the system to set the
density to the minimum or maximum the tape drive supports.
Any density you specify must match the density of the tape mounted.
If you do not specify a density, MOUNT automatically determines the

density of the tape mounted.
IFORMAT={ANSI I DOS I FOREIGN}
Specifies the tape label format.
IOVERRIDE[ =IDENTIFICATION]
When you specify IOVERRIDE for ANSI format tapes, MOUNT ignores
the tape label. DCL ignores IOVERRIDE on DOS format tapes.
I[NO]WRITE
Indicates whether to write data to the tape.

2-76

DCl Commands

ON CONTROL_C THEN [$] command
Specifies the action taken when a CtrllC interrupt occurs during
execution of a command procedure. ON CONTROL_C has no effect at
the interactive level.
Privilege required: none

ON severity-level THEN [$] command
Specifies an action taken when DCL detects a warning, error, or severe
error in a command procedure. ON has no effect at the interactive
level.
You can specify one of the following severity-level keywords:
•
•
•

WARNING
ERROR
SEVERE_ERROR

Privilege required: none

OPEN channel-number filespec
Opens a disk file for reading or writing. The valid range for channelnumber is 1 to 13.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

CreatelRename access to create a new file
Read access to open an existing file for reading
Write access to replace or append to an existing file

Command Qualifiers
IAPPEND
Appends new records to the end of an existing disk file.
!READ
Opens a file for reading. The default is !READ.

DCl Commands

2-77

![NO]REPLACE
Indicates whether to replace an existing file if you also specify !WRITE.
!WRITE
Opens a file for writing.

OPEN/LOG_FILE filespec
Opens a disk file for terminal logging.
Privilege required:
•
•

CreatelRename access to the log file you are creating
Write access to the file you are replacing or appending to

Command Qualifiers
/APPEND
Adds data to the end of an existing log file or opens a new file ifit does
not exist.
!DISABLE
Disables tenninal output logging to the log file.
!ENABLE
Enables terminal output logging to the log file. The default is
!ENABLE.
![NO]REPLACE
Indicates whether to replace an existing log file.
/[NO]TIME_STAMP
Indicates whether to prefix each line in the log file with a date/time
stamp. The default is INOTIME_STAMP.

OPEN/QUEUE queue-name[:]
Opens a queue for additional requests after it has been closed using the
CLOSE/QUEUE command.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

2-78

DCl Commands

PRINT [node::]filespec[, ... ] [entry-spec]
Queues one or more files for printing, either on a default system printer
or on a device you specify. If you specify a node name, you cannot use
any qualifiers or include an entry-spec.
Privilege required:
•
•
•
•

Read access to the file(s) you are printing
Write access to use !DELETE
GACNT to specify another owner in your group
WACNT to specify another owner not in your group

Command Qualifiers
IAFTER=date-time
Specifies an absolute or relative date-time value after which the entry
is eligible for processing.
IFORMS=form-name
Specifies the name of the form you want to use for this request.
!HOLD
Places the entry in a "hold" state in the queue.
IJOB_COUNT=n
Specifies the number of job copies you want to print; the valid range for
n is 1 to 255. The default is IJOB_COUNT=1.

INAME=entry-name
Specifies a 1- to 9-character name for the entry.
![NO]NOTIFY
Indicates whether to notify your terminal session of events that occur
related to your print entry. The default is INONOTIFY.
IOWNER=[p,pn]
Specifies the owner of the print request.
IPAGE_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum number of pages in the print job. The valid
range for n is 1 to 4294967295 in addition to UNLIMITED.

DCl Commands 2-79

IPRIORITY=n
Specifies the priority you want to assign to the request; the valid range
for n is 1 to 255.
IQUEUE=queue-name[:]
Names the queue you want to handle the request.
File Qualifiers

I[NO]CONVERT
Indicates whether to convert all 0 ("zero") characters to 0 ("oh") characters. The default is INOCONVERT.
ICOPIES=n
Specifies the number of file copies you want to print; the valid range for
n is 1 to 255. The default is ICOPIES=l.
![NO]DELETE
Indicates whether to delete the file after printing. The default is
INODELETE.
I[NO]FEED
Indicates whether to execute a fonn-feed sequence at the bottom
margin of each page. The default is !FEED.
![NO]FLAG_PAGES
Indicates whether to print flag (header) pages at the top of each file
copy. The default is !FLAG_PAGES.
I[NO]TRUNCATE
Indicates whether to truncate lines that exceed the form's width. The
default is INOTRUNCATE.
I[NO]WRAP
Indicates whether the characters that exceed the fonn width should
print on the next line. INOWRAP causes the characters to print on the
same line. The default is !WRAP.

READ channel-number symbol-name
Reads the next record from a disk file that you have open for reading
and assigns the contents of the record to the specified symbol name.
Privilege required: none

2-80

DCl Commands

Command Qualifiers

f[NO]DELIMITER
Indicates whether to include the record delimiter in the symbol name.
!END_OF_FILE=label

Specifies the label of the command file line to which you want to pass
control when the system detects an end-of-file (EOF) condition during a
read.
fGLOBAL
Searches the global symbol table for the specified symbol. The default
is !LOCAL.
/LOCAL
Searches the current local symbol iable for the specified symbol name.

RECALL {[integerlileading-substring}
Displays the command line specified by the integer or most recent
command line that matches the substring. Leading-substring refers to
the first several characters in a command string.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers

fALL
Displays all commands currently stored in the recall buffer along with
their command numbers.
!ERASE
Erases the contents of the recall buffer. !ERASE is ignored if the fALL
qualifier is specified.

REMOVE/ERROR_FILE
Removes the system error file.
Privilege required: INSTAL

Del Commands

2-81

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confinnation message after removing the
error file. The default is fLOG.

REMOVE/JOB job-number
Immediately tenninates the specified job and logs it off the system.
Privilege required: JOBCTL

Command Qualifiers
![NO]CONFIRM
Indicates whether to prompt before tenninating the specified job and is
a synonym for ![NO]QUERY. The default is ICONFIRM.
I[NO] QUERY
Indicates whether to prompt before terminating the specified job and is
a synonym for ![NO]CONFIRM. The default is IQUERY.

REMOVE/LIBRARY library-name
Removes the specified resident library from the list of installed resident
libraries.
Privilege required: INSTAL

REMOVE/OVERLAY_FILE
Removes the system overlay file.
Privilege required: INSTAL

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confinnation message after removing the
overlay file. The default is fLOG.

2-82

DCl Commands

REMOVE/RUNTIME_SYSTEM name
Removes the specified run-time system from the list of installed runtime systems.
Privilege required: INSTAL

REMOVE/SWAP_FILE [=]index
Removes the specified system swap file. Index can he 0, 1, or 3.
Privilege required: INSTAL

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confinuation message after removing the
swap file. The default is /LOG.

RENAME old-filespec[, ... ] new-filespec
Changes the file name or type of an existing file.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

•

Create/rename access to the file you are renaming
Write access to the file you are replacing
SYSIO and Write access to set the privilege bit <128> in the
protection code for non-executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> not set).
TMPPRV and Write access to set the privilege hit <128> in the
protection code for executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> set).

DCl Commands

2-83

Command Qualifiers
IBEFORE=date
ICREATED
!MODIFIED
ISINCE=date
Renames files you created or modified before or since the specified date.
I[NO]CONFIRM
Indicates whether to prompt before renaming files and is a synonym for
I[NO] QUE RY. The default is INOCONFIRM.
![NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message on your terminal
for each file renamed. The default is !LOG.
IPROTECTION=n
Specifies a protection code for the renamed file.
I[NO]QUERY
Indicates whether to prompt before renaming files and is a synonym for
![NO]CONFIRM. The default is INOQUERY.
![NO]REPLACE
Indicates whether to replace existing files having the same file name.
The default is INOREPLACE.
ISELECT {

:~~~::~UNIMUM=n

=SIZE=~llMUM=n

}

=SIZE=(MINIMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n)
Selects files based on their size. The specified size can be:
n

Selects only those files with size equal to n.

MINlMUM=n

Selects only those files with size greater
than or equal to n.

MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size less than
or equal to n.

MINlMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size between m
and n inclusive.

I[NO]WARNINGS
Indicates whether to display an error message if you try to rename a file to the name of a file that already exists. The default is
!WARNINGS.
2-84

DCl Commands

REPLY U"] message-text["]]
Responds to user and application requests and stores the reply in the
OperatorIMessage Services (OMS) work file. Message-text specifies
the text of the reply. Enclose strings containing lowercase letters or
nonalphanumeric characters (including spaces) in quotation marks.
Privilege required: OPER

Command Qualifier
IABORT=identification-number
Answers the request from a user or application corresponding to the
identification number and aborts the request.

!.A..NSWER=identification-number
Sends the reply text to the user or application corresponding to the
identification number and successfully completes the request.
!DISABLE
Indicates that the terminal will not perform as an operator services
console. REPLYIDISABLE is a synonym for
SET TERMINAUNOOPERATOR_SERVICES.
/ENABLE
Indicates that the terminal is enabled as an operator services console.
REPLY/ENABLE is a synonym for SET TERMINALIOPERATOR_
SERVICES=ALL.
!PENDING=identification-number
Answers the request from a user or application corresponding to the
identification number but does not fulfill the request. The request
remains pending until the operator aborts or answers the request.
!PROMPT
Prompts the user for multiple lines of text that make up the reply.
The reply is entered similarly to the CREATE and BROADCAST
commands. By using this qualifier, the length of the reply text can
have a maximum of 500 characters.
This qualifier conflicts with the message-text parameter, and will cause
an error if both are specified on the same command line.
/STATUS
Displays the pending requests from work files.
Del Commands 2-85

ITO=identification-number
Answers the request from a user or application corresponding to the
identification number and successfully completes the request. This
qualifier is a synonym for the IANSWER qualifier and is provided for
VMS compatibility.

REQUEST [n]request-text["]
Broadcasts a message or request to all operators and operator tenninals
on the system. It stores the message or reply in the Operator/Message
Services (OMS) work file.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifiers
!PROMPT
Prompts for multiple lines of text that will make up the text of the
request. The text is entered in a manner similar to the CREATE and
BROADCAST commands. The length of the request text can have a
maximum of 500 characters. This qualifier conflicts with the requesttext parameter, and will cause an error if both are specified on the
same command line.
![NO]REPLY
Indicates whether a reply is expected. /REPLY indicates that a reply
is required. The job will be placed in a wait state until an operator
replies to or terminates your request, or until you type CTRUC to
terminate your request. /NOREPLY indicates that no reply is expected,
and control returns to DCL after the REQUEST has been sent. The
default is /REPLY.
![NO]TIME_OUT[ =wait-minutes]
Specifies the length of time (in minutes) to wait for a reply. If no reply
is given after the amount of time specified, the request will be aborted.
You can specify any integer in the range 1 to 255. By default, there is
no time limit imposed on the REQUEST command.

2-86

Del Commands

RESTORE input-backup-set-spec output-filespec[:]
Lets you selectively restore accounts or files from a BACKUP media
onto a specified disk.
Privilege required:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Read access to the backup set file
Create access to restored filespecs
DATES to restore the file's original creation and access dates
INSTAL to exceed system dynamic region limit
SYSIO to restore files to [0,1]
TUNE to use the IBlJFFER_SIZE qualifier and for better system
performance
WACNT and GACNT to use the IACCOUNT_DATA qualifier

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]ACCOUNT_DATA
Indicates whether to create accounts that meet the selection criteria.
The default is IACCOUNT_DATA. This qualifier has no effect unless
you specified IACCOUNT_DATA for the backup process.

![NO]ASSIST
Indicates how to send media mount requests to an operator. By
specifying IASSIST, you can send the media mount requests to an
operator through the OperatorIMessage Services (OMS). The default,
INOASSIST, sends media mounts requests through your terminal.
IBUFFER_SIZE=n
Overrides the default dynamic region size. Larger values may improve
performance at the expense of greater system impact. The valid range
for n is 3 to 255 or MAXIMUM. You can also specify OPTIMUM or 55.
The default is the minimum usable size, except when using an MS- or
MU-class tape drive in which case the default is 55.
/CREATED=date:time
/CREATED=(AFTER=date:time,BEFORE=date:time)
IMODIFIED=date:time
IMODIFIED=(AFTER=date:time,BEFORE=date:time)

DCl Commands

2-87

Restores files created or modified on, before, after, or het.ween the
specified date: times. The date:time argument can be any valid DCL
date and/or time.
IEND={[NO]REWIND I [NO]DISMOUNT}
Specifies whether to rewind the output tape drive or dismount the
output disk following the successful completion of the backup operation.
The default for disks is IEND=DISMOUNT. The default for tapes is
IEND=NOREWIND.
IEXCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Specifies one or more files that should not be restored from the saveset.
/[NO]FILE_DATA
Indicates whether to transfer files from the saveset. Use this qualifier
with the /ACCOUNT_DATA qualifier to create accounts only. The
default is !FILE_DATA.
IINCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Specifies the files or accounts you want unconditionally processed.
IIN_LABEL=name
Specifies the name you want compared to the source volume ID.
![NO]INITIALIZE[=([NO]ERASE,[NO]EXERCISE,EXERCISE=n,
CLUSTER_SIZE=n, [NO]QUERY)]
Indicates whether to initialize the output disk before creating the backup file. The arguments allow you to have more
control over the initializing of disks in the backup operation.
For IINITIALIZE=EXERCISE=n, n can be 0, 1,2, or 3. For
IINITIALIZE=CLUSTER_SIZE=n, n can be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64.
If you specify IINITIALIZE, the output disk will be initialized based on

the attributes (pack ID, pack cluster size, etc.) of the input disk. The
default is /NOINITIALIZE.
/[NO]LIST_FILE[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a directory-like listing file that catalogs the
sequence of RESTORE events and is a synonym for ![NO]OUTPUT. The
default is ILIST_FILE=KB: or your terminal.
/OCCURRENCE=number
Specifies the occurrence of the named backup set used in the RESTORE
process. The default is the first occurrence.

2-88

DCl Commands

I[NO]OPTIMIZE
IOPTIMIZE=CLUSTER_SIZE
IOPTIMIZE=DIRECTORY
Indicates whether to optimize file cluster sizes, file directories, or
both on the output disk. The default, IOPTIMIZE, performs both
optimizations.
IOUT_LABEL=name
Specifies the name used for the pack ID of the output disk and provides
a means to ensure that you are referencing the correct output disk. If
the /INITIALIZE qualifier is not specified and the pack ID does not
match the one found on the specified output disk, then BACKlJP displays an error and rejects the command. If the /INITIALIZE qualifier
is specified, then the output disk label win be set to the name specified
with lOUT_LABEL.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Creates a directory-like listing file that catalogs the sequence of
RESTORE events and is a synonym for I[NO]LIST_FILE. The default
is IOUTPUT=KB: or your terminal.
IPLACED_POSITION=position
Specifies where RESTORE attempts to place files marked as placed at
a specific location; position can be:
INDEX

Places the files near the storage allocation table.

MIDDLE

Places the files near the middle of the disk.

ORIGINAL

Places the files at the position on the source file.

The default is IPLACED_POSITION=INDEX.
I[NO]PROMPT
Indicates whether to prompt for the first volume name. The default is
IPROMPT.
![NO] QUERY

Indicates whether to prompt before restoring each file selected.
Specifying IQUERY displays the name of each file selected and asks
if you want to restore that file. Answer Y or YES to restore the file
displayed, or N or NO to skip the file and continue with the next file.
The default, INOQUERY, restores each file selected without prompting.

DCl Commands

2-89

You can also specify /ALL with the YES or NO reply to indicate that
the reply applies to all remaining file transfers. This eliminates further queries. YES/ALL causes all remaining files to be restored and
NO/ALL causes all remaining files to be skipped.
![NO]REPLACE[=QUERY]
Indicates whether to replace an existing file on the destination device
when a file being transferred has the same name. !REPLACE indicates that new files should replace existing files of the same name.
INOREPLACE indicates that existing files should not be replaced.
The default, !REPLACE=QUERY, indicates that RESTORE should
prompt you before replace each existing file. Answer Y or YES to
replace the current file. Answer N or NO to not replace the existing file
and proceed with the next file.
You can also specify /ALL with the YES or NO reply to indicate that
the reply applies to all remaining file replacements. This eliminates
further queries. YES/ALL causes all remaining files to be replaced and
NO/ALL causes all remaining files to be skipped.
![NO]REWIND
Indicates whether to rewind a magnetic tape saveset volume before
processing. The default is INOREWIND.
/SELECT=(filespec-list)
Specifies the files you want to restore. The default is all files in the
backup set.
![NO]VERIFY[=ONLY]
Indicates whether to perform a comparison operation of all data transferred to the output disk. If you specify NERIFY, then RESTORE
performs a second pass through the input disk, comparing each account
and file transferred with that on the output disk. RESTORE reports
any differences found.
You can use RESTORENERIFY=ONLY to perform a verify operation
without transferring any data. The default is INOVERIFY.

2-90

DCl Commands

RESTORE/DIRECTORY backup-set-spec
Lists files within a backup saveset.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

Read access to the backup set file
TUNE to use the /BUFFER_SIZE qualifier
INSTAL to exceed system dynamic region limit

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]ASSIST
Indicates how to send media mOll..'1t requests to an operator. By specifying IASSIST, you can send the disk or tape media mount requests to an
operator through the Operator/Message Services (OMS). The default,
INOASSIST, sends media mounts requests through your terminal.

/BRIEF
Displays a format similar to the DCL full directory (minus file attributes) and is the default qualifier. The default is /BRIEF.
/BUFFER_SIZE=n
Specifies the size in k-words of the RESTORE buffer in memory.
Larger values may improve performance at the expense of greater
system impact. The valid range for n is 3 to 255 or MAXIMUM. You
can also specify OPTIMUM or 55. The default is the minimum usable
size, except when using an MS- or MU-class tape drive in which case
the default is 55.
ICREATED=date
ICREATED=(BEFORE=date:time,AFTER=date:time)
/MODIFIED=date
/MODIFIED=(BEFORE=date:time,AFTER=date:time)
Lists files created or modified on, before, after, or between the specified
date:times. The date:time argument can be any valid DCL date and/or
time.

IEND={[NO]REWIND I [NO]DISMOUNT}
Specifies whether to rewind the output tape drive or dismount the
output disk following the successful completion of the RESTORE
operation. The default for disks is IEND=DISMOUNT. The default for
tapes is IEND=NOREWIND.

DCl Commands

2-91

IEXCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Specifies one or more files that should not be listed.
!FULL

Displays detailed information for each file on multiple lines.

To display information for specific files use ISELECT or /EXCLUDE
with RESTOREIDIRECTORY.
IINCLUDE=(filespec-list)
Specifies the files or accounts you want transferred to the saveset.
IIN_LABEL=name
Specifies the name you want compared to the source volume ID.
I[NO]LIST_FILE[ =filespec]
Indicates whether to create a log file that catalogs the sequence of
RESTORE events. The log contains information about the accounts
and files transferred, and the disk volumes used. The default is ILIST_
FILE=KB: or your terminal.
IOCCURRENCE=number
Specifies the occurrence of the named backup set used in the RESTORE
process. The default is the first occurrence.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]

Creates a directory-like listing file that catalogs the sequence of
RESTORE events and is a synonym for ILNO]LIST_FILE. The default
is IOUTPUT=KB: or your terminal.
I[NO]PROMPr
Indicates whether to prompt for the first volume name. The default is
IPROMPr.
I[NO]REWIND
Indicates whether to rewind a magnetic tape saveset volume before
processing. The default is INOREWIND.
ISELECT=(filespec-list)
Specifies the files you want to list. The default is all files in the backup
set.

2-92

DCl Commands

RETURN [status-code]
Returns control to the command following the calling GOSUB command. If you specify a status-code, DCL uses this value to set the
$STATUS and $SEVERITY symbols that determine the exit status for
this command. Status-code can be an expression.
Privilege required: none

RUN filespec
Executes a program or a command file.
Privilege required: Execute access to the program

SET ACCOUNT dev:[p,pn]
Modifies one or more account attributes.
Privilege required: GACNT or WACNT

Command Qualifiers
![NO]CAPTIVE
Indicates whether the account is to be a captive account.
IDETACHED_JOB_QUOTA=detached-job-quota
Specifies the maximwn nwnber of jobs that can exist in a detached
state for an account at one time. The valid range for detached-job-quota
is 0 to 63 or UNLIMITED.
I[NO]DIALUP
Indicates whether to allow logins via a dialup facility.

![NO]EXPIRE[=date]
Specifies the account expiration date. The account is marked as expired
when you specify /EXPIRE. The account never expires when you specify
INOEXPIRE.

IIN_ QUOTA=logged-in-quota
Specifies the nwnber of disk blocks the system allows you to allocate
while logged in. The valid range for logged-in-quota is 0 to 16777214 or
UNLIMITED.
Del Commands 2-93

I[NO]INTERACTIVE
Indicates whether to allow interactive access to the account. Batch jobs
can still run under the account. The default is !INTERACTIVE.
IJOB_QUOTA=job-quota
Specifies the maximum number of LOCAL, DIALUp, or NETWORK job
types that can exist at one time for this account. The valid range for
job-quota is 0 to 63 or UNLIMITED.
![NO]LOG
Detennines what type of infonnation SET ACCOUNT writes to a log
file. By default, SET ACCOUNT logs all modifications of an account.
When you specify INOLOG, SET ACCOUNT logs warning messages
only. The default is /LOG.
I[NO]LOOKUP
Indicates whether to allow passwords to be looked up.

IMESSAGE_QUOTA=message-quota
Specifies the number of outstanding messages that a job running under
this account can request when declaring itself to be a receiver. The
valid range for message-quota is 0 to 65534 or UNLIMITED.
INAME="account-name"
Specifies the account name. You can specify up to 13 characters.
![NO]NETWORK
Indicates whether to allow any network connections into this account.
IOUT_QUOTA=logged-out-quota
Specifies the number of disk blocks the system allows a user to retain when logging out, or creating or extending a file in a logged-out
account. The valid range for logged-out-quota is 0 to 16777214 or
UNLIMITED.
I[NO]PASSWORD_PROMPT
Indicates whether to require a password when a user logs in.
IPRIVILEGES=(priv[, ... ])
Modifies the privileges currently assigned to an account. Priv can be:

2-94

ALL

All privileges granted.

NONE

All privileges denied.

DCl Commands

Privilege keyword

Specified privilege granted.

Privilege keyword with "NO"
prefix

Specified privilege denied.

Modifications to privileges do not take affect until the next time you
log in to the account. See Table 1-7 for a list of RSTSIE privilege
keywords.
IRIB_QUOTA=rib-quota
Specifies the number of receiver ID blocks (RIBs) that a job running
under this account can set up for itself as a message receiver. The valid
range for n is from 0 t-O 256 or lJNLIM!TED.
I[NO]USER
Specifies the type of account. tUSER specifies an account with login
attributes and file storage capabilities. /~lOUSER specifies an account
with file storage capabilities only. The default is all accounts.

SET CACHE
Enables directory and data caching.
Privilege required: TUNE
Command Qualifiers

fALL
Caches all data transfers.
fCLUSTERSIZE=n
Specifies the cache cluster size. The valid values for n are 1, 2, 4, or 8.
The default is 4.
IDATA_MAXIMUM=n
Specifies the maximum number of cache clusters you want to use
for data caching. The valid range for n is 0 to 65535 in addition to
UNLIMITED.
IDIRECTORY_MAXIMUM=n
Specifies the maximum number of cache clusters you want to use for
directory caching. The valid range for n is 0 to 65535 in addition to
UNLIMITED.

DCl Commands

2-95

/DISABLE
Disables data and directory caching. The default is !ENABLE.
/ENABLE
Enables data and directory caching, using previous settings as defaults.
I[NO]FILE
Indicates whether to allow file data caching. The default is !FILE.
IKEEP=n
Specifies the cache replacement time, in seconds, an unused cache
cluster remains in memory before being used for another cache cluster.
The valid range for n is 0 to 65535.
!MAXIMUM=n
Specifies the maximum number of data and directory cache clusters.
The valid range for n is 0 to 65535 in addition to UNLIMITED.

SET CONTROL=C
Re-enables CtrllC checking within a command procedure. See also SET
NOCONTROL=C.
Privilege required: none

SET DATA
Allows you to supply data to a program from within a command
procedure. See also SET NODATA.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifier

!END_OF_DATA="char"
Specifies an alternate prefix character to signal the end of data. The
default is !END_OF_DATA="$".

2-96

DCl Commands

SET DATE date[:time]
Sets the system date. You can specify any valid DCL relative or
absolute date/time string. For additional information on entering dates
and times, see the section, IIRules for Entering DCL Commands. II
Privilege required: DATES

SET DEVICE dev[:]
Sets the characteristics of a device.
Privilege required:
•
•
•
e

HWCTL and HWCFG to use the lDISABLE qualifier
HWCFG to use !RESTRICT
HWCTL to use /ENABLE
HWCFG and DEviCE to use INORESTRICT

Command Qualifiers

!DISABLE
Disables the specified device.
/ENABLE
Enables the specified device that you previously disabled.
I[NO]RESTRICT
Indicates whether to restrict allocating and opening the specified device
only to users having DEVICE privilege.

SET ECHO
Re-enables terminal output during execution of a command procedure.
See also SET NOECHO.
Privilege required: none

Del Commands 2-97

SET ENTRY {entry-spec I entry-number}
Modifies one or more entry attributes for an entry or entries on a
queue. You can also use SET ENTRY to hold or release an entry.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

•

None to change entries you own
PBSCTL to use the !PRIORITY, HOLD, and !RELEASE qualifiers
for any entry you do not own
WACNT to use the IAFTER, ICPU_LIMIT, /FORMS, /HOLD,
IJOB_COUNT, !PAGE_LIMIT, !PRIORITY, !RELEASE, and
!TIME_LIMIT qualifiers for an entry not in your group
GACNT to use the IAFTER, ICPU_LIMIT, !FORMS, /HOLD,
IJOB_COUNT, !PAGE_LIMIT, !PRIORITY, !RELEASE, and
!TIME_LIMIT qualifiers for an entry in your group

Command Qualifiers
![NO]AFTER=date:time
Indicates an absolute or relative date:time value after which
PrintlBatch Services (PBS) processes the entry.
!BATCH
Selects only batch queue entries for modification.
ICPU_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum CPU time, in minutes, allowed for the batch
job. The valid range for n is 1 to 65535 in addition to UNLIMITED.
You cannot specify a value for n that exceeds the maximum CPU limit
assigned to the queue.
/FORMS=form-name
Specifies the name of the form you want to use for this entry.
/HOLD
Places the entry in a hold state. Th process the entry, you must release
it by using the SET ENTRY!RELEASE command.
IJOB_COUNT=n
Specifies the number of job copies you want printed. The valid range
for n is 1 to 255.

2-98

Del Commands

!PAGE_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximwn nwnber of pages in the print job. The valid
range for n is 1 to 4294967295 in addition to UNLIMITED. You cannot
specify a value for n that exceeds the maximum page limit assigned to
the queue.
!PRINT
Selects only print queue entries for modification.
!PRIORITY=n
Specifies the priority you want to assign to the request. The valid
range for n is 1 to 255. You cannot specify a value for n that is higher
than the maximwn priority assigned to the queue.
!RELEASE
Releases the entr.f from its hold state so Print/Batch Services (PBS)
can process it.
ITIME_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum elapsed time, in minutes, you want to allow for
the requested batch job. The valid range for n is 1 to 65535 in addition
to UNLIMITED. You cannot specify a value for n that exceeds the
maximum time limit assigned to the associated queue.

SET FILE filespec
Sets the characteristics of a file.
Privilege required:
•
•
•

•

Create/rename to use the !PROTECTION qualifier
Write access to use the INOCONTIGUOUS, I[NO]PLACED, and
!RUNTIME_SYSTEM qualifiers
SYSIO and Write access to use the I[NO]DELETABLE qualifier
and to set the privilege bit <128> in the protection code for nonexecutable files (files with the executable bit <64> not set).
TMPPRV and Write access to set the privilege bit <128> in the
protection code for executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> set).
TUNE and Write access to use the ![NO]CACHE qualifier

DCl Commands 2-99

Command Qualifiers

I[NO]BACKUP
Indicates whether to backup the contents of the file during a backup
operation. When you specify tNOBACKUP, the file's attributes are
included in the backup operation but the file's contents are not. The
default is !BACKUP.
I[NO]CACHE[=RANDOM I SEQUENTIAL]
Indicates whether to cache data in an open file. The default is
ICACHE=RANDOM if you specify ICACHE with no argument.

INOCONTIGUOUS
Marks a contiguous file as noncontiguous, allowing extension of the file.
I[NO]DELETABLE
Indicates whether to mark a file for deletion and renaming.
![NO]IGNORE
Indicates whether to ignore the file for all backup operations. The
default is tNOIGNORE.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to log the file specification of each modified file to
your terminal. The default is tNOLOG.
![NO]PLACED
Indicates whether to mark a file as being placed in its present position.
IPROTECTION=n
Specifies the protection code you want to assign to a file; the valid
range for n is 0 to 255.
IRUNTIME_SYSTEM=name
Names the run-time system.

SET HOST [=1 [ _lnode[::)[ _node::)[ .. ·l
Allows you to log in to another computer from the system you first
logged in to.
Privilege required: none

2-100

Del Commands

SET JOB [job-number]
Defines the characteristics of the current or specified job.
Privilege required: TUNE to use all qualifiers except
/KEYBOARD_MONITOR and /PRIVILEGES
Command Qualifiers

!HOLD
Sets the job priority to -128, preventing further execution.
IKEYBOARD_MONITOR[=name]
Changes your keyboard monitor.
/PRIORITY[ =n]
Specifies the priority for a job. The valid range for n is -128 to 120, in
multiples of 8. If you do not specify n, the default is -8.
/PRIVILEGES=(priv[, ... ])
Modifies the set of your current job privileges. Priv can be:
ALL

All privileges granted.

NONE

All privileges denied.

Privilege keyword

Specified privilege granted.

Privilege keyword with "NO"
prefix

Specified privilege denied.

See Table 1-7 for a list of RSTS/E privilege keywords.
!RELEASE
Sets the job priority to the default priority, allowing the job to continue
execution.
!RUN_BURST[=n]
Specifies the job run burst. The valid range for n is 1 to 127. If you do
not specify n, the default is 6.
/SIZE=n
Specifies the maximum job size. The valid range for n is 1 to 255.

DCl Commands

2-101

Selectively enables or disables output to a log file that you previously
opened using the OPENILOG_FILE command.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifiers
!DISABLE
Disables logging of terminal and command file output.
!ENABLE
Enables logging of terminal and command file output to the log file.
I[NO]TIME_STAMP
Indicates whether to prefix each line in the log file with a date/time
stamp.

SET NOCONTROL=C
Disables CtrllC checking within a command procedure. See also SET
CONTROL=C.
Privilege required: none

SET NODATA
Tells DCL to read all data required by a program or a command from
the user's terminal, instead of a command file. See also SET DATA.
Privilege required: none

SET NODE/LAT
Initially sets or changes the LAT host node characteristics.
Privilege required: SWCFG

2-102

DCl Commands

Command Qualifiers

/ACCESS={LOCAL I DIALUP}
Specifies whether connections on the terminal server should be treated
as LOCAL or DIALUP. This qualifier only determines the access type
for terminal servers that do not supply an access type. If a terminal
server includes an access type, RSTS/E will ignore any /ACCESS
setting and use the server's access type instead.
CAUTION

Setting the access type to LOCAL for a terminal server that
provides access to the system through dialup lines could
compromise security.
IDISABLE={(group-code[, .. .]) I ALL}
Removes the specified group codes from the list of group codes associated with the LAT host node. The group list can include multiple
codes separated by commas. For example, IDISABLE=(0,1,4,10) disables group codes 0, 1, 4, and 10. The key-word ALL can be specified
to indicate codes 0-255. The !DISABLE qualifier may be specified only
once on a command line. No error is returned if a specified group code
is not enabled.
!ENABLE={(group-code[, ... ]) I ALL}
Adds the specified group codes to the list of group codes associated with
the LAT host node. The group list can include multiple codes separated
by commas. For example, !ENABLE=(5,6,8,10) enables group codes 5,
6, 8, and 10. The keyword ALL can be specified to indicate codes 0-255.
The !ENABLE qualifier may be specified only once on a command line.
No error is returned if a specified group code is already enabled.
IIDENTIFICATION="node-id"
Specifies a description for the LAT host node. This description can be
used as an announcement string or to further identify the node. It may
be up to 64 characters in length.
I[NO]LOG

Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for the requested
action. The default is INOLOG.

DCl Commands 2-103

IMULTICAST_TIMER=seconds
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between the multicast messages
sent for service announcements. The minimum value is 10 seconds,
the maximum value is 255 seconds. The default when the first SET
NODEILAT command is issued is 60 seconds. The following is an
example of this command:
$ SET NODE RSTS /MULTICAST_TIMER=50

SET NO ECHO
Disables tenninal output during execution of a command procedure.
See also SET ECHO.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifier

![NO]WARNINGS
Indicates whether to display warning and error messages on your
terminal. The default is !WARNINGS.

SET NOON
Overrides default error checking within a command procedure. See
also SET ON.
Privilege required: none

SET NOVERIFY
Infonns DCL not to display lines in a command procedure as it executes
them. See also SET VERIFY.
Privilege required: none

2-104

DCl Commands

SETON
Controls whether DCL perfonns error checking following the execution
of commands in a command procedure. See also SET NOON.
Privilege required: none

SET OPERATOR_SERVICES
Modifies the type of requests stored in the operator services work file.
Privilege required: OPER

Command Qualifier
/[NO]KEEP=(keyword[, ...])
Specifies the type of requests that will be kept in the operator services
work file. Valid keywords are ALL, [NO]MESSAGES, [NO]REQUESTS,
and NONE. The INOKEEP quaiifier is a synonym ior /KEEP=NO~""E.

SET PASSWORD [dev:[p,pn]]
Specifies the password for an account. Passwords for lookup accounts
must be 6 characters long; passwords for NOLOOKUP accounts can be
6 to 13 characters long.
Privilege required:
•
•

GACNT or WACNT to specify a password for other accounts, or for
the system password
SETPAS to specify a password for your own account

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a message on your tenninal confirming
the password change. The default is /LOG.
ISYSTEM

The specified password replaces the current system password.

DCl Commands

2-105

SET PORT port-name[:]
Changes the current characteristics of a local LAT port that was
created by the CREATEIPORT command on a RSTSIE node. Note
that the server name cannot be changed by the SET PORT command;
to assign the local LAT port to a different terminal server, use the
ASSIGNIPORT command.
The port-name parameter specifies the name of the local port. The
port-name must be in the form of KBIn: or KBn:, where n is a value
from 0 through 127.
Privilege required: SWCFG

Command Qualifiers
/LAT
Sets the characteristics of a LAT port. The default is /LAT.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message after the port is
set. The default is fLOG.
I[NO] QUEUED

Indicates whether the connection to a terminal server will be placed on
the server's queue if the server supports queuing and the remote port
is currently busy. If /NOQUEUED is specified and the remote port is
busy, the connection will not be queued and it will fail.
Use the SHOW PORT command to display the port's connection status.
If the port is set IQUEUED and the remote port is busy, a connection
status of "In Progress" and the position in the queue will be shown.
/[NOJREMOTE_PORT[=remote-port-name]
Specifies the name of a remote port on the terminal server to which the
local port is to be connected. The remote port name can be up to 16
alphanumeric characters in length.
If /NOREMOTE_PORT is specified, the local port is deassigned from
the current remote port. If you use this qualifier, you must select a
service using the ISERVICE qualifier.

2-106

DCL Commands

I[NO]SERVICE[ =service-name]
Specifies the name of a remote service offered at the terminal server to
which the local LAT port is to be connected. The service name can be
up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length.

If INOSERVICE is specified, the local port is deassigned from the
current remote service. If you use this qualifier, you must select a
remote port using the /REMOTE_PORT qualifier.

SET PRINTER dev[:]
Changes the characteristics of the specified line printer.
Privilege required: HWCFG
Command Qualifiers

!BACKSPACE[=mode]
Determines ho'l."l the system handles backspace characters. Possible
modes are:
CONTROL

Handled like other nonprinting characters

REAL

System sends backspaces

SIMULATE

System sends a Carriage Return and the required
number of spaces

The default is !BACKSPACE=REAL.
I[NO]CONTROLS
Determines what the system sends the printer when processing
nonprinting characters. When you specify ICONTROLS, the system sends untranslated characters to the printer. When you specify
INOCONTROLS, the system discards non printing characters or uses
the up arrow (1\) mode.

![NO]CR_PREFIX
Indicates whether to insert a Carriage Return before LF, VT, and FF
characters.
IDEVICE_TYPE=type
Specifies the characteristics of the line printer. Valid types are LNO 1,
LPll, and LA180.

DCl Commands

2-107

I[NO]EIGHT_BIT
Indicates whether to send 8-bit characters to the printer.
I[NO]EOT
Detennines how the system handles the end-of-transmission (EOT)
character (AD). When you specify /EOT, the system sends the EOT
character to the printer without translation. When you specify
INOEOT, the system handles EOT as a nonprinting character.

I[NO]FILL
Indicates whether to insert fill characters after FF characters.
!LOWERCASE
Sends untranslated lowercase characters to the printer.
/[NO]OMIT_CR
Indicates whether to send a Carriage Return to the printer if the next
character is a LF character.
IPAGE_LENGTH=n
Specifies the printer default page length; the valid range for n is 1 to
255.
I[NO]SPECIAL_CHARACTER[ =char]
Determines whether the printer prints its special character. When
you specify char, the printer substitutes its special character for each
occurrence. You can specify char by using its binary value (0 to 255)
or by enclosing char in quotation marks, providing char is a printable
character.
I[NO]TAB
Indicates whether to send tab characters to the printer instead of
spaces.

/UPPERCASE
Converts lowercase characters to uppercase characters before sending
them to the printer.
IWIDTH=n
Specifies the width of the printer; the valid range for n is 1 to 254.

2-108

DCl Commands

SET PROMPT [prompt]
Allows you to change your prompt text. The prompt can be an expression or a quoted string. The maximwn length allowed is 255
characters.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
/LOG_FILE
Enables the specified prompt only while logging your terminal session.

SET PROTECTION[=]n filespec[, ... ]
Specifies the protection code of a file.
Privilege required:
•
•

•

Crea telRename access to the file you specify
SYSIO and Write access to set the privilege hit <128> in the
protection code for non-executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> not set).
TMPPRV and Write access to set the privilege bit <128> in the
protection code for executable files (files with the executable bit
<64> set).

Command Qualifiers
IBEFORE=date
ICREATED
/MODIFIED
ISINCE=date
Sets the protection of files created or modified before or since the
specified date.
I[NO]CONFIRM
Indicates whether to prompt you before changing a file protection code
and is a synonym for ![NO]QUERY. The default is INOCONFIRM.

!DEFAULT
Specifies the protection code to assign to every file you create until you
log out. Do not include a file specification when you use this qualifier.
DCl Commands

2-109

I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confinning message for each file whose
protection code you change. The default is /LOG.
I[NO]QUERY
Indicates whether to prompt you before changing a file protection code.
The default is /NO QUERY.
fSELECT {

:~~~::~nNIMUM=n

=SIZE=~UM=n

}

=SIZE=(MINIMUM=m,MAXlMUM=n)
Selects files based on their size. The specified size can be:
n

Selects only those files with size equal to n.

MINlMUM=n

Selects only those files with size greater
than or equal to n.

MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size less than
or equal to n.

MINlMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size between m
and n inclusive.

SET QUEUE queue-name[:]
Modifies one or more queue characteristics. When you change a queue
characteristic, the change does not affect entries already in the queue;
however, the change affects all later entries.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Modifies all queues.
!BATCH
Modifies only batch queues.
fCPU_LIMIT=(MAXlMUM=a,DEFAULT=b)
fCPU_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum and/or default CPU time limits (in minutes) you
can specify when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the /CPU_

2-110

DCl Commands

LIMIT=n form, n specifies both the maximum and default limits. The
valid range for a, b, and n is 1 to 65535 in addition to UNLIMITED.
I[NO]DEFAULT
Indicates whether to establish the specified queue as the default queue.
/FORMS=form-name
Specifies the name of the default forms for the print queue.
!PAGE_LIMIT=(MAXIMUM=a,DEFAULT=b)
!PAGE_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum and/or default page limits a user can specify
when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the IPAGE_LIMIT=n
form, n specifies both the maximum and default limits. The valid range
for a, b, and n is 1 to 4294967295 in addition to UNLH"HTED.
IPRIN'r
Modifies only print queues.
!PRIORITY=(MAXIMUM=a,DEFAULT=b)
!PRIORITY=n
Specifies the maximum and/or default priorities a user can specify
when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the !PRIORITY=n form,
n specifies both the maximum and default limits. The valid range for a,
b, and n is 1 to 255.
!PRIVILEGES=(priv[, ... ])
Specifies the set of privileges a user must have to enter jobs in queue.
Priv can be:
ALL

All privileges granted

NONE

All privileges denied

Privilege keyword

Specified privilege granted

Privilege keyword with "NO"
prefix

Specified privilege denied

See Table 1-7 for a list of RSTSIE privilege keywords.
trIME_LIMIT=(MAXIMUM=a,DEFAULT=b)
trIME_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum and/or default elapsed time limits (in minutes)
you can specify when submitting a job to the queue. If you use the
trIME_LIMIT=n form, n specifies both the maximum and default
limits. The valid range for a, b, and n is 1 to 65535 in addition to
UNLIMITED.
DCl Commands

2-111

SET SERVER server-name[:]
Changes one or more characteristics for print and/or batch servers. For
example, changing forms for print servers.
Privilege required:
•
•

PBSCTL
TUNE to specify the !PRIORITY or !RUN_BURST qualifiers

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Modifies all servers.

!BATCH
Modifies only batch servers.
I[NO]CONTROLS[=UP_ARROW]
Indicates how print servers handle control characters and escape
sequences. If you do not specify this qualifier, then the current
CONTROLS setting is not changed.
IFORMS=form-name
Specifies the name of the forms PrintlBatch Services (PBS) installs for
the specified print server. If you do not specify this qualifier, then the
server's current form is not changed.
/PRINT
Modifies only print servers.
/PRIORITY[ =n]
Indicates the priority at which PBS runs command procedures controlled by the specified batch server. The valid range for n is -120 to
120. PBS rounds n to the nearest multiple of 8. If n is not specified,
the default is -8. If you do not specify this qualifier, then the batch
server's priority is not changed.
!RUN_BURST[=n]
Indicates the run burst PBS assigns to any command procedures
controlled by this batch server. The valid range for n is 1 to 127. If n is
not specified, the default is 6. If you do not specify this qualifier, then
the batch server's run burst is not changed.

2-112

DeL Commands

![NO]SHAREABLE
Indicates whether to allow other jobs to share the printer. If you do not
specify this qualifier, then the [NO ]SHAREABLE characteristic is not
changed.

SET SERVICE/LAT service-name
Modifies the information associated with a particular service being
offered by the node.
Privilege required: SWCFG

Command Qualifiers
!!DENTIFI CATI ON;::: "service-id "
Modifies the description for the service. This description is used to
further identify the service being offered. It may be up to 64 characters
in length.
I[NO]LOG
Indicates whether to display a confirmation message for the requested
action. The default is /LOG.

SET SYSTEM
Sets the system default characteristics.
Privilege required:
•

SWCFG to use the !DATE_FORMAT, !DYNAMIC_REGION_LIMIT,
I[NO]FMS, IHANGup, !LABEL, ![NO]LAT, !NAME, /POWERFAIL_
DELAY, /PSEUDO_KEYBOARD, and !TIME_FORMAT qualifiers

•
•

HWCTL to use the !HOLD and !RELEASE qualifiers
HWCFG to use the !DENSITY qualifier

DCl Commands

2-113

•
•
•
•

SWCTL to use the IANSWERBACK, IEMT_LOGGING, I[NO]LOGINS,
and I[NO]STATISTICS qualifiers
SYSIO to use the /MONITOR_NAME qualifier
TUNE to use the ISWAP_MAXIMUM qualifier
WACNT to use the I[NO]PASSWORD_PROMPr qualifier

Command Qualifiers
I[NOJANSWERBACK="text"
Indicates whether to define a systemwide response for electronic
messaging systems.

IDATE_FORMAT={ALPHABETIC I NUMERIC}
Specifies the system date format. The alphabetic format is dd-mmm-yy.
The nwneric format is yy.mm.dd.
!DENSITY=default
Specifies the magnetic tape default density; default can be in the range
2 to 32766. Currently available densities are 800, 1600, 6250, 6667,
8000, and 10000 bpi. You can also specify MINIMUM, or MAXIMUM.
The default density you specify applies to all tape drives on the system.
If you specify a default density that the tape drive does not support,
the system selects the next higher density the tape drive supports.
If you specify a default density that is higher than the highest density
the tape drive supports, the system selects the tape drive's maximum
density.

If you do not specify a system default density, the default is 1600 bpi.
!DYNAMIC_REGION_LIMIT=n
Sets the limit for the total size of all dynamic regions and FORTRAN
virtual arrays that users can create without the INSTAL privilege. Any
user having the INSTAL privilege can override this systemwide limit.
This limit is also used by BACKUP when user does not have INSTAL
privilege.
IEMT_LOGGING=(emt[, ... ])
Enables or disables EMT logging for the specified EMT(s), where "emt"
is a valid EMT mnemonic, such as CRE. See System Directives Manual
for a list of valid EMT mnemonics.

2-114

DCl Commands

I[NO]FMS
Indicates whether the FMS software is to be loaded upon system
reboot. After issuing the SET SYSTEl\1 command, you must shutdown
the system and restart before FMS is available for use.

IHANGUP={DELAYED I IMMEDIATE}
Specifies when dial-up lines are placed in an on-hook state when
carrier is lost. The default is DELAYED, which means the system
waits approximately five seconds before hanging up a dialup line.
Setting IMMEDIATE means the system hangs up a dialup line as soon
as the carrier is dropped.
IHOLD

Suspends all currently active jobs except the one issuing the command.
ILABEL={ANSI I DOS}
Specifies the tape default label.
I[NO]LAT
Indicates whether the LAT software is to be loaded upon system reboot.
The system must be shut down and restarted after issuing the SET
SYSTEM command before that state of LAT will change.
I[NO]LOG
Used in conjunction with the IEMT_LOGGING qualifier, indicates
whether to display the status of each EMT specified. The default is
fLOG.

I[NO]LOGINS[ =n]
Indicates whether to allow additionallogins and specifies the maximum
number of logged-in users on the system. The minimum abbreviation
for this qualifier is four characters. The default is job maximum.
~O~TOR_N~E=name

Sets the monitor file name that is started the next time the system is
rebooted.
IN~E="installation-name"

Assigns "installation-name" to the system name. The maximum length
is 15 characters.
![NO]PASSWORD_PROMPT[=(type[, ... ])]
Indicates whether to enable password prompting and specifies the types
of users, if any, who must type the system password when logging in.
~ecanbeDIALUPandNETWORK

DCl Commands

2-115

IPOWERFAIL_DELAY=n
Specifies the power fail delay. The valid range for n is 1 to 300.
IPSEUDO_KEYBOARDS=n
Specifies the maximum number of static pseudo-keyboards which will
be available on the system. The minimum value allowed is 1, the
maximum is 127. The parameter change will take effect upon system
reboot. The default is /PSEUDO_KEYBOARDS=4.
!RELEASE
Resumes execution of all suspended (!HOLD) jobs.
I[NO]STATISTICS[=RESET]
Turns the monitor statistics on and off. Note that this qualifier takes
effect immediately, and is not stored between system reboots. The
RESET parameter will reset the statistics counters to O. The system
starts with statistics turned off. Once statistics have been turned on,
the SET SYSTEMINOSTATISTICS command will cause the statistics
to be frozen. The SET SYSTEM/STATISTICS command will unfreeze
them. The default is INOSTATISTICS.
ISWAP_MAX.IMUM=n
Sets the value that will be in effect the next time the system is rebooted. The minimum value is 34K and the maximum is 66K

ITIME_FORMAT={AM_PM I 24_HOURJ
Specifies the system time format.

SET TERMINAL [KB[c]n[:]]
Allows you to specify the characteristics of a terminal.
Privilege required: HWCFG to set the characteristics of terminals of
others or to use the IBUFFER_QUOTA and /PERMANENT qualifiers
Command Qualifiers
I[NO] 132_COLUMNS

Indicates whether to enable the terminal to display single-width characters in an array of 24 lines by 132 columns.

2-116

DCl Commands

I[NO]ADVANCED_VIDEO
Indicates whether the terminal supports the Advanced Video Option
(AVO) package that includes character attributes, added screen memory
and ROM sockets.
I[NOJALT_MODE
If you specify IALT_MODE, the system treats ASCII 027, 125, and, 126
as ESCAPE; otherwise, the system treats only ASCII 027 as ESCAPE.
I[NO]ANSI
Indicates whether the terminal supports ANSI escape sequences.
I[NO]ANSWERBACKIPERMANENT
Indicates whether to enable reception of electronic messages on a given
terminal line. You can use the terminal for normal logins as well.
IANSWERBACK is not valid if terminal is set IAUTOBAUD.
I[NO]AUTOBAUDIPERMANENT
Indicates whether the system automatically monitors the terminal line
to detect and set the terminal baud rates. IAUTOBAUD is not valid if
terminal is sei IANSWERBACK.
I[NO]BREAK
Indicates whether to translate th~ BREAK key as a CtrllC character
(Binary 3) instead of NULL character (Binary 0).
I[NO]BROADCAST
Indicates whether to enable the system broadcast capability for the
terminal.

IBUFFER_QUOTA=n
Specifies the number of input characters the system buffers before
instructing the terminal to stop transmitting. The valid range for n
is 168 to 7140, rounded to the nearest multiple of 28. The default is
IBUFFER_QUOTA=168.
![NO]CONTROL[=(option[, ... ])]
Indicates how the terminal handles Control key combinations. Options
can be:
R

Indicates whether to enable the CtrllR retype facility

Indicates whether to enable the Ctrl/T job status display facility

Indicates whether to enable CtrllC trapping

Indicates whether to enable the Ctr1JX clear type-ahead facility

DCl Commands 2-117

I[NO]CRFILL[=n]
Indicates whether to enable carriage return filling and specifies the fill
factor. The valid range for n is 0 to 6.
I[NO]DELIMITER[ =c]
Specifies a private delimiter or removes a previously specified delimiter.
The delimiter (c) can be:
A quoted character

The character is the delimiter

1 to 127

The character whose binary value is the
specified number is the delimiter

IDEVICE_TYPE=terminal-type
Associates the default characteristics with the specified terminal type.
I[NO]DIALUPIPERMANENT
Indicates whether to enable modem control for the specified terminal.
I[NO]EIGHT_BIT
Indicates whether to allow support of 8-bit characters.
I[NO]ESCAPE_SEQUENCE
If you specify /ESCAPE_SEQUENCE, the system treats an ESC character as an indication of an incoming escape sequence; otherwise, the
system treats an ESC character as a line terminator.
I[NO]FORM_FEED
Indicates whether to enable hardware form feed and vertical tab
control.
!HARDCOPY
Specifies that the terminal is not a CRT display.
I[NO]HOST_SYNC

Indicates whether the terminal has special hardware that allows the
host computer to send XON and XOFF characters. /HOSTSYNC is not
valid if the terminal is set IRESUME=ANY.
!INQUIRE
Interrogates the terminal by sending an ANSI ESCAPE identifying
sequence, determines the terminal type, and sets the appropriate
terminal characteristics.

2-118

DCl Commands

I[NO]INSERT
I[NO]OVERSTRIKE
Allows you to insert characters (INSERT MODE) when editing a
command line or type over the current character (OVERSTRIKE
MODE). This mode becomes the default whenever a new command is
entered. The default is IOVERSTRIKE.

I[NO]INTERACTIVEfPERMANENT
Indicates whether the terminal is to be used interactively. If you specify
INOINTERACTIVE, the system ignores all input from the terminal but
the terminal still displays system output.
I[NO]KATAKANA
Indicates whether the terminal supports the Katakana character set.
I[NO]LINE_EDITING
Indicates whether to enable line editing capabilities on the terminal.
This qualifier is valid only at the application level; it is ignored at the
DCL level or at other run-time systems levels.
I[NO]LOADABLE_CHARACTERS
Indicates whether the terminal supports dynamically redefinable
character sets.
I[NO]LOCAL_ECHO
Indicates whether to disable echoing of characters received from the
terminal.

ILOWERCASE[ =INPUT, OUTPUT]
Enables use of lowercase character for terminal INPUT and/or
OUTPUT.
I[NO]OPERATOR_SERVICES[ =(keyword[, ... ])]
Indicates whether to enable the terminal as an operator services
console. The keyword argu...ment specifies the type of requests that
will be broadcast to the specified terminal. Valid keywords are ALL,
[NO]MESSAGES, [NO]REQUESTS, and NONE. INOOPERATOR_
SERVICES is a synonym for IOPERATOR_SERVICES=NONE. This
qualifier requires the OPER privilege.

I[NO]PARITY[ =option]
Indicates whether to enable parity bit checking and specify if parity
checking is ODD or EVEN.

DCl Commands

2-119

I[NO]PERMANENT
Indicates whether to modify the terminal's permanent characteristics
instead of the terminal's current characteristics.
/[NO]PRINTER_PORT
Indicates whether the terminal has a printer port.
I[NO]RECALL
Indicates whether to enable command recall capabilities on the terminal. This qualifier is valid only at the application level; it is ignored at
the DCL level or in other run-time systems.
/[NO]REGIS
Indicates whether the terminal supports the Remote Graphic
Instruction Set (ReGIS).
IRESET
Resets the terminal characteristics to its permanent characteristics.
I[NO]RESTRICTIPERMANENT
Indicates whether to restrict terminal access to only those users having
DEVICE privilege instead of allowing access by all users.
IRESUME={ANY I CONTROL_C}
Defines the XONIXOFF processing. The ANY argument enables typeout and echo when any character is typed after XOFF. IRESUME=ANY
is not valid when the terminal is set /HOST_SYNC. The argument
CONTROL_C enables typeout and echo only when XON or Ctrl/C are
typed after XOFF.
ISCOPE

Specifies the terminal is a CRT display.
/[NO]SELECT_ERASE
Indicates whether the terminal supports the selectively erasable
character attribute.
ISETUP=filespec
Specifies a file used to initialize the terminal.
/[NO]SIXEL
Indicates whether the terminal supports Sixel Graphics.

2-120

Del Commands

ISPEED=(input[,output])
ISPEED=n

Specifies the speed at wr.d.ch the terminal sends (output) and receives
(input) data. If you use the ISPEED=n form, n specifies both the input
and output values.
I[NO]TAB

Indicates whether to enable hardware tab control.
![NO]TTSYNC
Indicates whether to inform the host computer to ignore XON and
XOFF characters sent by the terminal.
ITYPE=n
Specifies the terminal's type code. The valid range for n is 0 to 255,
with 0 to 128 reserved for DIGITAL's use.
![NO]UP_ARROW
Indicates whether to inform the system to echo a control and graphic
character combination as the circumflex (J\) character (value 94)
followed by the proper graphic instead of the control and graphic
character combination as is.
IUPPERCASE[ =INPUT,0 UTPUT]
Disables use of lowercase character for terminal INPUT and/or
OUTPUT.
![NO]USER_DEFINED_KEYS
Indicates whether the terminal supports user-defined keys.
IWIDTH=n
Specifies the terminal print line width. The valid range for n is 1 to
254.

SET TIME [date:]time
Sets the system time. You can specify any valid DCL relative or
absolute date/time string. For additional information on entering dates
and times, see the section, "Rules for Entering DCL Commands."
Privilege required: DATES

DCl Commands

2-121

SET VERIFY
Infonns DCL to display lines in a command procedure as it executes
them. See also SET NOVERIFY.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
I[NO]DEBUG
Indicates whether to enable command debugging. The default is
/NODEBUG.

SHOW ACCOUNT [dev:[p,pn]]
Displays infonnation about one or more accounts.
Privilege required: GACNT or WACNT to display data for accounts
other than your own or to reset the accounting data

Command Qualifiers
fACCOUNTING_DATA
Displays the PPN, account name, allocation, kilo-core-ticks, CPU-time,
connect time, and device usage time.
fALL
Displays information about all accounts on the disk. If you specify an
account and this qualifier, the command displays information about the
specified account only.
!BRIEF
Displays the PPN, account name, allocation, account attribute flags,
last login time, and expiration date. The default is !BRIEF.
/FULL
Displays complete infonnation about the account including the User
File Directory (UFD) Size and UFD Used fields. The default is !BRIEF.
f[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the infonnation to the specified file. If you specify /NOOUTPUT,
the infonnation is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output dispiays on the tenninal.

2-122

DCL Commands

I[NO]RESET
Resets the accounting data after displaying the account information.
The default is /l~ORESET.

I[NO]USER
Indicates whether to include only those accounts that have login
attributes instead of those accounts that do not have login attributes.
The default is all accounts.

SHOW BUFFERS
Displays information about buffer usage on your system.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW CACHE
Displays the current cache settings.
Privilege required: none

SHOW COMMAND/SYSTEM [command-name]
Displays information about a Concise Command Language (CCL) or
systemwide command.
Privilege required: INSTAL

DCl Commands

2-123

Command Qualifier
IALL
Displays information about all systemwide commands.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify !NOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW COUNTERS/LAT [server-name]
Displays information about counters that is relevant to managing
LAT on the host node. There are three types of counter information:
LAT host node counters, Terminal Server counters, and Ethernet
portal counters. These are displayed using the !NODE, ITERMINAL_
SERVER, or /DEVICE qualifiers. Only one of these qualifiers may
appear on the command line.
Privilege required: SWCTL to use the IZERO qualifier.

Command Qualifiers
/DEVICE
Displays information about counters for all Ethernet portals open for
LAT service.
!NODE
Displays information about counters for the LAT host node. /NODE is
the default if neither /DEVICE nor trERMINAL_SERVER is specified.

I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify !NOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.
!TERMINAL_SERVER
Displays information for counters for the terminal server(s) known to
the LAT host node. If a server name parameter is specified, only the
counters for that server are displayed. If no parameter is specified,
then counters for all servers known to the LAT host node are displayed.

2-124

DCl Commands

IZERO
Zeroes the counters after they are displayed. This qualifier acts only on
the COlliJ.ters that are being displayed.

SHOW DATE
Displays the current date and time. You can use the OPENILOG_FILE
command to create a log file to save the output.
Privilege required: none

SHOW DAYTIME
Displays the current date and time. You can use the OPENiLOG_FiLE
command to create a log file to save the output.
Privilege required: none

SHO'vV DEVICE [dev[:]]
Displays information about one or more devices.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
fALL
Displays information about all devices on the system.
fALLOCATED
Displays information about all devices that are currently open or
allocated.
f[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

Del Commands 2-125

SHOW DEVICE/ALLOCATED
Displays information about devices currently opened or allocated by
jobs on the system.
Privilege required: none

SHOW DISKS
Displays the status of disks currently mounted or open on your system.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
![NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW ENTRY [entry-spec I entry-number]
Displays information about one or more print or batch entries.
Privilege required: WREAD for entries you do not own

Command Qualifiers

fALL
Displays the status of all entries. This is equivalent to an entry-spec of
*:[*,*]*.
/BATCH
Displays the status of batch queue entries only.

2-126

DCl Commands

!BRIEF
Displays with column headings the position, type, number, queue name,
owner account number, entry name, entry form name, and status using
a one-entry-per-line format. The default is /BRIEF.
/BY_JOB_STATUS[ =(keyword[, ... ])]
Displays all of the entries in PRINT or BATCH queues with the
specified status that are currently being processed or waiting to be
processed. /BY_JOB_STATUS is supported for VMS compatibility and
is a synonym for ISTATUS. Keyword represents the status of entries to
be displayed; keyword can be:
Displays entries with the status AFTER; indicates they
are waiting for their specified after date-time to elapse.
HOLDING

Displays entries with the status HOLD; indicates they
cannot start until they are taken on HOLD status via
the SET ENTRYIRELEASE command.

PENDING

Displays entries with the status READY; indicates
they are waiting for a print or batch server to become
available for processing.

EXECUTING

Displays entries with the status STARTED; indicates
they are currently being processed by a print or batch
server.

!FILES
Displays all filespecs and their qualifiers for the entry.

/FULL
Displays the position, type, number, queue name, owner account
number, entry name, and status, priority, date/time of submission,
date/time of modification, date/time entry started, the after date/time,
the server name, and whether or not the PRINT or SUBMIT command
included the !NOTIFY qualifier. The default is /BRIEF.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

/PRINT
Displays the status of print queue entries only.

DCl Commands

2-127

ISTATUS[ =(keyword[, ... ])]

Displays all of the entries in PRINT or BATCH queues with the
specified status that are currently being processed or waiting to be
processed. Keyword represents the status of entries to be displayed;
keyword can be:
AFI'ER

Indicates entries that are waiting for their specified after
date-time to elapse.

ABORTING

Indicates entries that have started but are being terminated.
Indicates print entries that are waiting for their required
form to be installed on an assigned print server.

HOLD

Indicates entries that are on hold until the SET
ENTRYIRELEASE command is issued.

READY

Indicates entries that are waiting for a print or batch
server to become available for processing.

STARTED

Indicates entries that are currently being processed by a
print or batch server.

SHOW FILES/OPEN [disk-name[:]]
Displays the status of files open on the system or the specified disk.
Privilege required: WREAD

Command Qualifiers
IJOB[=n]

Displays the job numbers of the jobs that have open files. Specifying a
job number limits the display to files opened by that job.
![NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW FILE/SYSTEM
Displays information about one or more system files.
Privilege required: none
2-128

DCl Commands

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Displays information about all system files.
!ERROR_FILE
Displays information about the system error file.
!NETWORK_FILE
Displays information about the network database file.

I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.
fOVERLAY_FILE
Displays information about the overlay file.
fSWAP_FILE [=n]
Displays information about the specified swap file. The value of n can
be 0, 1, or 3. The default is all swap files.

SHOW JOB [job-number]
Displays information about the status of jobs on the system.
Privilege required: TUNE to display a job's priority and run burst

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Displays status of all jobs.
fATTACHED
Displays status of attached jobs only.
!DETACHED
Displays status of detached jobs only.

DCl Commands

2-129

tTERMINAL=KB[c]n[:]
Displays the status of the job attached to the specified keyboard.

SHOW JOB/PRIVILEGE [job-number]
Displays the set of current privileges for your job or another job.
Privilege required:
•
•

None to display privileges for a job you own
JOBCTL to display privileges for a job not your own

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]

Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW LIBRARY
Displays the status of resident libraries currently installed on your
system.
Privilege required: none

SHOW LOGICALS [logical-name]
Displays all the currently assigned systemwide and user-defined logical
names. You can include wildcards when specifying a logical name.
Privilege required: none

2-130

Del Commands

Command Qualifier

fALL
Displays information about all systemwide and user-defined logical
names. fALL is the default.
f[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.
fSYSTEM
Displays all systemwide logical nameS.
/uSER
Displays your currently assigned logical names.

SHOW MEMORY
Displays the current memory configuration of your system.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifier

![NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW NETWORK
Displays the systems you can connect to over the network. If the
network is operational, RSTSIE displays the names of the nodes that
your system can access. You can use the OPENILOG_FILE command
create a log file to save the output.
Privilege required: none

DCl Commands

2-131

SHOW NODE/LAT
Displays information about the current LAT host node characteristics.
The information displayed includes the LAT version number, the node
name and identification, the multicast timer, the groups to which the
LAT host node is associated, and the Ethernet line(s) on which LAT is
enabled.
Privilege required: none

SHOW OPERATOR_SERVICES
Displays the current status of the Operator/Message Services (OMS)
package (the current version, the types of requests being stored in the
work file, and the status of all operator services consoles currently
defined on the system).
Privilege required: none
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW PORT [port-name]
Displays the characteristics of LAT ports on the RSTSIE node. The
default is to display both interactive and application ports. The system
displays the local port name, the port type (interactive or application),
the queued setting, the terminal server name, the remote service (if
specified), the remote port (if specified), and the connection status.
If the port is not assigned to a terminal server, only the local port name
and type are displayed.
2-132

DCL Commands

If the port is assigned, but not. yet connected, thp terminal server, the
remote service, and the remote port are displayed.
If the port is waiting to connect, the connection status "In Progress"
is displayed; if the connection is queued, the queue position is also
displayed.
If the port is connected, the terminal server, the remote service, the
remote port, and the job number are displayed.
If the port is allocated, the current queued setting is displayed.
Otherwise, the default setting, either queued or noqueued, is displayed.
An asterisk (*) is displayed after the local port name if it is a dial-up
line.

The port-name parameter specifies the name of the port for which the
characteristics are displayed. The port-name must be in the form of
KBI n: or KBn:, where n is a value from 0 to 127. If no port name is
specified, then the characteristics for all LAT ports will be displayed.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers

fALL
Generates a display of all LAT ports, both application and interactive.
fALL is the default.
f[NO]APPLICATION
Generates a display of all LAT application ports. This qualifier is
ignored if a port name is specified. If you specify ;NOAPPLICATION,
then only interactive ports are displayed.
f[NO] INTE RACTIVE

Generates a display of all LAT interactive ports. This qualifier is
ignored if a port name is specified. If you specify;NOAPPLICATION,
then only application ports are displayed.
ILAT
Indicates that LAT ports are to be displayed. ILAT is the default.

![NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Controls where the output of the command is sent. If the qualifier
is not specified, or fOUTPUT is used without a file specification, the
output is sent to the user's terminal.

Del Commands

2-133

If you specify INOOUTPUT, then the output is suppressed.

SHOW PRINTER [dev[:]]
Displays the characteristics of an LP-type printer.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
fALL
Displays the characteristics of all LP-type printers on the system.

SHOW QUEUE [queue-name[:]]
Displays the status and attributes of one or more print or batch queues.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Displays the status of all queues.

!BATCH
Displays the status of batch queues only.
!BRIEF
Displays the queue name, type, and status only. The default is !BRIEF.

/FULL
Displays the queue name, privileges, type, status, the default forms
name for print queues, the default and maximum priorities, the default
and maximum page limits for print queues, the default and maximum
CPU limits for batch queues, the default and maximum time limits for
batch queues, and the assigned queue servers. The default is !BRIEF.

2-134

DCl Commands

f[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.
!PRINT
Displays the status of print queues only.

SHOW RECEIVERS
Displays the status of declared message receivers on your system.
Privilege required: none

SHOW REQUESTS
Displays messages, requests, and replies to requests stored in the
Operator/Message Services (OMS) work file.
Privilege required: OPER

Command Qualifier
fALL
Displays both messages and requests. This qualifier conflicts with
the ![NO]REPLY qualifier. If both qualifiers are specified on the same
command line, only the rightmost qualifier is used.
IBEFORE=date-time
Displays messages or requests or both made before the specified date
and time. Either an absolute or relative date and time can be specified.
If no date is specified, then TODAY is used. If no time is specified, then
12:00AM is used.

DCl Commands

2-135

!BRIEF
When displaying requests made with the /REPLY qualifier, only requests will be displayed. This qualifier conflicts with the !FULL
qualifier. If both qualifiers are specified on the same command line,
the rightmost qualifier is used.
I[NO]EXACT
Controls whether the text specified with the frEXT qualifier matches
the text of a request exactly or treats uppercase and lowercase letters
as equivalents. By default, case differences in letters are ignored.
!FACILITY=(facility-list)
Displays messages or requests or both made from the specified facilities. Up to eight facilities can be specified. Parentheses are not
required when only one facility is specified.
The NO prefix can be used to display messages or requests or both from
facilities other than those specified. For example, !FACILITY=(LOGIN,
LOGOUT) displays only messages from the LOGIN and LOGOUT
programs. !FACILITY=(NOPBS,NOOMS) displays all messages or
requests or both from facilities other than PBS and OMS. If you use
the NO prefix with one facility name, you must specify it on all the
facility names in the list.
!FULL
Indicates that replies to requests are displayed. This qualifier conflicts
with the !BRIEF qualifier. If both qualifiers are specified on the same
command line, the rightmost qualifier is used.
IINPUT=filespec
Selects an alternate input file (or files) to be examined. Can be used to
display requests from a previous OMS log file. Wildcards are allowed
for the file name and extension fields. You must have read access to the
file specified.
If this qualifier is not specified, requests are displayed from the current
OMS log file, OMS$:REQLOG.OMS.
IJOB=job-number
Displays messages or requests made by the specified job-number.
![NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.
2-136

DCl Commands

I[NO]REPLY
Indicates whether messages or requests are displayed. /NOREPLY is
used to display messages. Tne default is fALL.
/SINCE=date-time
Displays messages or requests or both made since the specified date
and time. Either an absolute or relative date and time can be specified.
If no date is specified, then TODAY is used. If no time is specified, then
11:59PM is used.
ITERMINAL=KB[c]n[:]
Displays messages or requests or both made from the specified terminal. The keyword DETACHED can be specified in place of the device
name to select requests made by detached jobs.
ITEXT=["]string["]
Displays messages or requests or both containing the specified string.
Enclose strings containing lowercase letters or nonalphanumeric characters (including spaces) in quotation marks. You can use the !EXACT
qualifier to alter the way that the text string is matched against the
text of a message or request.
IUSER=[p,pn]
Displays messages or requests made by the specified user.

SHOW RUNTIME_SYSTEM
Displays the status of currently installed run-time systems.
Privilege required: none

DCl Commands

2-137

SHOW SERVER [server-name[:]]
Displays the status and attributes of one or more print or batch servers.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Displays the status of all servers.
!BATCH
Displays the status of batch servers only.
!BRIEF
Displays the server name, type, and status only. The default is !BRIEF.
!FULL

Displays the server name, type, status, current entry, and assigned
queues. The default is !BRIEF.
![NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.
!PRINT
Displays the status for print servers only.

SHOW SERVICES/LAT [service-name]
Displays information about the service(s) offered by the LAT host
node. If a service name is specified, only that service will be displayed.
Otherwise, all services offered by the LAT host will be displayed.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
f[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

2-138

DCl Commands

SHOW SESSIONS [server-name]
Displays infonnation about the sessions currently running LAT on the
host node. The server name is optional and, if omitted, infonnation is
displayed about all servers known to RSTS. The infonnation includes
the RSTS keyboard number of the terminal on which the user is logged
in, the tenninal server on which the user is physically connected, and
the name of the service the user is currently running. An asterisk (*)
appears after the keyboard number if the session was started from a
dialup LAT line.

Command Qualifiers

IDEVICE=Ethernet-device:
Restricts the search to those users who are currently running LAT on
the particular Ethernet device specified.
fLAT
Indicates that LAT sessions are to be displayed. fLAT is the default.
I[NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOlJTPUT,
the infonnation is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW SYMBOL [symbol-name]
Displays the value of one or more DCL local or global symbols. You
can use the OPENfLOG_FILE command to create a log file to save the
output.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Displays the value of all symbols in the specified symbol table.
fGLOBAL
Displays the value of the specified global symbol.
fLO CAL
Displays the value of the specified local symbol.
DCl Commands

2-139

SHOW SYSTEM
Displays the specified system default characteristics.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifiers
IEMT_LOGGING
Displays the status of each EMT specified.
f[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW TERMINAL [KB[c]n[:]]
Displays the characteristics of your terminal or another terminal.
Privilege required:
•
•

None to display the characteristics of your own terminal
HWCFG to display the characteristics of terminals other than your
own

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Displays the characteristics of all terminals on the system.
!BRIEF
Displays a subset of the terminal characteristics. The default is
!BRIEF.
/FULL
Displays the full set of terminal characteristics. The default is !BRIEF.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

2-140

DCl Commands

f[NO]PERMANENT
Indicates whether to display the pennanent terminal characteristics instead of the current terminal characteristics. The default is
INOPERMANENT.

SHOW TERMINAL_SERVERS/LAT [server-name]
Displays infonnation about the tenninal server(s) known to the LAT
host node. The server name is optional and, if omitted, information is
displayed about all servers known to RSTS.

Command Qualifier
I[NO]OUTPUT[=filespec]
Writes the information to the specified file. If you specify /t~OOU'l'.PlJT,
the information is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the terminal.

SHOW TIME
Displays the current date and time. You can use the OPENILOG_FILE
command to create a log file to save the output.
Privilege required: none

SHOW USER [[p,pn]]
Displays the status of one or more users on the system.
Privilege required: TUNE to display information about a user's priority
and run burst attributes

Command Qualifiers
fALL
Displays the status for all users.
fATTACHED
Displays the status for all attached jobs.

DCl Commands

2-141

!DETACHED
Displays the status for all detached jobs.
I[NO]OUTPUT[ =filespec]
Writes the infonnation to the specified file. If you specify INOOUTPUT,
the infonnation is suppressed and not displayed. If the optional filespec
argument is omitted, the output displays on the tenninal.

ITERMINAL=KB[c]n[:]
Displays the status of the job attached to the specified keyboard.

SORT input-filespec[, ... ] output-filespec
Invokes the PDP-11 SORT Utility to reorder the records in one or more
input files into a single output file.
Privilege required: none
Command Qualifiers

ICOLLATING_SEQUENCE={ASCII I EBCDIC I MULTINATIONAL}
Specifies the collating sequence. The default is ICOLLATING_
SEQUENCE=ASCII.
I[NO]DUPLICATES
Indicates whether to allow duplicate record keys. The default is
!DUPLICATES.
IKEY=(field[, ... ])
Specifies one or more sort keys.
IPROCESS={ADDRESS I INDEX I RECORD I TAG}
Specifies the sort type. The default is IPROCESS=RECORD.
ISPECIFICATION[ =filespec]
Specifies the name of a SORT specification file containing SORT command qualifiers and other instructions.
![NO]STABLE
Indicates whether to keep records having equal keys in their original
order.
I[NO]STATISTICS
Indicates whether to display a statistical summary" after the SORT
operation completes. The default is tNOSTATISTICS.
2-142

DCl Commands

fWORK_FILES=([NlJMBER=n][,DEVICE=dev[:[ppn]J]
[,ALLOCATION=m][,[NO]CONTIGUOUS][,SIZE=s])
Specifies the nwnber oi temporary work files you want to use during
the sort process, an alternate device and directory where you want to
assign the files and options to optimize the files. The valid values for n
are 0 and 3 to 10. The valid range for m is 1 to 4294967295. The valid
range for s is 1 to 255.
Input File Qualifiers

IFORMAT=(record-format[, ... ])
Specifies the record format of the input or output file to override the
existing data that SORT normally obtains through RMS-1l.
/INDEXED_SEQUENTIAL[ =n]
Specifies that the organization of the input or output file is indexedsequential and the nwnber of keys used.
I[NO]SHAREABLE
Indicates whether the input file can be opened in a write-shareable
mode.

ITREE_SPACE=n
Specifies the percentage of the work area for use by the SORT tree data
structure. The valid range for n is 1 to 100. The default is
TREE_SPACE=55.
Output File Qualifiers

IALLOCATION=n
Specifies the number of 512-byte blocks allocated for the output file.
The valid range for n is 1 to 4294967295.

/BUCKET_SIZE=n
Specifies the number of 512-byte blocks per bucket for the output file.
The valid range for n is 1 to 15. The default is /BUCKET_SIZE=l.
I[NO]CONTIGUOUS
Indicates that the output file disk space allocation is contiguous. The
default is INOCONTIGUOUS.
IFORMAT=(record-format[, ... ])
Specifies the record format of the input or output file to override the
existing data that SORT normally obtains through RMS-1l.

DCl Commands 2-143

IINDEXED_SEQUENTIAL[ =n]
Specifies that the organization of the input or output file is indexedsequential and the number of keys used.
/LOAD_FILL
Loads the buckets according to the fill size established when the disk
file was created.
I[NO]OVERLAY
Indicates whether to overlay the existing file with the sorted records of
the input file. The default is INOOVERLAY.
!RELATIVE
Specifies that the organization of the output file is relative.
ISEQUENTIAL
Specifies that the organization of the output file is sequential.

START/LAT Ethernet-device:
Starts up LAT on the specified Ethernet device. Note that Ethernet
devices can only be XHO: or XEO: (UNAlLUA-O or QNAlLQA-O). It is
required that a SET NODEILAT command be executed prior to issuing
the first STARTILAT command.
Privilege required: SWCTL

Command Qualifiers
I[NO]LOG

Indicates whether to display a confirmation message indicating that
LAT has started up. The default is /LOG.

START/OPERATOR_SERVICES
Starts the Operator/Message Services (OMS) package. Include this
command in the system start command file (START.COM) to make
operator services available during timesharing.
Privilege required: SWCTL and OPER

2-144

DCl Commands

Command Qualifier

![NO]KEEP=(key\vord[, ... ])
Specifies the type of requests that will be kept in the operator services
work file. Valid keywords are ALL, [NO]MESSAGES, [NO]REQUESTS,
and NONE. The INOKEEP qualifier is a synonym for IKEEP=NONE.
IPRIORITY=n
Specifies the priority of the operator services job. By default, OMS is
started at priority -8, the default system priority. You can specify any
priority value in the range -120 to +120. If necessary, OMS will round
the value to the next lower multiple of 8.
IRUN_BURST=n
Specifies the run burst of the operator services job. By deiault, OMS
is started with a rlLll burst of 6; the defanlt syst-em run burst. You can
specify any run burst value in the range 1 to 127.

START/QUEUE queue-name[:]
Restarts a queue that has been stopped.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

START/QUEUE/MANAGER
Starts the PrintlBatch Services (PBS) facility.
Privilege required: PBSCTL
Command Qualifiers

/PRIORITY=n
Specifies the priority of the PBS primary and secondary jobs. The valid
range for n is -120 to +120, which is rounded down to a multiple of 8.
The default is !PRIORITY=-8.
IRUN_BURST=n
Specifies the run burst of the PBS primary and secondary jobs. The
valid range for n is 1 to 127. The default is IRUN_BURST=6.

Del Commands 2-145

START/SERVER server-name[:]
Starts a server that was stopped using the STOP/SERVER command.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

Command Qualifiers
IBACKSPACE[ =n]
Restarts the current print job n pages back in the current file copy. If
you do not specify n, printing resumes one page back in the current file
copy.
IFORWARDSPACE[ =n]
Restarts the current print job n pages forward in the current file copy.
If you do not specify n, the default is that printing resumes one page
forward in the current file copy.
/NEXT_JOB
Resumes printing or batch processing at the beginning of the next job,
thus terminating the current job.
IPAGE=n
Restarts the current print job at page n in the current file copy.
!RESTART
Restarts the current print job at the beginning of the current job copy.
/TOP_OF_FILE
Starts the current print job at the beginning of the current file copy.

STOP
Ends a command procedure and immediately returns control to the
interactive command level.
Privilege required: none

2-146

DCl Commands

STOP/LAT [Ethernet-device:]
Disables LAT service on a particular Ethernet device or on all Ethernet
devices. If no Ethernet-device parameter is specified, LAT is disabled
on all Ethernet devices. All jobs running on an Ethernet device that is
to be disabled will detach.
Command Qualifier

I[NO]LOG

Indicates whether to display a confinnation message indicating that
LAT has stopped. The default is fLOG.

STOPiOPERATOR_SERViCES
Manually shuts down the Operator/Message Services (OMS) package in
an orderly manner, either immediately or after all currently pending
requests have been completed.
Privilege required: SWCTL and OPER
Command Qualifier

![NO]ABORT
Indicates whether to abort any requests that are currently pending, or
allow them to complete before shutting down the package. /NOABORT
is the default.

STOP/QUEUE queue-name[:]
Stops a queue to prevent PrintIBatch Services (PBS) from processing
any pending requests.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

DCl Commands

2-147

STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER
Shuts down the PrintlBatch Services (PBS) facility. If you specify
IABORT, RSTSIE shuts down PBS immediately; otherwise, PBS processes all currently active jobs and then shuts down.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

Command Qualifier
I[NOJABORT
Indicates whether to immediately terminate queue processing, thus
aborting all currently active jobs. The default is INOABORT.

STOP/SERVER server-name[:]
Stops a print or batch server, preventing the processing of any new
requests.
Privilege required: PBSCTL

Command Qualifiers
!FILE_END
Stops the print server after printing the current file copy.
IJOB_END
Stops the batch or print server after finishing the current batch or
print job.

!PAGE_END
Stops the print server after printing the current page.

SUBMIT filespec[, ... ] [entry-spec]
Enters a request for batch processing of one or more DCL command
procedures and places the request on a batch queue.
Privilege required:
•
•

2-148

Read access to the command files you are submitting
Write access to use the /DELETE qualifier

DCl Commands

•
•

GACNT to specify anot.her owner in your group
WACNT to specify another owner not in your group

Command Qualifiers
IAFTER=date:time
Specifies a date:time value after which the entry is eligible for batch
processing.
ICPU_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum CPU time, in minutes, allowed for the batch
job. The valid range for n is 1 to 65535, in addition to UNLIMITED,
!HOLD
Places the entry in a "hold" state. To process the entry, you must
release the entry using the SET ENTRYIRELE.A~E command.
![NO]LOG_DELETE
Indicates whether to delete the log file after printing. The default is
/NOLOG_DELETE.
![NO]LOG_FILE[=filespec]
Indicates whether to create and specify a log :file for the batch job. The
default is /LOG_FILE.
![NO]LOG_QUEUE[ =queue-name]
Indicates whether to queue the log file for printing when batch processing is completed and specifies the log file name. The default is
INOLOG_QUEUE.
INAME=entry-name
Assigns a name to the entry.
I[NO]NOTIFY
Indicates whether to notify your terminal session of events that occur
related to your batch entry. The default is INONOTIFY.

/OWNER=[p,pn]
Specifies the owner of the request.
IPARAMETERS=(parameter[, ... ])
Specifies from 1 to 8 optional parameters you want to pass to the job.

DCl Commands

2-149

!PRIORITY=n
Specifies the priority you want to assign to the request. The valid
range for n is 1 to 255. You cannot specify a value for n that is higher
than the maximum priority assigned to the queue.
IQUEUE=queue-name
Specifies the name of the queue that you want to process the entry.
ITIME_LIMIT=n
Specifies the maximum elapsed time, in minutes, you want to allow for
the requested batch job. The valid range for n is 1 to 65535, in addition
to UNLIMITED.

File Qualifier
I[NO]DELETE
Indicates whether to delete the command file after processing is completed. The default is INODELETE.

TYPE [node::]filespec[, ...]
Displays the contents of a text file on your terminal.
Privilege required: Read access to the file you are displaying

Command Qualifiers
IBEFORE=date
ICREATED
/MODIFIED
ISINCE=date
Displays the files created or modified before or since the specified date.
![NO]CONFIRM
Indicates whether to prompt before displaying each file and is a synonym for I[NO]QUERY.
![NO]LOG~

Indicates whether to display a confirmation message on your terminal
for each file displayed. The default is INOLOG.
![NO]QUERY ~
indicates whether to prornpt before displaying each file and is a synonym for I[NO]CONFIRM.
2-150

DCL Commands

=SIZE=n

/SELECT

f =S~Z~=~~N!Ml!M=n

UM=n
J
=SIZE=(MINIMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n)
l
Selects files based on their size. The specified size can be:
=SlZ~=MAXIM

Selects only those files with size equal to n.

MINlMUM=n

Selects only those files with size greater
than or equal to n.

MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size less than
or equai to n.

MINlMUM=m,MAXIMUM=n

Selects only those files with size between m
and n inclusive.

UNLOAD/INDEX [dev[:]]
Unloads a disk's SAT (Storage Allocation Table) from memory.
If you do not specify a device name, the default is the system disk
(SYO:).

Privilege required: SWCTL

UNLOAD/LIBRARY library-name
Unloads a resident library from memory.
Privilege required: INSTAL

UNLOAD/OVERLAY overlay-name[, ...]
Unloads one or more monitor overlays from memory. See
LOAD/OVERLAY for a list of valid overlay names.
Privilege required: SWCFG

Command Qualifier
/ALL
Unloads all overlay monitors.

DCL Commands

2-151

UNLOAD/RUNTIME_SYSTEM name
Unloads a run-time system from memory.
Privilege required: INSTAL

WAIT [delta-time]
Places the current job in a wait state until a specified period of time
has elapsed. The WAIT command is useful in DCL command files that
wish to suspend execution for some period of time.
The optional parameter delta-time specifies hours, minutes, and seconds using the format: hh:mm:ss. If not specified, the delta-time
00:00:00 is used.
The maximum value that can be specified for each field is: 23 for hours,
59 for minutes, and 59 for seconds. Specify 60 minutes as 01:00:00 (one
hour).
Fields of the delta-time may be omitted but the delta-time must not
begin with a colon even if the number of hours is zero.
Privilege required: none

WRITE channel-number data[, ... ]
Writes records to a file you open for writing or appending using the
OPEN command.
Privilege required: none

Command Qualifier
![NO]DELIMITER
Specifies what type of string delimiter WRITE uses. By default, WRITE
places CR LF characters at the end of the data it writes. When you
specify INODELIMITER, WRITE writes the data as a single string or
places a specified delimiter at the end of the data.

2-152

DCl Commands

Chapter 3

Del Functions
This chapter provides infonnation on DeL functions. Use DeL functions to manipulate stIings or integers or return infonnation about
a file, a job, or the system. You can use DeL functions in the same
places you use symbols, expressions, or literal values. In command
procedures, DeL functions perfonn operations such as:
•
•
•

Translating logical names
Manipulating strings
Detennining the current processing mode of the procedure

Format of Del Functions
A DeL function has the general fonnat:
F$function-name([arg, ... ])
where:
F$

Indicates a DeL function.

function-name

Is the function DeL evaluates. You can truncate function
names to any unique abbreviation with a minimum of two
characters.

()

Are parentheses that enclose function arguments. You
do not need to include parentheses if the function has no
arguments.

Del Functions 3-1

arg, ...

Specifies one or more function arguments, if any. Function
arguments can consist of symbols, integer expressions,
string expressions, or other DeL functions.

DeL performs automatic symbol substitution on all function arguments. Therefore, when you use a symbol name as a DeL function
argument, you should not enclose the symbol name in apostrophes.

In some cases, one or more arguments are optional. If an argument is
optional, you can exclude it from the argument list. You can also use
commas to indicate which argument you are excluding from the list.
For example, the F$PARSE function has three optional arguments. You
can specify the first argument only, as follows:
F$PARSE(ARG1)

In this example, you do not specify the second and third arguments.
You could also use commas to indicate that you are excluding the
second and third arguments. For example:
F$PARSE(ARG1,,)

To specify the first and second arguments but omit the third, you can
use either format:
F$PARSE(ARG1,ARG2)
F$PARSE(ARG1,ARG2,)

To specify the first and third arguments but omit the second, you must
use commas to separate the arguments. For example:
F$PARSE(ARG1"ARG3)

If a function accepts arguments but you omit all arguments, you can
also omit the parentheses.
Note that in some cases, specifying an argument as a NULL string or
as the integer zero is not the same as excluding the argument from an
argument list.
This section shows the format and briefly describes each of the DeL
functions. See the RSTS / E Guide to Writing Command Procedures for
complete descriptions of the DeL functions.

3-2

DeL Functions

F$ACCESS
access-mode=F$ACCESS

Returns one of BATCH, DIALUP, LOCAL, NETWORK, or SERVER
indicating the current job access mode.

F$ASCII
number = F$ASCII(string)

Converts the first character in a string to its ASCII value.

F$CHR
string = F$CHR(number)

Converts an integer to an ASCII character.

F$CVTIME
string = F$CVTIME([date])

Converts a date-time string to a string suitable for comparisons.

F$EDIT
string = F$EDIT(string,edit-code)

Edits a string. See Table 3-1 for a description of valid edit-codes.

F$ENVIRONMENT
value = F$ENVIRONMENT(keyword)

Returns infonnation regarding the current job environment. See
Table 3-2 for a description of keywords and return values.

Del Functions 3-3

F$INSTR
position

=F$INSTR(position,string,substring)

Returns the location of a substring.

F$INTEGER
number

=F$INTEGER(string)

Converts a string to an integer.

F$JOB
job-number

=F$JOB

Returns the current job number.

F$LEFT
substring

=F$LEFT(string,position)

Extracts a substring from a string, beginning at position 1 and ending
at the position you specify.

F$LENGTH
length

=F$LENGTH(string)

Returns the length of a string.

F$MESSAGE
text

=F$MESSAGE(error-number)

Returns the message text associated with a RSTSIE error number.

3-4

Del Functions

F$MID
string

=F$MID(string,position,length)

Extracts a substring from a string beginning at the position you specify.

F$NODE
node-name

= F$NODE

Retu...-ns the cu...-rent DECnet node name.

F$PARSE
filespec

=F$PARSE([filespec],[default-spec],[field])

Returns a complete RSTSIE file specification or a specified field within
the file specification. See Table 3-3 for a description of valid field
keywords.

F$PRIVILEGE
truth-value

=F$PRIVILEGE(privilege-list)

Returns the status of a job's privileges.

F$RIGHT
substring

=F$RIGHT(string,position)

Extracts a substring from a string, beginning at the position you
specify, and ending at the rightmost position of the string.

F$SEARCH
filespec

=F$SEARCH([filespec])

Searches a disk directory for a file and returns the complete RSTSIE
file specification of the next occurrence of the file.
Del Functions 3-5

F$STRING
string

=F$STRING(number)

Converts an integer to a string.

F$TERMINAL
keyboard_number

=F$TERMINAL

Returns the keyboard number for your job.

F$TIME
date

=F$TIME

Returns the current time and date.

F$TYPE
type

=F$TYPE(expression)

Returns one of STRING, INTEGER, or the NULL STRING indicating
the type of a symbol or expression.

F$USER
ppn

=F$USER

Returns the project-programmer number for your job.

F$VERIFY
old-setting

=F$VERIFY([new-setting])

Enables or disables the verification setting and returns the previous
setting.

3-6

Del Functions

Table 3-1 lists the edit-code values for F$EDIT.
Table 3-1:
Edit-Code

Edit-Code Values for F$EDIT Function
Effect

Discards spaces and tabs.

Discards RET, LF, FF, ESC, DEL, and fill or null characters.

Discards leading spaces and tabs.

Reduces spaces and tabs to one space.

Converts lowercase to uppercase.

Converts square brackets to parentheses. For example,
"[" to "(" and "l" to If)".

128

Discards trailing spaces and tabs.

256

Prevents alteration of characters inside single or double
quotation marks, except parity bit trimming.

Del Functions 3-7

Table 3-2 lists the keywords and return values for F$ENVIRONM:ENT.
Table 3-2:

Keywords and Return Values for F$ENVIRONMENT Function

Keyword

Type

Description

CAPI'IVE

string

Returns "TRUE" if executing in a captive account, or
"FALSE" otherwise.

CONTROL

string

Returns "" if SET NOCONTROL=C is in effect or at the
interactive level, or "C" if SET CONTROL=C is in effect.

DATA

string

Returns current SET DATA status. Possible values are:
Job is at interactive
level
"DATA"

SET DATA is in
effect with end of
data character "$"
SET DATA is in
effect; "x" is the
currently defined
end-of-data character

"NODATA"

SET NODATA is in
effect

DEFAULT

string

Returns the user's account; the account you are logged in
to.

DEPI'H

integer

Returns current command procedure depth level. The
DCL command prompt (interactive) DEPI'H is O. The
command procedure DEPI'H is 1 when a command
procedure is invoked interactively, or 2 within a Batch
job. A nested command procedure has the DEPI'H of 1
greater than the level from which the command procedure
was executed.

ECHO

string

Returns current SET ECHO status. Possible values are:
"ECHO!" "NOECHOIWARNINGS", and
"NOECHOINOWARNINGS".

FREE_CHANNELS

integer

Returns number of free channels available to the user.

INTERACTIVE

string

Returns "TRUE" if the current job's access mode is
INTERACTIVE, or "FALSE" otherwise.

string

Returns currently open log file.

3-8 Del Functions

Table 3-2 (Cont.):

Keywords and Return Values for F$ENVIRONMENT Function

Keyword

Type

Description

Returns the currently defined log file prompt; identical to
the reserved symbol $LOGFILE_PROMPT.
MAX_DEPTH

integer

Returns maximum number of command procedure levels.

NOCONTROL

string

Returns "" if SET CONTROL=C is in effect or at the
interactive level, or "C" if SET CONTROL=C is in effect.
Returns "TRUE" if an ON_CONTROL_C command is
specified, or "FALSE" if at the interactive level or if an
ON_CONTROL_C command is not specified.

string

Returns severity level of the current ON severity THEN
command. Possible values are: "NONE", "ERROR",
"WARNING", "SEVERE_ERROR".

PROCEDURE

string

Returns command procedure currently executing.

PROMPT

string

Returns currently defined DCL prompt string; identical
to the reserved symbol $PROMPT.

PROTECTION

integer

Returns default file protection code.

TIME_STAMP

string

Returns "TRUE" if time stamps are currently enabled for
batch log files, or "FALSE" otherwise.

VERIFY

string

Returns "VERIFY[IDEBUG]" if SET VERIFY is in effect,
or "NOVERIFY" if SET NOVERIFY is in effect.

Table 3-3 lists the valid field keywords for F$PARSE.
Table 3-3:

Field Keywords for F$PARSE Function

Keyword

Meaning

DEVICE

Returns device name string.

PPN

Returns project-programmer number string.

NAME

Returns file name string.

TYPE

Returns file type string.

STATUS

Returns device status word integer.

FLAGS

Returns filespec flag word integer.

Del Functions 3-9

Chapter 4

System Utility Programs
This chapter describes the system programs available on RSTSlE; ihey
are arranged in alphabetical order. See Appendix A for OPSER and
obsolete system utility programs.

COpy
Copies all of the information from one device to another device of the
same type. You can also use COpy to verify that the information on
two like devices is identical. You cannot specify individual files.
Privilege Required

•
•

DEVICE privilege if either or both tape drives is a restricted device
RDNFS privilege for the input disk and WRTNFS privilege for the
output disk

To Run the Program
RUN AUXLIB$:COPY

Format

new device=old device/switches
Usage Notes

You must specify the fast copy switch (!FC) or the no copy switch (INC)
in the command string to copy information from one device to another.

System Utility Programs

4-1

Switches
IBL:n
Specifies block size you can use to speed up copying or to copy magnetic
tapes written with nonstandard record sizes. 1b speed up copying,
specify a larger block size.
IDE:n
Specifies a density setting other than the default when accessing magnetic tape. Currently available densities are 800, 1600, 6250, 6667,
8000, and 10000 bpi. You can also specify MINIMUM and MAXIMUM,
which causes the system to set the density to the minimum or maximum the tape drive supports.

!FC
Specifies fast copy. Copies information from one device to another.
/HE
Prints an online HELP message for the COpy program.

INC
Specifies no copy. You use INC in conjunction with NE to verify that
the information on two devices is identical.
IPA:n
Specifies a parity setting other than the default when accessing magnetic tape where n can be ODD or EVEN.

NE
Verifies whether the information on a device unit has been copied
correctly. You must specify either !FC or INC with this switch.

DIRECT
DIRECT lists information about files from a disk or tape directory.

Privilege Required
•
•

CreatelRename access to any output file you specify
Read access to any file you display from accounts other than your
own

To Run the Program
RUN $DlRECT

4-2

System Utility Programs

Format

#[output=Jinput/switches, input/switches, ...
Usage Notes

Output is optional and can be a device specification or a disk file
specification. If you do not specify output, omit the equal sign (=).
By default, DIRECT displays output on your tenninal. Input can be
any number of disk file specifications. The disk file specification on
input can include a device, file name, file type and project/programmer
number (PPN).
If you do not specify a device, DIRECT uses the public disk structure
and denotes it by the SY: specification.
You can substitute the asterisk (*) character and the question mark (?)
character wildcards in the file name and file type fields. In addition,
you can substitute the * character in the PPN field.
You can substitute the * character for the entire file name, the entire file type, both the file name and file type, and the entire file
specification.
Switches

fAL
Lists the file name, type, and number of blocks of each file.
fAT
fSA
Lists the file name, type, symbolic file attributes, and caching status.
IBK
Lists the directory for the specified device in reverse order.
IBR

IF
Lists the file name, type, and a brief summary message.
fCL
Lists the file name, type, and cluster size.

IDA
Lists the file name, type, and date of creation.

System Utility Programs

4-3

IDI
ILl

IRETI
Lists most important data to include heading, file name, type, size,
protection code, creation date, and an ending summary message.
IDI:S
ILI:S
/S
Lists all relevant data to include heading, file name, type, size, protection code, date of last access, date of creation, time of creation, cluster
size, associated run-time system, file position, symbolic attributes, open
status (if possible to display on the same line), files marked for deletion
(see IMD), and an ending summary message.

/EX or ITY
Lists file name and type.

IFU
Lists heading, file name, type, size, protection code, date of last access,
date of creation, time of creation, cluster size, associated run-time
system, file position, open status, and an ending summary message.
!HD
Displays heading at top of columns in the listing for those listings that
normally do not include a heading. If you specify !HD without another
switch, DIRECT displays an error message.
!HE
Displays the file DIRECT.HLp, which describes the DIRECT program.
/LA
Lists the file name, type, and date of last access or update, depending
on disk initialization.

IMD
Lists all files, and flags those files marked for deletion by appending an
* character after the file name. Tentative files are marked for deletion
until closed.

IN
Lists only those entries that do not match the specified input file
specifica tion.

4-4

System Utility Programs

INA
Lists file name only.

lOA
Lists file names, types, and a series of octal numbers that represent file
attributes.
lOP
Lists file name, type, open status, and access count.
!PO

Lists file names, types, and the position of the files on disk (the device
cluster number of the file's first block).
!PR

Lists file name, type, and file protection code.

IRT
Lists the name of the run-time system that created the file.

lSI
ISZ
Lists file name, type, size (in blocks) of each file.
ISU
Lists summary data only to include number of designated files and
total number of blocks occupied by designated files.

trI
Lists file name, type, and the date and time each file was created.
IW

Lists data across the width of a line rather than one item per line.
File Attributes

File attributes are system attributes or file description data that RMS11 software requires. For instance, both COBOL and BASIC-PLUS-2
use RMS-ll. The User File Directory (UFD) for a given file contains
the file attributes for that file. You can list file attributes symbolically,
using the ISA, IAT, and IS switches and octally, using the lOA switch.
The symbolic file description attribute fields are:
BK
Displays if the file organization is relative or indexed; indicates the
bucket size in block.

System Utility Programs

4-5

CC
Displays the type of carriage control as IMP (implied) or FOR
(FORTRAN).
EX
If you do not use the default, indicates the number of blocks added to
the file each time you increase its size.
FO
Displays type of file organization as SEQ (sequential), REL (relative),
and IDX (indexed).

HS
If you do not use the default, indicates the fixed header size.

NO SPAN
If displayed, indicates that records are not allowed to span block
boundaries.
RECSI
Displays the size, in bytes, of the largest file record.
RF
Displays the maximum record length of the file. The possible fonnats
are UDF (undefined), FIX (fixed), VAR (variable), VFC (variable lfixed
control), and STM (stream).
USED
Displays the number of blocks currently in use, followed by the number
of bytes used in the last block.
The symbolic system attribute fields are:
CACHE
Indicates that the file is cached.
SEQ
Indicates that caching is done using sequential mode.
RND
Indicates that caching is done using random mode.
NO BACKUP
Indicates that the file data is not backed up; only the file attributes are
backed up.

4-6

System Utility Programs

IGNORE
Indicates that the file is completely ignored by BACKUP.

FILCOM
FILCOM (File Compare) lets you compare two ASCII files, line by line,
and identifies differences. When you run the program, specify the files
you want to compare and any switches that direct that comparison.

Privilege Required
e

•

Read access to the files you want to compare
CreatelRename access for any output file you create

To Run the Program
RUN $FILCOM

Usage Notes

Mter FILCOM prompts "OUTPUT TO <KB:>?", type one of the three
responses:
•

The device designator or file specification to which FILCOM writes
the comparison data. Your terminal is the default.
If you respond with a device designator or a RETURN key, FILCOM
displays a series of additional prompts. These prompts request:
The files you want to compare.
When you specify the files to be compared, include the file type.
You can use the wildcard specifications asterisk (*) and question
mark (?) to designate the input files.
The number of successive lines in the files that constitute a
match.
As FILCOM compares lines in a file, it prints the differences
until it finds a series of lines that are identical. The number of
lines that constitute a series are determined by your answer to
this prompt. The default is three lines.
Whether FILCOM should consider BASIC-PLUS continuation
lines as part of a numbered line.

By default, FILCOM treats continuation lines as new lines.

System Utility Programs 4-7

Whether FILCOM should compare blank lines.

•

You can also specify one or more switches in response to
FILCOM's initial prompt. These switches override the prompts
and provide an alternative way to set comparison parameters.
A single command line that contains all the information FILCOM
needs to make the file comparison:
OUTPUT TO <KB:>? output=inputl,input2,1switches
Output can be:
A complete RSTSIE file specification.
A wildcard specification (description in "Wildcards" section).
No specification. If you specify only input, FILCOM displays
output at your terminal.
The equal sign (=) is required only if you specify output. An
equal sign with no output specification causes FILCOM to
output the result of its comparison to a file on the public
structure. FILCOM creates this file in the current account with
a file name taken from the first input file and a .DIF file type.
The input files represent the two files you want FILCOM to
compare. You can describe these files with full file specifications, file names and types, or wildcards.
If you specify the full command line, FILCOM does not display
any other prompt and begins the file comparison. Using the
command lets you specify wildcards (*) and (?) in the file
specifications and one or more switches.

•

A command line that contains an indirect file name. The indirect
command file is an ASCII text file you can create with PIP or an
editor. The file must contain all of the information FILCOM needs
to make the file comparison:
output to <kb:> ? @:filename
In the previous command line above, the file name is an indirect
command file. The indirect command file can contain a single line
command, or it can contain multiple line answers to the FILCOM
prompts. If the command file contains answers to the FILCOM
prompts, each prompt must be answered in the four step sequence.
You cannot nest indirect command files. FILCOM processes an at
sign (@) in.the command file as an assignable account specification.

4-8

System Utility Programs

Wildcards

You can specify FILCOM input files as full RSTS/E file specifications
or as wildcard characters. When you use wildcards, FILCOM bases its
search for files on the first input file specification. FILCOM output files
can contain a wildcard for either the file name or type. You cannot use
wildcards in both fields.
With wildcards, you can cause FILCOM to make multiple file comparisons based on a single command line specification. When you use this
method, FILCOM displays the differences found in each set of files in
the standard manner. Mier it finishes comparing the files, FILCOM
displays a summary of the format:
X DIFFERENCES FOUND IN Y FILES OF Z TOTAL FILES
COMPARED
Where X is the number of differences in all files, Y is the number of
files that contain differences and Z is the number of files compared.
Switches

lAP
Directs FILCOM to open the output file for APPEND. If you omit
this switch, FILCOM deletes any existing output file of the same name
before writing differences. With the lAP switch, you can direct FILCOM
to write differences into an existing output file.
I[NO]BA
Specifies whether FILCOM considers BASIC-PLUS continuation lines
as part of a numbered program line. The default is INOBA.

I[NO]BL
Specifies whether FILCOM considers blank lines in its comparison.
The default is INOBL.
ICO[:m:n]
Converts tabs to the appropriate number of spaces and directs FILCOM
to compare characters starting in column position m and continuing for
n characters. If you include the ICOMPARE switch but do not specify m
or n, FILCOM defaults m to column position 1 and n to 72 characters.

/LI[:n]
Specifies the maximum number of lines that are allowed to differ before
FILCOM stops examining the file. If you include the /LIMIT switch but
do not specify a limit in n, the default is 60 differing lines.
System Utility Programs

4-9

!MA[:n]

Specifies the number of lines in the file that constitute a match. The
default is three.

/SU
Directs FILCOM to list the total number of differences found in the
files without listing individual lines.

FIT
FIT (File Transfer) performs file transfers between devices. With FIT
you can:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Transfer files between RSTSIE-structured devices and RTllstructured devices.
Transfer files from a DOS disk to a RSTSIE device.
List the directory of a RSTSIE-, RTll- or DOS-structured device,
including RXOI and RX02 flexible diskettes.
Delete files on an RTll-structured device.
Initialize (zero) an RTll-structured device.
Compress (squeeze) the files on an RTll-structured device.

Privilege Required

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Read access to input files and files included in a directory listing
CreatelRename access to any output files you create
Write access to any files you delete
DEVICE privilege for restricted tape drives and restricted
RXO lIRX02 disk drives
RDNFS privilege for input disk devices that are not RSTSIE devices
WRTNFS privilege for output disk devices that are not RSTSIE
devices
SYSIO privilege to set the protection/privilege bit when transferring
files to a RSTSIE system

To Run the Program
RUN AUXLIB$:FIT

4-10

System Utility Programs

Transferring Files

In response to the FIT> prompt; specify the files in the format:
output[/switch]=]input[/switch]
Listing a Directory

In response to the FIT> prompt, specify the directory in the format:
dev: [proj,prog]filename. type/L[I][/sw]
Deleting Files on RT11-Structured Devices

In response to the FIT> prompt, specify files in the format:
dev:filename. typeIDE[!switch]
Initializing RT11-Structured Devices

In response to the FIT> prompt, specify the device in the format:
dev:/ZE:m[/switch]
Compressing RT11-Structured Devices

In response to the FIT> prompt, specify the device in the format:

dev:/SQ[/sw]
Switches

ID
Deletes a file on an RTll device.
IDOS
Specifies a file on a DOS format disk.
/HE
Prints HELP text for FIT.
IDI, ILl
Lists the directory of the device.

/N:n
Use with /ZE to create n directory segments on the initialized device.
Each segment consists of two 512-byte blocks. The value n (range 1-31)
determines the size of the directory on the device; and, therefore, the
number of files stored on the device.
System Utility Programs

4-11

IRSTS
Specifies a file on a RSTSIE disk or device.
IRTll
Specifies a file on an RTll-structured device or specifies an RTllstructured device.

/SQ
Compresses (squeezes) an RTll-structured device.
fW

Lists all file transfers and deletions on your terminal.
/ZE[:m]
Initializes (zeros) an RTl1-structured device.

GRIPE
GRIPE lets you send messages to your system manager. The comments
you type are written to a common file kept by your system manager.
Privilege Required

You do not need any special privilege to run the GRIPE program and
send a message to the system manager. However, you need WACNT
privilege to use the *LIST and *RESET commands.
To Run the Program
RUN AUXLIB$:GRIPE

Commands

*LIST
Allows you to display the contents of the GRIPE.TXT file on your
terminal, print it on a line printer, or write it to a file.
*RESET
Deletes the GRIPE.TXT file.

HELP
HELP displays information about system programs and system commands.

4-12

System Utility Programs

Privilege Required

•

Create/rename access to any file you create using the /OUTPUT
switch

To Run the Program
RUN HELP $ : HELP

Usage Notes

HELP prints an identifying header line and prompts for a topic. In
response to ihe Topic? prompt, type one of the following:
•

•
•

The name of the topic about which you want information. If you
abbreviate the name, HELP displays information on all topics that
match the abbreviation. In addition to the topic you can specify one
or more subtopics (separated by spaces) associated with that topic.
The level to which you can nest subtopics depends on the particular
topic about which you want information.
A * wildcard character, which directs HELP to display information
on all available topics.
The? character, which directs HELP to display a list of available
topics.

To exit from the HELP program, enter CTRL/Z at any prompt. You can
also exit HELP by pressing RETURN at the Topic? prompt.
Switches
IOUTPUT
Use only with the HELP CCL command. By default, HELP displays
the information you request at your terminal. IOUTPUT overrides the
default and writes the requested information to a file. For example:

HELP/OUTPUT:filespec topic [subtopic [... ]]
or
HELP/OUTPUT:filespec * [. .. ]
!PROMPT
Use only with the HELP CCL command. When you specify !PROMPT
with a topic, HELP displays the information you request, and HELP
then displays the Topic? prompt. When you specify !PROMPT with no
topic, HELP displays only the Topic? prompt.
System Utility Programs

4-13

COT
The ODT program opens a file, a peripheral device, or memory as an
address space and allows you to examine and change word or byte
locations within that address space. You can also list the contents of
certain table locations in the operating system.
Privilege Required

•
•
•
•
•
•

RDMEM privilege to read memory
RDMEM and SYSMOD privileges to read and change memory
RDWFS privilege to read a non-file-structured device
WRTWFS privilege to write to a non-file-structured device
Read access to read a file
Read and write access to read and change a file

ODT Characters and Symbols

You access and manipulate memory locations and data by typing
characters and symbols that ODT recognizes. The special characters
and symbols are listed in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 : ODT Characters and Symbols
Character
Symbols

Meaning

/
k/

Opens the previously open location as a word, or opens the
location designated by k as a word.

Opens the previously open location as a byte, or opens the
location designated by k as a byte.

Gives the ASCII representation of the currently open or last
open location, or of the location specified by k.

~ETII
RET

4-14 System Utility Programs

Gives the ASCII representation of the Radix-50 value in the
currently open or last open location, or in the location specified
byk.
Closes the currently open location, or modifies the contents of
k followed by the currently open location with the value k and
closes it.

Table 4-1 (Cont.): OOT Characters and Symbols
Cha...-acter
Symbols
Meaning

Closes the currently open location and opens the next sequential location, or modifies the contents of the currently open
location with the value of k before closing it and opening the
next sequential location.
Closes the currently open location and opens the preceding
sequential location.
Takes the contents of the currently open location as a program
counter relative offset and calculates the next location to
be opened; closes the currently open location and opens the
location thus evaluated.

Takes the contents of the currently open location as an absolute
address, closes the currently open location; opens and prints
the contents of the location thus evaluated. If k precedes @,
the value k replaces the contents of the currently open location
before it is closed.

>
k>

Takes the low order byte of the currently open location as a
relative branch offset and calculates the address of the next
location to be opened. Closes the currently open location and
opens and prints the contents of the relative branch location
thus evaluated. If k precedes >, the value k replaces the
contents of the currently open location before it is closed.

Closes the currently open location and opens the last location
explicitly open. Returns ODT to the origin of a sequence
of relative locations determined by _, @, and > character
operations.
Separates a relocation register number from an octal value.
ODT adds the contents of the specified relocation register to
the octal value following the comma, and forms a relocatable
address.
Separates multiple values in a list request using the L character and in a register operation using the R character.
Specifies the last explicitly open location similar to that used
by the < character.

System Utility Programs

4-15

Table 4-1 (Cont.):
Character
Symbols

+
space bar

ODT Characters and Symbols

Meaning
Adds the preceding value and following value and uses the
result.
Subtracts the following value from the preceding value and
uses the result.

Resets all relocation registers to -1 (177777).

Resets relocation register n to -1 (177777).

k;nR

Sets relocation register n to the value k.

Sets relocation calculation for list requests using the L character.

Disables relocation calculation set by the F character.

Prints out monitor table symbolic names and memory addresses.

$S
Q

Prints out the processor status word.
Uses the last quantity printed by ODT.

kl;k2L

Prints the contents of locations kl through k2 at the terminal.

l;kl;k2L

Prints the contents of location kl through k2 on line printer
unit o.

2;kl;k2L

Prints the contents of location kl through k2 on another device.
ODT asks for a device designator by printing the DEVICE
question.

To Run the Program
RUN AUXLIB$:ODT

Mter you type the command line and press RETURN, ODT displays
the FILE <MEMORY>? prompt. Your response to this question determines the way ODT runs and what address space ODT accesses. The
responses you can type are listed in Table 4-2.

4-16

System Utility Programs

Table 4-2:

COT Question Responses

Response

Meaning

Press RETURN only.

Allows Read access to memory only if you
have RDMEM privilege.

Type a file specification, then
press RETURN.

Allows Read access to the file on the device
specified. If you specify no device, ODT
uses the system disk.

Press LINE FEED only.

Allows Read and Write access to memory
only if you have RDMEM and SYSMOD
privileges.

Type the file specification, then
press LINE FEED.

Allows Read and Write access to the file
specified.

PIP
PIP (Peripherai Interchange Program) copies flies from one RSTS/E
device to another, concatenates, deletes, and renames files, changes
protection codes and file attribute data, initializes accounts, and lists
directories.

Privilege Required
•
•

Read access to any input files you read
CreatelRename access to any output files you create

•
•
•
•

Write access to any output files you write to
Create!Rename access to any input files you rename
TUNE privilege if you use the /LOCK and /PRIOR switches
DEVICE privilege for any restricted devices you access

To Run the Program
RUN $PIP

Format
[output[/sw]= Jinput[lsw ][,input[/sw], ... ]

System Utility Programs

4-17

Usage Notes
Specify input and output file specifications in the standard fonnat.
Note that both input and output file specifications can contain the
file specification switches !PROTECT, IFILESIZE, ICLUSTERSIZE,
!MODE, IRONLY, and !POSITION.
PIP lets you specify a PIP indirect command file in response to its
prompt. You must type the at sign (@) as the first character following
the prompt. If you do not include the file type, the default is .CMD.
Nesting is pennitted. The number of files you can nest depends on the
amount of memory available. If a line in the indirect command file
begins with a semicolon (;), PIP interprets the line as a comment and
skips to the next line in the file.
PIP allows you to use the asterisk (*) and question mark (?) wildcard
characters in input and output file specifications.
Informational Switch
/HELP
Prints a text message at your tenninal that describes file specifications,
switches, and options.
File Transfer Switches

IACCESS
For disk input only, changes the file's last access date to the current
date. If you do not specify this switch, PIP preserves the last access
date.
IAPPEND
/EXTEND

For disk output only, appends the input file to the output file (extends the output file). If no output file exists, PIP displays a warning
message and creates the file.

IASCII
Fonnatted ASCII transfer; PIP discards NULL characters, parity bits,
and rub-out characters.
!BLOCK
Performs a block-by-block transfer with no data translation.

4-18 System Utility Programs

IBSIZE
For magnetic tape output only. PIP uses the physical block size specified by n (in bytes) for data written to the tape.
/CLUSTERSIZE:n
For disk only, sets the output file cluster size to n. You must place
this switch adjacent to the output file specification. To use the RSTSIE
automatic clustersize optimization feature, specify /CLUSTERSIZE:O.
The specified cluster size cannot be less than the pack cluster size.
!IGNORE
IGO

Ignores ?Data error on device errors.

lMODE:n
Sets the mode n in which PIP opens the file. You must place this switch
adjacent to the file specification.
/NEW
For disk output only, creates a new file with the current date of creation
and access.

INOATTRIBUTE
Transfers the file without writing attributes to the output file. No
file or record conversion takes place (see !RMS for record conversion
options).
!RETAIN
For disk output only, retains creation and access date of the input file.
!RTS:name
Sets the output file's run-time system name to that specified in name.
If you omit the output file specification, PIP renames the input file's
run-time system.
INOSUPERSEDE
INOS:NOWARN
INOS:QUERY
INOS:INSPECT
Displays an error message and ignores the operation if an output file
already exists. If you include the :NOWARN option, PIP does not
display the error message. The :QUERY and :INSPECT options are
synonymous. They cause PIP to display the prompt "OK to replace
file filespec?" if the output file already exists. Type Y, YE, or YES to
replace the file.
System Utility Programs

4-19

IPROTECT
IPR:NOWARN
IPR:QUERY
IPR:INSPECT
Same as NOSUPERSEDE. DIGITAL recommends NOSUPERSEDE to
avoid conflict with protection code option.
/UPDATE
Opens a pre-existing disk file and overwrites the existing data. If no
file exists, PIP creates a new one.
Files with Attributes, Translation Switches

IRMS
For input disk files, translates RMS format to formatted ASCII or
formatted binary. For output disk files, PIP translates formatted ASCII
or formatted binary to RMS variable length records. For nondisk
transfers, PIP's translation depends on current format. If you do not
specify the IRMS switch for disk files, PIP performs no translation.
You cannot apply the switch to both input and output files in the same
command line.
IRMS:FA
For input or output files, specifies formatted ASCII in the translation.
IRMS:FB
For input or output files, specifies formatted binary in the translation.
IRMS:FTN
For input files, translates FORTRAN carriage control to formatted
ASCII. For nondisk output files, translation is automatic.
IRMS:IM
For input files only, performs the same as IRMS but does not transfer
attributes. However, PIP does remove RMS variable length header
information.
IRMS:PRN
For input disk files, translates RMS print files to formatted ASCII.

4-20

System Utility Programs

Date Switches
IAFTER:dd-mmm-yy

Includes only files that were created after, but not on, the given date.
IBEFORE:dd-mmm-yy

Includes only files that were created before, but not on, the given date.
ICREATION

Uses the date of creation in file operations.

IDLA
For disk only, uses the date of last access in file operations.
ION:dd-mmm-yy

Includes only files that were created on the given date.
ISll'-{CE:dd-mmm-yy

Includes only files that were created on or after the given date.
/TODAY

Includes only files that were created on the current date.
IUNTIL:dd-mmm-yy
Includes only files that were created on or before the given date.
Size Switches

IEQ:n
Includes only files with size equal to n.
/GE:n
Includes only files with size greater than or equal to n.
ILE:n
Includes only files with size less than or equal to n.

You can combine the ILE and /GE switches to select files between
a minimum and maximum size (inclusive). If you use any of these
switches together with the directory switch argument :AL, files are
selected based on allocated size.

System Utility Programs

4-21

File Operation Switches - General
/HALT

Halts a magnetic tape wildcard search as soon as it detects a file that
does not match.
!INSPECT
IQUERY
Displays the file specifications (one at a time) that match a wildcard
specification. If used in transfer or !DELETE operations, as each file
specification is displayed, type Y (for Yes) to transfer or delete; type
any other character to omit. Enter CTRUZ to end the display and
operation.
IIN:SLOW
Prints file name, type, file size, protection code, creation date, and last
access date.
fLOG

!WATCH
Displays a report on all actions taken during execution. PIP prints the
report at your terminal.
INOLOG
Displays nothing for actions taken during execution.
INOREWIND
IRW:NO
Does not rewind the magnetic tape before an input file search.
NERSION
!IDENTIFY
Displays the program's current version number.
File Operation Switches - Deletion

!DELETE
For disk and DECtape only, deletes the specified file.
!DELETE:NO
Does not display an error message if the file to be deleted does not
exist.

4-22

System Utility Programs

!ERASE
!WIPEOUT
,'V/O
For disk, overwrites the file with zeros before deletion. These switches
are the same; you must use one of them in conjunction with the
!DELETE switch.

File Operation Switch - Rename

IRENAME:option
For disk and DECtape only, renames the input file to that of the output
file.
IRENAME:NO
Does not display an error message if you try to rename a file to the
name of a file that already exists. The file is not renamed.
File Operation Switches - Zeroing
IZERO

Zeros (initializes) the directory of an account or device or initializes the
labels on a magnetic tape.
IZEROIDENSITY:n

For magnetic tape only, sets the tape density before the zero operation.
lZERO!PARITY:ODD
IZERO!PARITY:EVEN

For magnetic tape only, sets the parity of the tape before the zero
operation.
Privileged-Only Switches

fLOCK
The system locks PIP in memory for the duration of the current operation. Note that you cannot abbreviate fLOCK.
!PRIORITY
The system runs PIP at special priority for the duration of the current
operation. Note that you cannot abbreviate !PRIOR.

System Utility Programs 4-23

File Operation Switches - Listing

!BRIEF
!FAST
Displays a brief directory listing.
/DIRECTORY
/LIST
/SLOW
Displays a full directory listing. The listing switches accept option
specifications that modify the directory listing.
IMDELETE
Includes files that are marked for deletion in the directory listing.
PIP Directory Listing Options

:AL
Lists file name, type, and the number of blocks allocated to the file.
:CL
Lists file name, type, and file cluster size.
:DA
Lists file name, type, and file creation date.

:DI
Lists file name, type, size, protection code, creation date, and column
headers.
:EX
Lists file name and type same as :TY (provided for compatibility with
previous versions of RSTSIE).
:FU

Lists heading, file name, type, size, protection code, date of last access,
date of creation, time of creation, cluster size, associated run-time
system, file position, open status, and summary.

:HD
Includes column headers in the listing.
:LA
Lists file name, type, and date of last access or date of last write
(depending on disk initialization).

4-24

System Utility Programs

:NA
Lists file name.
:OA
Lists file name, type, and octal representation of file attributes.
:PR
Lists file name, type, and protection code.
:RT
Lists file name, type, and associated run-time system.

:8
Lists all information.
:SA
:AT
Lists file name, type, symbolic file attributes, caching status, and
backup status.

Caching is indicated by one of the following entries:
•
•
•

CACHE:ON:RAN; file is automatically cached randomly when open.
CACHE:ON:8EQ; file is automatically cached sequentially when
open.
CACHE:OFF:8EQ; file is not automatically cached, but if cached, it
is cached sequentially.

Backup status is indicated by one of the following entries:
•
•

NOBACKUP - the file data is not backed up; only the file attributes
are backed up.
IGNORE - the file is completely ignored for BACKUP purposes.

:81
:8Z

Lists file name, type, and file size.
:8U
Lists only summary data to include number of designated files and
total number of blocks occupied by designated files.
:TI
Lists file name, type, and date and time of creation.

System Utility Programs

4-25

:TY
Lists file name and type.
:W
Lists file name and type across the width of the page or screen.
:WI
Lists file name only across the width of the page or screen.
NOTE

The :OA, :SA, :AT, and :8 options cause PIP to display file
attributes in octal or symbolic representation.

PMDUMP
PMDUMP formats the contents of a postmortem dump into readable
form and lets you copy it to a file on any R8T8tE device.
Privilege Required

•
•

Read access to the input file
CreatelRename access to the output file

To Run the Program
RUN AUXLIB$:PMDUMP

Format

outfil. typ=infil. typ
Usage Notes

Input and output file specifications are in the standard format.
If you press RETURN or LINE FEED in response to the prompt,
PMDUMP applies the following defaults:

4-26

Device

SY:

account

The current account

file name

The input file name

type

.PMD for input, .LST for output

System Utility Programs

For PMDUMP to be successful in formatting the dump:
•
•
•

The run-time system that controls your job must be RSX or RSXbased.
The task to be dumped must have already aborted.
You must request a postmortem dump with the !PM switch when
you link the program with the Task Builder. The !PM switch causes
the Task Builder to set an indicator in your executable program file.
This means that, if your program terminates abnormally when it is
executed, the system automatically writes the memory contents to
a disk file.

SYSTAT
SYSTAT displays current system information about jobs, devices,
disks, buffer status, run-time systems, resident libraries, and message
receivers.
Privilege Required

•

WREAD privilege to use the /0 and /W switches to obtain information about open files

•
•

SYSIO privilege to obtain status of temporary privileges for jobs
TUNE privilege to obtain maximum size, priority, and run burst
information about jobs

To Run the Program
RUN $SYSTAT

Usage Notes

At this point you can specify any RSTSIE device or a file specification
for the status report output. Possible replies are:

System Utility Programs 4-27

Output
Response

Meaning

Displays report on your terminal. This is equivalent to KB:
response.
LP:

Sends the report to the system line printer if only one line
printer is on the system, or to line printer 0 if multiple line
printers are on the system.

LPn:

Sends the report to line printer n if that printer is not
currently in use.

KB:

Displays the report on your terminal. This is equivalent to
pressing RETURN.

KBn:

Displays the report on terminal n in the system if that
terminal is on line and not currently in use.

dev:filename.type Writes the report to the file specified. The default device is
the system device. No file type is appended unless specified.
Writes the report to a file on the public structure, and
displays the file name on your t.erminal. SYSTAT names
the file according to the current date and time of day; its
type is .RPT.

NOTE

You can specify switches separately or in any combination. If
you specify more than one switch, only one slash is required.
Switches

IA
Reports status of attached jobs only.

IB
Reports status of busy devices only.

Ie
Reports memory allocation on system.

fD
Reports status of disk structure only.
IF
Reports status of free butTers only.

4-28

System Utility Programs

IKn
Displays report on terminal n in the system.
IL
Reports status of resident libraries only.

1M
Reports status of message receivers only.

In
Reports status of job n only.
In,m
Reports status of account [n,m] only.
In, *
Reports status of jobs having project nwnber n only.

*,n
Reports status of jobs having programmer number n only

NULL
Reports complete system status to include jobs, run-time systems, resident libraries, busy devices, disk structure, free buffers, and message
receivers.
10
10[:dev:]
10[:job]
10[:dev:job]

Reports all non system files that are open, on a specific device "dev:", by
a specific job "job".
!W

/W[:dev:]
!W[:job]
!W[:dev:job]
Reports all non system files that are open, on a specific device "dev:",
by a specific job "job", along with the jobs accessing them, the block
nwnber being accessed, the blocks currently locked, and the use of
special extend mode.

IR
Reports status of run-time system only.

System Utility Programs

4-29

IS
Reports status of jobs only.

IU
Reports status of detached jobs only.
10,0
Reports status of jobs not logged into the system only.

Several of the DCL SHOW commands perform the same functions as
many of the SYSTAT switches. The following list is a cross reference
between the DCL SHOW commands and the equivalent SYSTAT
switches:
DCL Command

4-30

SYSTAT Switches

SHOW BUFFERS

SHOW DEVICE/ALLOCATED

SHOW DISKS

SHOW FILESIOPEN

IO,1W

SHOW JOB

lA, IS, /U

SHOW LIBRARY

SHOW MEMORY

SHOW RECEIVERS

SHOW RUNTIME_SYSTEM

SHOW USER

lA, IS, /U

System Utility Programs

The abbreviations listed in Table 4-3 appear in the full status report.
Table 4-3:

Abbreviations for Full SYSTAT Report

Abbreviation

Meaning
Job Status (State)
Job's state cannot be determined.

** ,**

Job is not logged into the system.
Job is in CtrllC state, awaiting input from the keyboard monitor.

Job is waiting for buffers (no space is available for I/O
buffers).

Job is waiting for card reader input.

DB, DF, DK, DL,
DM,DR,orDU

Job is waiting to perform disk I/O.

DET

Job is detached from all tenninals.

DT
DX

Job is waiting for DECtape I/O.
Job is waiting for flexible diskette I/O.

Job is waiting for file processing action by the system
(opening or closing a file, file search).

Job is detached and waiting to perform 110 to or from
a tenninal.

Job is waiting for input from a terminal.
KBn*
Job is waiting for input from a dialup
terminal.
KBn!

Job is waiting for input from a LAT terminal.

KBn*!

Job is waiting for input from a terminal
dialed up into a LAT server.

KBnJm

Pseudo keyboard is being controlled by Job
n, such as a batch job or a job that is set
host to the system.

Job is waiting to perform line printer output.

MM, MS, MT, or MU

Job is waiting for magnetic tape I/O.

System Utility Programs

4-31

Table 4-3 (Cont.):
Abbreviation

Abbreviations for Full SYSTAT Report
Meaning
Job Status (State)

Job is· waiting to perform output on the high-speed
paper tape punch.

Job is waiting for input from the high-speed paper tape
reader.

Job is waiting for RJ2780 110.

Job is running or waiting to run.

Job is waiting for residency.

Job is sleeping (SLEEP statement).

Job is sleeping and is a message receiver.

Job is waiting to perform output to a terminal.

The following status descriptions may appear after one or more of the
other job state abbreviations:

Lck

Job is locked in memory for the current operation.

Nsw

Job has requested that it not be swapped from memory
and cannot be swapped unless it requests additional
memory.

Swi

Job is currently being swapped into memory.

Swo

Job is currently being swapped out of memory.

Xnn

Job is swapped out and occupies slot nn in swap file
X; file is denoted by A,B,C, or D to represent files 0
through 3 of the swapping structure.
Busy Devices (Why)

4-32

ANSI

Magnetic tape is assigned with ANSI standard labeling
format.

Device is explicitly assigned to a job.

DOS

Magnetic tape is assigned with DOS labeling format.

OPEN

Device is open on a channel.

System Utility Programs

Table 4-3 (Cont.):
Abbreviation

Abbreviations for Full SYSTAT Report
Meaning
Disk Structure (Comments)

Dirty

Disk needs cleaning.

DLW

Date of last write (modify), rather than date of last
access, is stored in file accounting entries.

A "DB" or "DR" disk that is dual ported.

Jobn

Private disk is assigned to job n.

Lck
LDX

Disk is in a locked state.

NFF

New files on this disk are put at beginning of directory.

NFS

Disk is open as non-file-structured device.

PRI

Cartridge or pack is private.

PUB

Cartridge or pack is public.

R-O

Disk unit is read-only (write-locked).

Disk's SAT is loaded.

System Utility Programs

4-33

Table 4-3 (Cont.):
Abbreviation

Abbreviations for Full SYSTAT Report
Meaning

Run-time Systems and Resident Libraries (Comments)

4-34

Addr:xxx

Denotes the starting address of the run-time system or
library.

CSZ

Proper job image size (in K words) to run a program
can be computed as K-size={filesize+3)14.

DFKBM

Run-time system is the default keyboard monitor.

EMT:yyy

Denotes the EMT code for special EMT prefix.

KBM

Run-time system can serve as keyboard monitor.

Run-time system or library is being loaded into memory.

Monitor

Denotes monitor RSX emulation.

NER

Errors occurring within run-time system or library will
not be sent to system error log.

Non-Res

Run-time system or library is nonresident.

Perm

Run-time system or library will stay in memory when
not being used.

Primary

Denotes the primary run-time system.

Rem

Run-time system or library will be removed from
memory as soon as all its jobs switch to another
run-time system or library.

RJW

Run-time system or library allows read/write access.

Temp

Run-time system or library will be removed from
memory when not being used.

IUS

Run-time system or library can serve only 1 user.

System Utility Programs

Table 4-3 (Cant.):
Abbreviation

Abbreviations for Full SYSTAT Report
Meaning
Message Receivers (Access)

Evt

Indicates the DECnet event logger.

LeI

Local senders are allowed for this receiver ID.

Net

Network senders are allowed for this receiver ID.

One

User has indicated that job should handle only one
network link.

Prv

Local senders must be privileged to send to this receiver ID.

The abbreviations listed in Table 4-4 appear in the open file reports.
Table 4-4:

Abbreviations for Open File Reports
Meaning

Abbreviation

Open Files (Status)

Ctg

File is contiguous.

MDL

File is marked for deletion.

NoK

File cannot be renamed or deleted.

None

No files are open on the disk.

PIa

File is placed.

System files only

Only swap files or run-time systems are open on the
disk.

Tent

Tentative file.

UFD

File is a UFD-type entry.

Upd

File is open in UPDATE mode.

System Utility Programs

4-35

Table 4-4 (Cont.):

Abbreviations for Open File Reports
Meaning

Abbreviation

Jobs Accessing Open Files (Access)

Aex

File is open in mode 8.

File is open for user data caching.

Lock

File has an implicit lock.

Lockn+m

File has an explicit lock starting at block n plus m
blocks in length.

NFS

File is non-file-structured.

User has read access to the file.

Rnd

File is open for random user data caching.

File is open read regardless.

SpUp

File is open in special UPDATE mode.

Seq

File is open for sequential user data caching.

Tent

Tentative file.

UFD

File is a UFD-type entry.

File is open for UPDATE.

User has write access to the file.

TALK
The TALK program allows you to communicate with other terminals
on your system. You can send a message to a user's terminal or to the
system console.
Privilege Required
Usually your system manager assigns a protection code of <232>,
which permits all users to run TALK. However, your system manager
can restrict the use of TALK by assigning a protection code of <124>.
Check with your system manager to find out if you have access to
TALK.
To Run the Program
RUN AUXLIB$:TALK

4-36

System Utility Programs

Usage Notes

Mter TALK displays the To which keyboard? prompt, type the number
of the keyboard to which you want to send a message.
Mter you enter a keyboard number and press RETURN, TALK displays
the following instructions:
Enter message below (CTRUZ to end):
Message:
Enter as many message lines as you want.

System Utility Programs

4-37

Chapter 5

Programming Information
This chapter provides the RSTSIE programming information.

RMSDES Utility Summary
The RMS-ll File Design Utility (RMSDES) allows you to design and
create sequential, relative, and indexed files.
The command line for the RMSDES utility is:
DES filename[.typ] [type]
Table 5-1 lists the RMSDES attribute settings and commands.
Table 5-1:

Attribute Settings

Section
Keyword

Attribute Keyword and Variable

System

TARGETl argument

Default

argument must be one of:
RSX

User's system

RSTS
VMS

File

SOURCE

User's system

FILE PLACEMENTl logical

NAME string

FILE.DAT

ORGANIZATION argument

Programming Information

5-1

Table 5-1 (Cont.): Attribute Settings
Section
Keyword Attribute Keyword and Variable

Default

argument must be one of:
SEQUENTIAL
RELATIVE
INDEXED

SEQUENTIAL

CLUSTER_SIZE number
EXTENSION number

o blocks
o blocks
o blocks

BUCKET_SIZE number

1 block

PROTECTION string

System protection

ALLOCATION number

Record

OWNER string (RSX-11M!M PLUS only)

User's mc

MAGTAPE_BLOCK_SIZE number

512 bytes

REWIND_MAGTAPE logical

MAX._RECORD_NUMBER number

o records

CONTIGUOUS logical

SUPERSEDE logical

SIZE number

o bytes

FORMAT argument
argument must be one of:
VARIABLE
STREAM
FIXED
VFC

VARIABLE

CONTROL_FIELD_SIZE number

2 bytes

BLOCK_SPAN logical

YES

CARRIAGE_CONTROL argument
argument must be one of:
CARRIAGE_RETURN
FORTRAN
PRINT
NONE

5-2

Programming Information

NONE

Table 5-1 (Cont.):

Attribute Settings

Section
Keyword

Attribute Keyword and Variable

Default

Keyn

NAME string

No name

TYPE argument
argument must be one of:
STRING
BIN2
BIN4
INT2
INT4
DECIMAL

STRING

}.TTJLL_Y~ logical

NULL_VALUE argument
argument must be one of:

Area n

An ASCII character
A decimal number

; ; (space)

DUPLICATES logical

NO (primary key)
YES (alternate key)

SEGn_POSITION3 number

Byte 0

SEGn_LENGTH3 number

o bytes

SEGO_POSITION number

Byte 0

CHANGES logical

YES (alternate key)

DATA_FILL number

100%

DATA_AREA number

Area 0

INDEX_FILL number

100%

LEVELl_INDEX_AREA number

Area 0

INDEX_AREA number

Area 0

ALLOCATION number
BUCKET_SIZE number

o blocks
o blocks
o blocks

CONTIGUOUS logical

EXTENSION number

POSITION argument

Programming Information

5-3

Table 5-1 (Cont.):
Section
Keyword

Attribute Settings

Attribute Keyword and Variable

Default

argument must be one of:

NONE

LOGICAL number

Commands

CLEAR ALL
Restores all attribute values in all sections to their default values.
CLEAR section ALL
Restores all attribute values in the specified section to their default
values.
CLEAR section attribute
Restores the specified attribute value in the specified section to its
default value.
CREATE [filename[. typ]]
Creates an empty data file that has the attribute values specified in
the design buffer. For indexed files in which areas are not defined,
RMSDES prompts for whether areas are to be defined by default.
If you do not specify a file name and type, the file will have those
specified in the design buffer. If you did not specify a file name and

type in the design buffer, the file will be created as FILE.DAT.
CtrllZ
Terminates RMSDES without saving the design or creating an empty
data file.
ESC
In response to any prompt, returns the RMSDES utility prompt and
preserves all attribute values in the design buffer.
EXIT filename[.typ]
Stores the file design in the description file specified in the command
line and terminates RMSDES. The default file type is .DES.

5-4

Programming Information

GET filenameLtyp] [type]
Reads the file design specified in a description file, and sets the appropriate aiiribute values in the design buffer. Reads the attribute values
of a data file, and sets the appropriate attribute values in the design
buffer. The default file type is .DES. If the file is a data file, you must
specify .DAT.
HELP
Lists all available help topics and gives instructions for displaying the
text.
HELP command
Displays help text for the specified command.

HELP SECTIONS
Lists all available help topics for all sections and gives instructions for
displaying the text.
HELP section
Displays help text for the specified section and lists all available help
topics for all attributes in the specified section.
HELP section attribute
Displays help text for the specified attribute in the specified section.
?
Displays HELP text for the section, attribute, or value for which you
are being prompted. Note also that you can type? instead of HELP for
any form of the HELP command.

QUIT
Terminates RMSDES, without storing the design or creating an empty
data file.
SAVE filename[.typ]
Stores the file design in the description file specified in the command
line. The default file type is .DES.
SET ALL
Prompts for setting all attribute values in all sections. For indexed files
in which areas are not defined, prompts for whether areas are to be
defined by default.
SET section ALL
Prompts for setting all attribute values in the specified section.

Programming Information

5-5

SET section attribute value
Sets the specified attribute value in the specified section.
SHOW ALL
Displays all attribute values in all sections.
SHOW section ALL
Displays all attribute values in the specified section.
SHOW section attribute
Displays the specified attribute value in the specified section.
SHOWID
Identifies the CUlTent level and patch version of RMSDES.

RMSIFL Utility Summary
The RMS-l1 Indexed File Load Utility (RMSIFL) reads records from an
RMS-l1 file of any organization and loads them into an indexed file.
The command line for the RMSIFL utility is:
outfile[!switch ... ]=infile[!switch... ]
Type HELP or? for a help message.
Global Switch

lID
Identifies the CUlTent version. The default is to provide no identification.
Output File Switches

IER[:filespec]
Writes primary keys of exception records to your terminal if no filespec;
or writes exception records to the specified file. The default is to write
primary keys of exception records to your terminal.
INOER[:S]
Stops processing if input record is incompatible. The default is to write
primary keys of exception records to your terminal.

!LO
Honors bucket fill size. The default is to fill buckets to capacity.

5-6

Programming Information

IPD[:[#]x]
Pads input records to output record length. The default is to handle
input records as exception records if the lengths differ.

ITR
Truncates input records to output record length. The default is to
handle input records as exception records if the lengths differ.
Input File Switches

ICL:nnn
Sets sort work files cluster size.
IDE:dvn1:[dvn2: ... dvn5:]
Reassigns devices for sort work files. The default is to create and use
sort work files on SY:.

/KR:n
Uses key of reference number. The default is to use primary key (0).

!NOS a
Does not sort records before loading. The default is to sort records in
the input file before loading.

RMSCNV Utility Summary
The RMS-11 File Conversion Utility (RMSCNV) reads records from an
RMS-11 file of any organization and loads them into another RMS-11
file of any organization.
The command line for the RMSCNV utility has the format:
[outfile[!switch ...]=]infile[/switch ... ]
Global Switches

lAP
Appends records to an existing sequential file. The default is to not
append records.
IBL:[n]
Sets magnetic tape block size. The default is 512 bytes.
ICA:[filespec]
Creates an output file with the attributes of the existing input file.

Programming Information

5-7

lEO
Converts CtrllZ EOF character in an ASCII stream file to null and
pads the file with nulls to the physical EOF. The default is to assume a
null-filled stream file.
IFO:x
Sets output file organization, where x is S, R, or I. The default is S.

lID
Identifies the current version. The default is to provide no identification.

11M
Processes files in block mode. The default is to use standard RMS-ll
access modes.

IKN:["]keyname["]
Reads an indexed file using the key of reference specified by keyname.
The default is to use the primary key.
/KR:n
Reads an indexed file using the key of reference specified by D. The
default is to use primary key (0).

/La
Honors bucket fill size when filling buckets in an indexed file. The
default is to fill buckets to capacity.
!MA
Uses mass-insertion mode and sequential PUT operations. The default
is to use random PUT operations.
IML:n
Explicitly sets limit of buffer allocation.
IPD[:[# ]["]X["]]

Pads input records to the output record length, if necessary. The
default is to not pad records.
ISL[:filespec]
Provides summary listing to terminal or in file, if specified. The default
is to not provide a summary.
ISU
Supersedes existing sequential file. The default is t.o not. supersede
existing files.

5-8

Programming Information

ITR
Truncates input records to output record length, if necessary. The
default is to not truncate records.

IWF
Writes or read fixed-control area. The default is to ignore fixed-control
area.

RMSDSP Utility Summary
The RMS-ll File Display Utility (RMSDSP) produces a concise description of any R...1V1S= 11 fHe, including backup files.
The command line for the RMSDSP utility has the format:
[outfile=]infile[/switch ...][,infile[/switch...] ... ]
Global Switches

IBP
Lists contents of backup files. The default is to provide basic display
only.

/FU
Provides detailed display for indexed files or backup files. The default
is to provide basic display only.

lID
Identifies the current version. The default is to provide no identification.

RMSBCK Utility Summary
The RMS-ll File Back-Up Utility (RMSBCK) transfers the contents of
an RMS-ll file to another file, on another device, to maintain the file
should the original file be lost or damaged.
The command line for the RMSBCK utility has the format:
outfile[/switch ... ]=infile[/switch... ][,infile[/switch ... ]... ]

Programming Information

5-9

Global Switches

lID
Identifies the current version. The default is to provide no identification.
I[NO]QU
Enables or disables query mode. The default is to enable query mode.

ISL[:filespec]
Provides summary listing to terminal or in file, if specified. The default
is to provide no summary.
Output File Switches

IRW
Rewinds magnetic tape before winding. The default is to not rewind
magnetic tape.
ISU
Supersedes existing file. The default is to not supersede files.

Input File Switches

ICD:dd-mmm-yy[:v]
Backs up files based on creation date: specify v as A to back up all
files created after the date specified or as B to back up all files created
before the date specified. If v is not specified, all files created on the
date specified will be backed up. The default is to perform no date
checking.
IRD:dd-mmm-yy[:v]
Backs up files based on revision date: specify v as A to back up all
files revised after the date specified or as B to back up all files revised
before the date specified. If v is not specified, all files revised on the
date specified will be backed up. The default is to perform no date
checking.

5-10

Programming Information

RMSRST Utility Summary
The RMS-ll File Restoration UtiHty (RMSRST) restores files that were
backed up using RMSBCK and produces standard RMS-11 files as
output, so your programs can access them.
The command line for the RMSRST utility has the format:
outfile[/switch ... J=infile[/switch ... J[,infile[/switch .. .] ... J
Global Switches

lID
Identifies the current version. The default is to provide no identification.
I[NOJQU
Enables or disables query mode. The default is to enable query mode.

ISL[:filespec]
Provides summary listing to terminal or in file, if specified. The default
is to provide no summary.
Output File Switches

IFR
Changes protection code. The default is to use the original protection.
ISU
Supersedes existing files. The default is to not supersede existing files.
Input File Switches

IBD:dd-mmm-yy
Restores disk files based on backup date. The default is to perform no
date checking.

lOA: [p,pn]
Restores files based on original account (PPN). Note that in this case,
the square brackets are required syntax. The default is to apply no
account criterion.

ISE:filespec or
ISE :(filespec 1,filespec2[, ... ,filespec 10])
Restores specified files from container file. The default is to restore all
files on the container file.
Programming Information

5-11

BASIC-PLUS
The following sections summarize infonnation about BASIC-PLUS
commands, statements, statement modifiers, variable types, functions,
relational operators, data storage, keywords, and the BASIC-PLUS
Cross-Reference Program.

Commands
This section describes BASIC-PLUS commands. Following each command format is a brief description of the command function and where
appropriate, an example. See the RSTS / E System User's Guide for
additional information about the commands marked with an asterisk.
See the BASIC-PLUS Language Manual for additional information
about the commands not marked with an asterisk (*).
APPEND [filespec]

Merges the lines from the saved source, overwriting any lines that exist
in the current program.
APPEND DMO: [12,12]PROG1.V2

ASSIGN [dev]:[(proj,prog)] [logical name]

Reserves an I/O device for use by a job. You can also use ASSIGN to
assign a logical name to a device, assign an account to the @ character,
or set the default protection code. ASSIGN can also accept extended
user logical names.
ASSIGN MTO:
ASSIGN (200,200)
ASSIGN DL3: [1,3] FOOBAR

BYE
You can use BYE as a system command only if the system manager has
installed it as a system command.
Mter you type BYE, press RETURN, and answer Y to the confinn
prompt, the system logs you out and closes any open files. If you have
defined BYE to be LOGOUT, the system logs you out without displaying
the confirm prompt.

5-12 Programming Information

BYE

CATALOG [dev:[(proj,prog)]]

Displays a directory of your files. The default device is the system
disk, but you can specify another device or account in the CATALOG
command line.
CATALOG DR3: [5,214]

CCONT

Continues execution of the current program after execution of a
STOP statement but detaches the job from the terminal. Requires
the JOBCTL privilege.
CCONT

COMPILE [filespec]

Saves a translated image of the current program in a disk file. The
default file name is the current program name; the default file type is
.BAC.
COMPILE DL1: [3,200]PROG1/PROT:40

CONT

Continues execution of the current program after execution of a STOP
statement.
CONT

DEASSIGN [dev]:[(proj,prog)] [logical name]

Releases a device for use by other jobs. DEASSIGN also releases a logical name for a device, cancels the association between an account and
the @ character, and changes the current default protection code back
to the system default. The system performs an automatic DEASSIGN
when you log out.
DEASSIGN MTO:
DEASSIGN (200,200)

Programming Information

5-13

DELETE [line number(s)]

Removes one or more lines from the program in memory. Enter the
DELETE command followed by the line number to delete the specified
line, or a range of line numbers separated by a hyphen (-) to delete
two or more lines. You can specify several single lines or ranges of
lines by using commas to separate the line numbers or line number
ranges. Typing DELETE with no line numbers deletes all lines from
the current program.
DELETE 0-200,500

EXIT

Clears memory and returns control to the job keyboard monitor.
EXIT

EXTEND

Puts BASIC-PLUS in EXTEND mode. You can write and run programs
that include EXTEND mode features. However, the format requirements for your program are more stringent in EXTEND mode than in
NOEXTEND mode. See the BASIC-PLUS Language Manual for more
information.
EXTEND

HELLO [(proj,prog)]

You can use BYE as a system command only if the system manager has
installed it as a system command.
Informs RSTSIE that you want to log in. If you do not specify a projectprogrammer number, the system prompts you for one. You can also use
HELLO to attach a detached job to your terminal or to change accounts
without logging out.
HELLO [5,214]

KILL <string>

Deletes the file specified by <string>. You must enclose the file specification within quotation marks.
KILL "DR3: [5, 200] JUNK~ !A_~!"

5-14

Programming Information

LENGTH

Returns the length of your cUlTent program, in lK increments, and the
maximum program size allowed.
LENGTH

LIST [line number(s)]

Displays all or part of the program cUlTently in memory. LIST by
itself displays your entire program. LIST followed by one line number
displays that line; LIST followed by two line numbers separated by
a hyphen (-) displays a range of lines. You can display several single
lines or ranges of lines by using commas to separate the line numbers
or line number ranges.
LIST 0-200,500

lISTNH [line number(s)]

Same as LIST, but does not print the header.
LISTNH 0-200

NEW [file name]

Clears your memory area, names a new program, and lets you enter a
new program at the terminal. The default program name is NONAME.
NEW GETCHR

NOEXTEND

Sets BASIC-PLUS to the NOEXTEND mode. In NOEXTEND mode,
EXTEND features are no longer available unless the program contains
an EXTEND statement.
NOEXTEND

OLD [filespec]

Retrieves a saved source program from disk and places it in memory.
By default, OLD retrieves NONAME.BAS from your account on the
public structure.
OLD GETCHR.BAS

Programming Information

5-15

REASSIGN dev:job number

Transfers control of a device to another job. When REASSIGN transfers
control of the device to another job, it also prevents a third job from
gaining control of that device.
REASSIGN KB: 23

RENAME file name

Changes the name of the program currently in memory to the name
that you specify.
RENAME GETLIN

REPLACE [filespec]

Copies the source program currently in memory onto a disk file. The
default file name is the current program name and the default file type
is .BAS. Unlike the SAVE command, REPLACE overwrites an existing
file having the same name.
REPLACE NONAME.BAS

RUN [filespec]

Executes the program in memory. If you include a file specification, the
system deletes the current program in memory, loads the specified file
from disk, translates it if necessary, and executes it.
RUN OM1: [200, 233] TAXES

RUNNH

Executes the program in memory without printing the header, which
contains the program name and current date and time. You can use
RUNNH to run the current program only.
RUNNH

SAVE [filespec]

Copies the source program currently in memory onto a disk file. The
default file name is the current program name and the default file type
is .BAS. SAVE does not replace an existing file having the same name.
SAVE TAXES. BAS

5-16

Programming Information

SCALE [n]

Sets the scale factor to the value specified by n. When you do not
specify n, SCALE displays the current and pending scale factors.
SCALE 6

UNSAVE [filespec]

Deletes a file from a directory. The default file name is your current
program name; the default file type is .BAS.
UNSAVE TAXES.BAS

Statements
This section describes BASIC-PLUS statements. Mter each statement
fonnat is a brief description of what the statement does, followed by
examples of how to use the statement.
![comments]

Documents what your program does. BASIC-PLUS prints your comments when you list your source file, but they do not affect your
program's execution. See the REM statement.
100 !This is a comment
150 PRINT !Perform a CR/LF
2000 GOTO 32767 IF END.OF.FILE%
PRINT 'End Pass' N%
\
\
GOTO 1000

Quit if all done &
Else log another pass &
and start a new one

CHAIN <string> [[UNE]<line number>]

Transfers control from one BASIC-PLUS program to another.
100 CHAIN "PROG3" LINE 75% ! Enter PROG3 at line 75

CHANGE

CHANGE { <arr.ay n~e>
} TO { <string variable> }
<string van able>
<array name>

Programming Information 5-17

Converts a list of numeric values to an ASCII string or an ASCII string
to a list of numeric values.
300
450

CHANGE X% TO X$ ! Array X%() to string X$
CHANGE V$ TO V% ! String V$ to array V%()

CLOSE [#]<expression>[,[#]<expression>, ... ]

Terminates 110 between a BASIC-PLUS program and a peripheral
device or file.
780 CLOSE '2%
800 CLOSE '2%, '3%
900 CLOSE '-CHAN%
910 CLOSE '-CHAN%
950 CLOSE 'I% FOR I%

Close a single channel
Close two channels
Close without writing buffer to file
or delete a tentative file
1% TO 12% ! Close all channels

DATA <value list>

Stores data for input by the READ statement.
1300 DATA 4.3, "STRING", 10, 1000, 1.45E9

DEF*FN<variable(arguments»=<expression (arguments»

Defines a single line of instructions to be a function. Mter you define
a function, you can use that function as you use BASIC-PLUS-defined
functions.
120 DEF* FNRMS(X,Y,Z) = SQR(X**2% + Y**2% + Z**2%)
\
! root-mean-square

! Define &

DEF* FN <variable(arguments» <statements> [LET]FN <variable> =
<expression> FNEND

Defines multiple lines of instructions to be a function. Mter you define
a function, you can use that function as you use BASIC-PLUS-defined
functions.
300 DEF* FNF(M%)
310 IF M% = 0% OR M% = 1% &
\
THEN FNF = 1%
ELSE FNF = M%*FNF(M% - 1%)
\
320 FNEND

Factorial function
Handle terminal cases &
Handle others by recursion

NOTE

BASIC-PLUS supports both DEF and DEF* in single and
multiline functions for compatibility with earlier versions.
Use DEF* for compatibility with BASIC-PLUS-2.
5-18

Programming Information

DIM <variable(dim(s»>[,<variable(dim(s»>, ...]

Specifies the size of an array_
30 DIM A(20%), B$(6%,5%), C%(99%) ! Real, string (2-dim), &
\
! integer arrays

DIM #<constant>,<stringvar{dim(s»>[=<constant>] [,<var(dim{s»>, ... ]

Specifies the size of a matrix of data in a virtual array.
70 DIM t4, A$(100)=32%, B(50,50), C%(30)
3 virtual arrays on &
\
! channel t4%

END

Closes all open 110 channels and halts program execution.
32767 END

EXTEND

Puts your program into EXTEND mode until the program completes its
run or until the program encounters a NOEXTEND statement.
10 EXTEND

! Set EXTEND mode for following statements

FIELD #<exp>, <exp1> AS <string var1 >[,<exp2> AS <string var2>, ... ]

Dynamically associates string variables with parts of an 110 buffer.
700 FIELD t2%, 10% AS A$, 20% AS B$, 5% AS C$ ! Define first 35 &
\
! bytes as 3 strings

FOR <variable> = <exp> TO <exp> [STEP <exp>]

Signifies the beginning of a FOR-NEXT loop.
200 FOR I% = 2% TO 40% STEP 2%
GOSUB 10000
\
NEXT I%
\
300 FOR I% = 1% TO 40% STEP 2%
GOSUB 10000
\
NEXT I%
\
400 FOR N = A TO (C+Sl) fA
GOSUB 10000
\
NEXT N
\

For I% = 2%,4%,6% ... 40% &
This statement executes 20 times &
and I% is left equal to 40%
For I% = 1%,3%,5% ... 39% &
This statement executes 20 times &
and I% is left equal to 39%
Expressions can be &
more than single terms &

Programming Information

5-19

NOTE

Implied FOR loops use less memory and execute faster than
FOR-NEXT loops. The following statements compare an
implied FOR-NEXT loop with an explicit FOR-NEXT loop:
10 R = R A 2% FOR I% = 1% TO 10 % ! Implied FOR loop

versus
10 FOR I% = 1% TO 10%
\ R = R A 2%
\ NEXT I%

A full FOR-NEXT loop &
that is larger and slower
than the implied FOR loop

See "Statement Modifiers" for more information.
FOR

FOR <variable> =<expression> [STEP <expression>] {=~
<condition>
Executes a loop while the condition that you specify is true, or until
the condition that you specify is true, depending on whether you use
WHILE or UNTIL.
450 FOR I = 1. STEP 3. WHILE I < 12
\
GOSUB 10000
\
NEXT I
470 J

\
\
\

FOR I = 1. STEP 3. UNTIL J
J=J+I
NEXT I

> 20

For I = 1, 4, 7, 10 &
Executes 4 times &
and I equals 13
Clear work variable &
For I = 1, 4, 7, 10 &
Executes 4 times &
and I equals 13, J equals 22

NOTE

Implied FOR-WHILE and FOR-UNTIL loops use less memory and execute faster. The following examples show an
implied FOR-WHILE loop and an implied FOR-UNTIL loop:
< 12

FOR-WHILE

= J + 1 FOR I = 1. STEP 3. UNTIL J > 20
See "Statement Modifiers" for more information.

FOR-UNTIL

450 GOSUB 10000 FOR I = 1. STEP 3. WHILE I
470 J

5-20

Programming Information

}

GET

{!E~J.<exp>, lr { BLOCK
<exp>
} ,.,,,..,.TT-'TT1'"
TTSTN£'1
1
RECORD <exp>
,,",,vun~ <exp>,u U \J <exp> J
'-"I

Reads the next sequential block from the file opened on the channel
designated by the first expression when used without the BLOCK or
RECORD option. Accesses a specific record or block when used with
the BLOCK or RECORD option.
120 GET 19%
Sequential read on channel 9
140 GET 12%, BLOCK 99. ! Read block 99 (record 99) on channel 4
180 GET 14%, RECORD 50%
200 GET 15% + SWAP%(3%), BLOCK 30% ! Read block 30 from channel &
5 into channel 3's buffer. BLOCK is a real number and &
\
! RECORD is an integer.
\

GOSUB <line number>

Transfers control to a subroutine beginning at the line number you
specify. When the subroutine finishes, by encountering a RETtJRN
statement, control returns to the statement following the GOSUB
statement.
190 GOSUB 2000
\

Perform the subroutine beginning at line 2000 &
and then return to the statement following GOSUB

GOTO <line number>

Transfers control to a specific line number, with no return expected.
100 GOTO 150
Transfer control to line 150, with no &
\
! return expected

THEN <statement>
}
IF <condition> { THEN <line number>
GOTO <line number>
Executes a statement or transfers control to another line if the condition you specify is true.
50
60
75
90
100

IF A > B OR B > C THEN PRINT "No"
IF FNA(R) = B THEN 250
IF L < X~2% AND L <> O. GOTO 1000
IF TEST% THEN GOTO 300
IF LEN(RESPONSE$) THEN PRINT "OK"

Two "conditions" tested
same as THEN GOTO 250
same as THEN GOTO 1000
if nonzero, GOTO 300
if not null, Print "OK"

Programming Information

5-21

IF <condition>

THEN <statement>
}
THEN <line number>
[ ELSE <statement>
{ GOTO <line number>
ELSE <line number>

Executes a statement or transfers control to another line if the condition you specify is true, or executes another statement if the condition
you specify is false.
200
\
220
230
\

IF B = A THEN PRINT 'EQUAL' ELSE PRINT 'NOT EQUAL' &
! IF-THEN-ELSE <statement>
IF B = A THEN 1000 ELSE 300 ! IF-THEN-ELSE <line number>
IF B = A GOTO 2000 ELSE PRINT 'B does not equal A' &
! IF-GOTO-ELSE

INPUT [#<expression>,]<variable list>

Provides data to a program while the program is executing. The data
can come from a device or file, depending on what you specify.
100 INPUT A$
200 INPUT "Enter your name";A$
300 INPUT '1%, ITEM$, PART

INPUT LINE [#<expression>,]<string variable>

Accepts a line of data as a single character string, including embedded
spaces and punctuation. This is different from nonnal string input,
where the comma, apostrophe, and single and double quotation marks
have special meanings.
300 INPUT LINE R$
400 INPUT LINE 18%, CUSTOMER$

KILL "<string>"

Deletes the file specification you specify in <string>. You must enclose
the file specification within quotation marks.
100 KILL 'OLD.DAT'

[LET] <varlable(s»

=<expression>

Assigns a value to each variable.
110 LET A% = 40%
120 B = 22.
130 C, FI, V(O) = 0

5-22

Programming Information

Multiple assignment

LSET <string var>[,<string var>, ... ] = <string>

Stores values in the variables without moving them from the 110 buffer.
If the new string is shorter than an existing string, LSET pads the

string with spaces on the right.
100 LSET B$

= 'XYZ'

{ZER} MAT <matrix name> = {CON} [(dim(s»)] {ION}

Creates initial values for matrix elements.
100 DIM B(15,10), A(lO), C%(5)
120 ~_~T C% = CON
130 MAT B% = IDN(10,10)
140 MAT B% = ZER(N,M)

MAT INPUT [#<expression>,] <list of matrices>

Accepts as input the value of each matrix element.
120 DIM B$(40), F1%(35)
150 OPEN "DB2: l'AT2 . OAT" FOR INPUT AS FILE #3%

180 MAT INPUT *3%, B$, F1%

MAT PRINT

MAT PRINT £/kexpression>J <matrix name> {~ }
Prints each element of a one- or two-dimensional matrix, except elements in row 0 and column o.
150 DIM A(20), B%(15,30)
200 MAT PRINT A,
250 MAT PRINT B%(10,25);
300 MAT PRINT #2%, A;

Print 20 elements, five on each line
Print 10-by-25 subset of B%, packed
Print on channel 2

MAT READ <list of matrices>

Reads values into all matrix elements from DATA statements.
100 DIM A(20), B$(32), C%(15,10)
200 MAT READ A, B$(25), C%

Programming Information

5-23

NAME <string> AS <string>

Renames or assigns protection codes to a disk file.
100 NAME "NONAME" AS "FILE1.DAT/PR:40"
200 NAME 'DL1:MATRIX.DAT' AS 'MATA1.DAT<48>'

NEXT [<variable>]

Signals the end of a loop that begins with FOR, UNTIL, or WHILE.
100 NEXT I%
200 NEXT N
300 NEXT

NEXT with a variable closes out the
FOR with that variable.
NEXT by itself closes UNTIL-NEXT or WHILE-NEXT loop

See the note under the FOR statement.
NOEXTEND

Puts your program into NOEXTEND mode until the program completes
its run or until the program encounters an EXTEND statement.
10

NOEXTEND! Set NOEXTEND mode for following statements

ON ERROR GOTO [<line number>]

Specifies the point in your program that assumes control when an error
occurs.
100 ON ERROR GOTO 19000 ! Indicates errors handled at line 19000
110 ON ERROR GOTO 0
! Disables error-handling routine

ON <expression> GOSU B <list of line numbers>

Transfers control to a subroutine beginning at one of several line
numbers, depending on the integer value of the expression.
230 ON X% - Y% GOSUB 2000, 2400, 3000 ! If X% - Y% = I, then &
\
! control goes to the subroutine beginning at line 2000. &
\
! If X% - Y% = 2, then control goes to line 2400, and so forth.

ON <expression> GOTO <list of line numbers>

Transfers control to one of several line numbers, depending on the
integer value of the expression.
150 ON X% GOTO 170, 570, 430, 300 ! IF X%=l, then control goes &
\
to line 170. ~f X%=2, then control goes to line 570, and so &
\
! forth.

5-24

Programming Information

OPEN

OPEN <string> lr f FOR INPUT
l FOR OUTPUT

Jl AS .1.4'"

,E[#]<expression>

[,RECORDSIZE <exp>][,CLUSTERSIZE <exp>] [,FILESIZE
<exp>][,MODE <exp>]
Associates a file or device with an 110 channel number.
100 OPEN 'LP:' FOR OUTPUT AS FILE #81%
200 OPEN "FOO.DAT" AS FILE *3%
300 OPEN 'DM1:DATA.TR' FOR INPUT AS FILE *10%, RECORDSIZE 1024%

PRINT [[#<expression>,] <list>]

Prints numeric or string data at your terminal or writes formatted
ASCII output to a disk file or other device.
130 PRINT
140 PRINT
150 PRINT
160 PRINT

! Produces CR/LF
"Beginning of output:";I, A*I
#2%, 'OUTPUT TO DEVICE';N%
"Title: ";TITLE$, "Ref #";R$

PRINT [#<expression>,] USING <string>, <list>

Tailors the output format. The PRINT USING control characters are:
For string data:

!
Prints the first character of the specified string.
\
Prints two plus the number of characters indicated by the spaces
between the backslashes.

Programming Information 5-25

For numeric data:
#

Prints a digit for each number sign indicated. Rounding (not truncation) is performed as necessary.

,
Prints a comma before every third digit to the left of the decimal point.
Prints a decimal point in the position you indicate.

$$
Prints a dollar sign immediately before the first digit of the number.
Also provides for the printing of one additional digit in the number.

Prints asterisks in the unused spaces to the left of the number. Also
acts as additional number characters (#).
Prints the sign of negative numbers after the number when you end
your numeric format field with a minus sign.
/\/\/\/\

Prints the number in E notation for floating point numbers.
550 PRINT USING '.t .• t',AA
700 PRINT t7%, USING B$, A,B,C

PUTt
}
PUT *<exp>, [ { BLOCK
RECORD<exp>
<exp>

1[,COUNT <exp>] [,USING

<exp>]

Writes the contents of the 1/0 buffer for the 1/0 channel into the next
sequential file block. The PUT statement writes a single block on the
device. For disk files, one PUT statement writes multiple disk blocks
when you use the RECORDSIZE option in the OPEN statement to
increase the I/O buffer size.
390 PUT '1%, COUNT 80% ! Note that BLOCK is a real number and &
\
! RECORD is an integer.

5-26

Programming Information

RANDOM[IZE]

Provides different random numbers every time you run a program.
Place the RANDOMIZE statement before the first RND function in the
program.
40 RANDOMIZE
100 RANDOM

READ <variable list>

Reads values included in a DATA statement and stores those values in
the corresponding variables of the READ statement.
100 READ A, B$, F1%, B(l%), R2

REM <message>

Informs BASIC-PLUS that <message> is a comment, which does not
affect program execution.
100 REM - This program plays solitaire

RESTORE

Recycles data contained in DATA statements. Mter you use RESTORE,
the next READ statement reads the data contained in the DATA
statement having the lowest line number.
100 RESTORE

RESUME [<line number>]

Ends an error handling routine and transfers program control to the
line number in which the error occurred, or optionally to a specified
line number.
1000
2000
3000

RESUME 0
RESUME
RESUME 200

Resume at line where error occurred
Equivalent to RESUME 0
Resume at line 200

RETURN

Ends a subroutine and transfers program control to the statement
following the last ON GOSUB or GOSUB statement executed.
375 RETURN

Programming Information

5-27

RSET <string var>[,<string var>, ... ]

=<string>

Stores values in the specified variables without moving the values from
the 1/0 buffer. If the new string is shorter than the existing string,
RSET pads the string with spaces on the left.
250 RSET C$

= "12345"

SLEEP <expression>

Suspends program execution for the specified number of seconds.
260 SLEEP 20%

! Suspend job for 20 seconds

STOP

Halts program execution but does not close 1/0 channels.
180 STOP

UNLOCK #<expression>

Releases the lock that an opened file, in update mode (MODE 1%),
places on accessed blocks.
500 UNLOCK 15%

UNTIL <condition>

Begins an UNTIL loop.
100 UNTIL LEN(A$) > 0%
110 NEXT
200 PRINT "Thanks for the response!"

WAIT <expression>

Sets a maximum period BASIC-PLUS waits for input from your tenninal. If you do not type a delimiter (RETURN, LINE FEED, ESCAPE,
or FORM FEED) within the specified number of seconds, program
execution continues and BASIC-PLUS displays the error message
?Keyboard WAIT exhausted.
520 WAIT 60% ! Wait 60 seconds for response to INPUT statement
530 INPUT Name$

5-28

Programming Information

WHILE <condition>

Begins a WHILE loop.
30 WHILE X < Y
40 PRINT "X IS LESS THAN Y"
50 X=X+1
60 NEXT

Statement Modifiers
This section describes BASIC-PLUS statement modifiers. Mter each
statement modifier format is a brief description of what the statement
modifier does, followed by examples of how to use the statement
modifier.
<statement> FOR <var>=<exp> TO <exp> [STEP <exp>]

[ {~~~~C }<condition>] 1
Creates an implied FOR loop.
175 LET B$(I%) = C$(I%) FOR I% = 1% TO J1%
190 READ A(I%) FOR I% = 0% TO 20% STEP J%

Executes a statement if the condition you specify is true.
100 PRINT T% IF T% > T1% ! Prints T% only if T% is greater than T1%

<statement> UNLESS <condition>

Executes a statement if the condition you specify is false.
350 PRINT A$ UNLESS Y% < 0% ! Prints A$ only if Y% &
\
! is greater than 0%

<statement> UNTIL <condition>

Executes a statement repeatedly, until the condition you specify is true.
1080 X=X+1 UNTIL X<>SQR(X**2%) ! Increments X by 1 until X &
\
! is not equal to the square root of X squared.
1200 PRINT X

Programming Information 5-29

<statement> WHILE <condition>

Executes a statement repeatedly, while the condition you specify is
true.
230 LET A(I%) = FNX(I%) WHILE A < 45.5 ! Sets the value of A(I%) &
\
! to FNX(I%) while A is less than 45.5

Variable Types
Table 5-2 describes BASIC-PLUS variable types. In EXTEND mode,
a variable name can consist of a letter followed by 0 to 29 additional
characters, each of which can be a letter, a digit, or a period. In
NOEXTEND mode, a variable name can consist of a letter, optionally
followed by a single digit.
Table 5-2:

Variable Types

Type

Variable Name

Examples

Floating-Point

A variable name with no suffix.

AIX3
Year. End

Integer

Any variable name followed by a % character.

B%,D%,
End. Of. File%

Character String

Any variable name followed by a $ character.

M$, R1$,
Last. Name$

Floating-Point Array

Any floating-point variable name followed by
one or two dimension numbers in parentheses.

S(4%)
V8(3%,3%)
Year. End( 12%)

Integer Array

Any integer variable name followed by one
or two dimension numbers in parentheses.

A%(2%),
R2%(2%,1%),
Unitso/o(912% )

Character String Array

Any string variable name followed by one or
two dimension numbers in parentheses.

C$(1%),
V1$( 4%,2%),
Zodiac$( 12%)

5-30

Programming Information

Functions
This section describes BASIC-PLUS-defined functions. Mter each
function format is a brief description of what the function does, followed
by examples of how to use the function.
ABS(X)

Returns the absolute value of X.
100 Y%=ABS(-4)

! Y% equals the absolute value of -4, which is 4

ASCII(A$)

Returns the ASCII value of the first character in string A$.
100 Y%=ASCII(A$)

! Y% equals the ASCII value for A, which is 65%

ATN(X)

Returns the arc tangent (in radians) of X.
150 Y=ATN(l.)

! Y= the arc tangent of one, which is

(PI/2)

BUFSIZ(N%)

Returns the buffer size, in bytes, of the file or device open on channel
N%. Returns zero if the channel is not open.
50 Y%=BUFSIZ(l%)
\

Y% equals the buffer size of the device or &
! file on channel 1%

CCPOS(XO/o)

Returns the current position of the print head for I/O channel X%.
Channel 0% is your terminal. CCPOS counts characters but does not
keep track of ESC sequences for different terminal types.
100 PRINT IF CCPOS(O%)<>O ! If the print head on the terminal &
\
! isn't already at the left hand margin, print a RETURN/LINE &
\
! FEED to put it there

CHR$(XO/o)

Returns the character corresponding to ASCII value X%.
100 Y$=CHR$(65%)
\

Y$ equals the character that has ASCII value &
! 65, which is uppercase A.

Programming Information

5-31

COMpO/o(A$,B$)

Returns the relative value representing the result of an arithmetic
comparison between numeric strings A$ and B$. Returns is -1% for
A$<B$, 0% for A$=B$, and 1% for A$>B$.
190 A$='20'
195 B$='10'
200 T%=COMP%(A$,B$)

T% equals 1%, because A$ is arithmetically &
greater than B$

COS(X)

Returns the cosine (in radians) ofX.
100 PRINT

COS (PI/4)

Prints the cosine of (PI/4), which is &
.707107

CVTo/o$(lo/o)

Maps an integer into a two-character string.
100 PRINT CVT%$(16706%)
Prints AB, which is the two-character &
\
! string equivalent to the integer 16706%

CVT$%(A$)

Maps the first two characters of A$ into an integer.
100 PRINT CVT$%('ABCD')
\

Prints 16706, which is the integer $
equivalent of the first two characters
AB.

CVTF$(X)

Depending on the math package on your system supports, maps a
floating-point number into a four- or eight-character string.
200 FIELD 18%, 2% AS Us, 2% AS CL$, 4% AS X$, 4% AS Y$
210 LSET U$ = CVT%$(U%)
Stores two integers (U% and CL%) and
220 LSET X$
CVTF$(X)
two floating-point numbers (X and Y) in
230 LSET Y$ = CVTF$(Y)
the I/O buffer for channel B

5-32

Programming Information

CVT$F(A$)

Depending on the math package your system supports, maps the first
four or eight characters of A$ into a floating-point number.
220
230
240
250

LET U% = CVT$%(U$)
LET CL% = CVT$%(CL$)
LET X = CVT$F(X$)
LET Y = CVT$F(Y$)

Retrieves data from the I/O buffer by
converting it from string to numeric
form

CVT$$(A$,IO/o)

Converts string A$, depending on the value of 1%.
100 A$ = 'abcde'
110 PRINT CVT$$(A$,32%)

! Prints ABC DE

Table 5-3 lists the values for the CVT$ function.
Table 5-3: 10/0 Values for CVT$ Function
1%
Effeet
1

Trim the 8th bit.

Discard spaces and tabs.

Discard RET, LF, FF, ESC, DEL, and fill or null characters.

Discard leading spaces and tabs.

Reduce spaces and tabs to one space.

Convert lowercase to uppercase.

Convert square brackets to parentheses. For example, "[" to "(" and

"]" to ")".
128

Discard trailing spaces and tabs.

256

Prevent alteration of characters inside single or double quotation
marks, except parity bit trimming.

DATE$( N%)

Returns the date string corresponding to the specified calendar date
N%. To determine the value of N% given a particular day of the year
and the year, use this formula:
N% = (day of year) + [(number of years since 1970)*1000].

Programming Information

5-33

For example, the value of N% for June 14, 1989 is:
N% = (165) + (19 * 1000) = 165 + 19000 = 19165
DATE$(19165%) returns 14-Jun-89. If your system default is the
numeric date fonnat, DATE$(19165%) returns 89.06.14.
2000 PRINT "The date is ";
2010 PRINT DATE$(19365%) ! Prints 31-Dec-89

DATE$(OO/o)

Returns the current date in one of two fonnats: for example, 09-Apr-89
or 89.04.09, depending on the date fonnat your system supports.
100 PRINT DATE$(O%)

! Prints the current date

DET

Returns the detenninant of X after an INV(X) operation.
100 DIM M(15,25), N(5,10), X(5,5)
110 MAT N=INV(X)
120 PRINT "DETERMINANT OF MATRIX X IS"; DET

DIF$(A$,B$)

Returns the numeric string equal to the arithmetic difference of A$ and
B$ (A$ - B$).
110 PRINT DIF$('5', '3')

Prints the numeric string 2

ERL
Returns the line number at which the last error occurred, if an ON
ERROR GOTO statement appears in the program.
120 PRINT ERL
Prints line number at which the last error &
\
! occurred

ERR
Returns the value associated with the last error encountered, if an ON
ERROR GOTO statement was active.
1000 PRINT ERR ! Prints numeric value of last error

5-34

Programming Information

EXP(X)

Returns the value of the mathematical constant "e" (2.71828) raised to
the Xth power.
200 Y=EXP(3.5)

FIX(X)

Returns the integer part of X, discarding any fractional part.
100 PRINT FIX(-3.14)

! PRINTS -3%

INSTR(N1 %,A$, B$)

Performs a search for substring B$ within string A$, beginning at
character position Nl %. Returns the character position of B$ if B$ is
in A$. Returns 0 if B$ is not in A$. Nl % is measured from the left end
ofA$.
2000 PRINT INSTR(3%,'ABCDEABCDE','B') ! Prints 7 because that &
\
is the character position of the first B found after 6'.
\
position 3.

INT(X)

Returns the largest integer in X that is less than or equal to X.
1000 PRINT INT(4.17), INT(-4.17)
\

Prints 4 for 4.17 and &
! -5 for -4.17

INV(X)

Returns the inverse of matrix X.
10 DIM X(15,25), N(5,10), M(5,5)
90 MAT N=INV(M)

LEFT(A$,N%)

Returns a substring of string A$, starting at the left end of A$ and
ending at the N%th character.
100 A$='BASIC-PLUS SPEAKS MY LANGUAGE!'
110 PRINT LEFT(A$,10%) ! PRINTS BASIC-PLUS

Programming Information

5-35

LEN(A$)

Returns the number of characters in A$, including blanks.
2000 PRINT LEN(A$)
\

! Prints an integer representing the number &
! of characters in string A$

LINE

Returns the line number of the statement being executed at the time of
a CTRUC interrupt.
100 IF LINE < 200 PRINT GOSUB 3000 ! If a CTRL/C was entered &
\
before line number 200, go to the subroutine beginning at &
\
! line 3000

LOG(X)

Returns the natural logarithm of X (log(e)X).
Prints natural logarithm of 10., which &

350 PRINT LOG(10.)
\

! is 2.30259

LOG10(X)

Returns the common logarithm of X (log(lO)X).
400 PRINT LOG10(100.)
\

! Prints common logarithm of 100.

which is 2

MAGTAPE(F%,P%,U%)

Performs special operations on magnetic tape.
MID(A$,N1 % ,N2 % )

Returns a substring of A$, starting at character position Nl % and
continuing for N2% characters. Nl % is measured from the left end of
A$.
1000 PRINT MID ('ABCDE' ,3%,2%)

Prints 'CD'

NUM

Returns the number of rows input or the number of elements in a
one-dimensional matrix, after input to a matrix.
2500 PRINT 'NUM = ';NUM ! Prints the number of rows or elements &
\
! for the one-dimensional matrix that just received input

5-36

Programming Information

NUM$(N%)

Returns a string of characters representing the value of l"{% as it would
be displayed by the PRINT statement.
500 PRINT NUM$(4%) ! Prints the string' 4 " with spaces before &
\
and after the numeric string. If the numeric string &
\
! represents a negative number, there is only a space after &
\
! the numeric string (for example, NUM$(-4%) is '-4 ').

NUM1$(N%)

Retu..rns a string of characters representing the value of N%. ~~1$
is similar to NUM$, but does not return spaces or E format results.
400 PRINT NUM1$(4%) ! Prints the string '4'; with no spaces &
\
! before or after the string.

NUM2

Returns the number of elements entered in the last row of a twodimensional matrix, after input to that matrix.
700 PRINT 'NUM2 =';NUM2 ! Prints the number of elements entered &
\
! in the last row

Returns the constant 3.14159 ...
550 INPUT A
560 IF A > PI GOTO 2000 ! If A is greater than 3.14159, transfers &
\
! control to line 2000

PLACE$(A$,P%)

Returns a numeric string equal to numeric string A$, rounded or
truncated to P% places.
100 PRINT PLACE$('3.14159',4%) ! Prints the numeric string &
\
'3.14159' with the fourth character position to the right &
\
! of the decimal point rounded off

Programming Information

5-37

POS(XO/o)

Returns the current position of the print head for I/O channel X%.
Channel 0% is your tenninal.
100 PRINT IF POS(O%)<>O ! If the print head on the terminal isn't &
\
! already at the left hand margin, print a RETURN/LINE FEED &
\
! to put it there. POS is the same as CCPOS but you should &
\
! use CCPOS for compatibility with BASIC-PLUS-2.

PROD$(A$,B$,PO/o)

Returns the product of numeric strings A$ and B$ (A$*B$) rounded or
truncated to P% places.
100 PRINT PROD$('3.14159','2' ,2%)

Prints numeric string '6.28'

QUO$(A$,B$,PO/o)

Returns the quotient of numeric strings A$ and B$ (A$IB$) rounded or
truncated to P% places.
100 PRINT QUO$('3.14159' ,'2' ,2%)

Prints numeric string '1.6'

RAD$(N%)

Converts the integer value of N% to a character string of up to three
characters. Use this function to convert from Radix-50 fonnat to ASCII.
See the RSTS / E Programming Manual for more infonnation.
12000 PRINT RAD$(l%)

! Prints the letter A

RECOUNT

Returns the number of characters read following an input operation.
Used primarily with non-file-structured devices.
100 IF RECOUNT > 0 GOTO 2000 ! Transfers control to line 2000 if &
\
! more than zero characters were read

RIGHT(A$,N%)

Returns a substring of string A$, starting at the N%th character and
ending at the right end of A$. N% is measured from the left end of A$.
250 PRINT RIGHT ('ABCDE' ,3%)

5-38

Programming Information

! Prints the string 'CDE'

RND

Retu....Y'!ls a pseudorandom number between 0 and 1.
100 Y%=INT(6*RNO+1)
\

! Y% equals a random number that simulates &
! the throw of a die

RND(X)

Returns a pseudorandom number between 0 and 1. X is a "dummy
value", and has no effect on the random number selected.
100 Y%=INT(6*RND(99)+1)

! Y% equals a random number that &

! simulates the throw of a die

SGN(X)

Returns the sign value of X. Returns +1 if positive, 0 if zero, and -1 if
negative.
100 PRINT SGN(-4.5)

! Prints -1

SIN(X)

Returns the sine (in radians) of X.
900 PRINT SIN(PI/2)

! Prints 1, which is the sine of PI/2

SPACES$(N%)

Returns a string of N% spaces; used to insert spaces within a character
string.
2000 PRINT SPACE$(5%);

! Prints 5 spaces

SPEC%

Performs special operations on disks, flexible diskettes, magnetic tapes,
terminals, and pseudo keyboards.
SQR(X)

Returns the square root of X.
100 PRINT SQR(16.)

! Prints the square root of 16., which is 4.

STATUS

Returns the status of the 110 channel most recently opened.

Programming Information

5-39

STRING$(N1 % ,N2% )

Returns a string of length Nl %. The string is composed of the character represented by the ASCII value N2%.
100 PRINT STRING$(10%,65%)

! Print the string 'AAAAAAAAAA'

SUM$(A$,B$)

Returns a numeric string equal to the sum of numeric strings A$ and
B$ (A$ + B$).
200 PRINT SUM$('1.5' ,'3.275')

Prints the string 4.775

SWAp%(N%)

Causes a byte swap operation on the two bytes in the integer variable
N%.
Prints 256

1000 PRINT SWAP%(l%)

SYS

Communicates with the RSTSIE monitor. See the RSTS / E Programming
Manual for more information.
TAB(XO/o)

Moves the print head to position X% in the current print record.
BASIC-PLUS ignores the function if the current position is beyond X%.
The first print position is 0%.
230 PRINT TAB(10%) ! Moves the print head to column 10 if the &
\
! print head position is currently less than 10, otherwise, &
\
! the print head remains where it is

TAN(X)

Returns the tangent (in radians) ofX.
240 PRINT TAN(PI/4)

! Prints the tangent of PI/4, which is 1.

TIME(O%)

Returns the clock time, in seconds as a floating-point number, since
midnight.
100 PRINT TIME (0%) /60

5-40

Programming Information

PL"lnts the clock time in minutes

TIME(1 % )

Returns the central processor time, in tenths of seconds, used by the
current job.
2000 PRINT TIME(1%)*10

Prints CPU time used in seconds

Returns the connect time, in minutes, that you have been logged into
the system for the current job.
120 IF TIME(2%) > 60 GOSu~ 2500 ! If the connect time is greater &
\
than an hour, transfer control to the subroutine beginning &
\
! at line 2500

TIME(3% )

Returns the number of kilocore ticks (KCTs) as a decimal number for
the current job.
3000 PRINT TIME(3%)

Print number of KCTs job has used thus far

TIME(4% )

Returns the number of minutes as a decimal number of device time for
the current job.
7800 PRINT TIME(4%) ! Prints number of device time minutes that &
\
! current job has used thus far

TIME$(OO/o)

Returns the current time of day as a character string.
270 PRINT TIME$(O%) ! Prints the time in one of two formats &
\
! depending on your system's default: 05:30 PM or 17:30

TIME$(N%)

Returns a string corresponding to the time of N% minutes before
midnight.
1000 PRINT TIME$(1440%) ! Prints the time in one of two formats &
\
! depending on your system's default: 12:00 PM or 00:00

Programming Information

5-41

VAL(A$)

Returns the numeric value of the string of numeric characters A$.
200 IF VAL(A$) > 100 GOTO 2000 ! If the numeric value of the &
\
! string A$ is greater than 100, control transfers to line &
\
! 2000

XLATE(A$,B$)

Translates A$ to a new string, using table string B$. See the
BASIC-PLUS Language Manual for more information.

Arithmetic, Numeric and String Relational Operators
Table 5-4 describes the BASIC-PLUS arithmetic, numeric, and string
relational operators.
Table 5-4:

Relational Operators

Operator

Example

Meaning
Arithmetic Operators

A+B

Adds B toA

A-B

Subtracts B from A

A*B

Multiplies A by B

AlB

Divides A by B

A"B

Calculates A to the B power

A**B

Calculates A to the B power

5-42

Programming Information

Table 5-4 (Cont.):
Operator

Relational Operators

Example

----------------------------

Meaning

Numeric Relational Operators

A=B

A is equal to B

A<B

A is less than B

A<=B

A is less than or equal to B

A>B

A is greater than B

A>=B

A is greater than or equal to B

A<>B

A is not equal to B

A==B

A is approximately equal to B

String Relational Operators

A$=B$

String A$ and B$ are equal, except for
possible trailing spaces

A$<B$

String A$ precedes string B$ in ASCII sequence

A$<=B$

String A$ equals or precedes string B$ in
ASCII sequence

A$>B$

String A$ follows string B$ in ASCII sequence

A$>=B$

String A$ equals or follows string B$ in
ASCII sequence

A$<>B$

Strings A$ and B$ are not equal

A$==B$

Strings A$ and B$ are identical, including
trailing spaces

Numeric and String Internal Data Storage
The next three sections describe how BASIC-PLUS internally stores
integer, floating-point, and string data.

Programming Information

5-43

Logical Operators
Truth Tables for Logical Operations

A AND B

A OR B

XOR

A EQV B

A IMP B

Examples:
1

Setting (turning on) bits:

85% =
28% =

0000000001010101
0000000000011100

85% OR 28% =

0000000001011101

Clearing (turning off) bits:

85% =
28% =

0000000001010101
0000000000011100

85% AND 28%

0000000000010100

5-44

Programming Information

~
~

NOTE

The NOT operator fljps the hits. To get NOT(N%)~ add 1
algebraically and then change the sign. For example:
Add 1
NOT 5%:

NOT -6%

-6%

Change Sign

+ 1 % = 6% ~ -6%
+ 1 % = -5 % ~

Logical (Boolean) values in BASIC-PLUS

Boolean

Testing by
BASIC-PLUS

Setting by
BASIC-PLUS

True

Nonzero numbers

Set to -1%

False

Zero

Set to 0%

For example, assume a BASIC-PLUS program that has the following
line:
100 IF A% THEN GOTO 200

If A% equals zero then the GOTO is not executed (A% is "false"). If A%
is nonzero, A% is "true" and control passes to line 200.
NOTE

You can use non-Boolean true values, but be careful. For instance, suppose that A$ = 'ABCD' and F$ = '$NOTICE.TXT'.
Consider the following statement:
IF LEN(A$) THEN 100

Control passes to line 100 because 4% (the length of A$) is
"true". Now consider the following statement:
IF INSTR(l%, F$, , .') THEN 100

Again, control passes to line 100 because F$ contains a
period ('.'), and is thus true.

Programming Information

5-45

Be careful, however, when combining non-Boolean TRUE
values (that is, true values other than -1%). For example:
IF LEN(A$) AND INSTR(O%, F$, , .') THEN 100

You might asswne that if the length of A$ is true (nonzero)
and string F$ contains a period, that the combined statements are true (true and true = true). This is not necessarily
the case. If the length of A$ is 4% and the period in F$ is
in the eighth position, for example, the 4% AND 8% = 0%,
which is false. Thus, non-Boolean true AND non-Boolean
true can equal false.
Keep in mind that the logical operators evaluate all 16 bits
of a PDP-11 word. The standard Boolean values are all bits
o for false, and all bits 1 (value -1%) for true.

Integer Data
BASIC-PLUS stores integer data in binary format. Each integer uses
one PDP-11 word (16 bits). Integer values can range from -32768% to
32767%. The following diagram shows the internal integer format:

Bit: 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S ~ high byte ~ ~ low byte ~

Bits 0 through 14 each correspond to a positive power of 2. That is, if a
1 occurs in bit position 5, then the value for that bit is (2"5) or (32). Bit
15 stores the number's sign; 0 means the nwnber is positive; 1 means
the nwnber is negative. Positive integers range from 0% to 32767%
and negative integers from -1 % to -32768%.

5-46

Programming Information

The following example shows you sample bit patterns for both positive
and negative integers:
Positive
Integer

Bit Pattern

Negative
Integer

Bit
Pattern

00000000 00000000

00000000 00000001

-1

11111111
11111111

00000000 00000010

-2

00000000 00000011

-3

11111111
11111110
11111111
11111101

+32767

01111111 11111111

-32768

10000000
00000000

Floating-Point Data
BASIC-PLUS stores floating-point data in binary format. The number
of PDP-II words that the floating-point number uses depends on the
math package that your system has:
•

•

If your system supports a single-precision math package, then each
floating-point number uses two PDP-II words. Single-precision
math lets you accurately represent up to six decimal digits.
If your system supports a double-precision math package, then each
floating-point number uses four PDP-II words. Double-precision
math lets you accurately represent up to fifteen decimal digits.

Regardless of the math package that your system supports, floatingpoint numbers can range from approximately 101\-38 to approximately
101\38.

Programming Information 5-47

The two diagrams that follow show the significance of each byte in
single-precision and double-precision math packages:
Single-Precision Math

Double-Precision Math

Byte 1

Byte 0

Byte 1

sl EXP

E I HIGH

MED

LOW

LOW-HIGH

LOW-LOW

Byte 3

Byte 2

LOWER-HIGH

LOWER-LOW

LOWEST -HIGH

LOWEST-LOW

Byte 7

Byte 6

EXP

Byte 0

HIGH

String Data
A string is a sequence of ASCII characters treated as a unit.
Theoretically, a string can contain up to 32767 characters, but in
reality, the string is limited by the amount of available memory.
The following diagram shows how strings are stored in a PDP-II
computer. The diagram uses the string 'ABCDEFG' (the numbers to
the left and right of the diagram are hypothetical PDP-II addresses;
the numbers inside the boxes represent the ASCII character codes for
each character in the string 'ABCDEFG').

66%

65%

68%

67%

70%

69%

72%

71%

Note that the word at address 10 contains the ASCII codes for A and
B. Byte 10 is the "low byte" of word 10, and byte 11 is the high byte of
word 10.

5-48

Programming Information

Reserved Keywords
Table 5-5 contains all words reserved for Digital versions of BASICPLUS and BASIC-PLUS-2. Do not use any of the listed words for a
variable or function name.
Table 5-5:

Reserved Keywords for BASIC-PLUS and BASIC-PLUS-2

ABS

DESC

ORGANIZATION

STR$

ABS%

DET

IMP

OUTPUT

STREAM

ACCESS

DEF$

I~YJ)EXED

PEEK

STRING$

ALLOW

DIM

INPUT

SUB

ALTERNATE

DIMENSION

INSTR

PLACE$

AND

DUPLICATES

INT

POS

SUB EXIT

APPEND

ECHO

INV

PRIMARY

SUM$

EDIT$

KEY

SWAP%

ASCII

ELSE

KILL

PROD$

SYS

ATN

END

LEFT

PUT

TAB

BACK

LEFT$

QUO$

TAN

BEL

EQV

LEN

RAD$

TAPE

BLOCK

ERL

LET

RANDOM

TASK

BLOCKSIZE

ERN$

RANDOMIZE

TEMPORARY

ERR

LINE

RCTRLC

THEN

BUCKETSIZE

ERROR

LINPUT

RCTRLO

TIME

BUFFER

ERT$

LOC

READ

TIME$

BUFSIZ

ESC

LOG

RECORD

EXIT

LOGIO

RECORDSIZE

TRM$

CALL

EXP

LSET

RECOUNT

TRN

CCPOS

EXTEND

MAGTAPE

REF

UNDEFINED

CHAIN

MAP

RELATIVE

UNLESS

CHANGE

FIELD

MAT

REM

UNLOCK

CHANGES

FILE

MID

RESET

UNTIL

CHR$

FILE$

MID$

RESTORE

UPDATE

Programming Information

5-49

Table 5-5 (Cont.):

Reserved Keywords for BASIC-PLUS and BASIC-PLUS-2

FILESIZE

MODE

RESUME

USEROPEN

CLUSTERSIZE

FILL

MODIFY

RETURN

USING

COM

FILL$

MOVE

RIGHT

VAL

COMMON

FILL%

NAME

RIGHT$

VAL%

COMP%

FIND

RND

VALUE

CON

FIX.

NOCHANGES

RSET

VARIABLE

CONNECT

FIXED

NODUPLICATES

SCRATCH

VIRTUAL

CONTIGUOUS

FNEND

NOECHO

SEG%

COS

FNEXIT

NONE

SEQUENTIAL

WAIT

COUNT

FOR

NOREWIND

SGN

WHILE

FORMAT$

NOSPAN

WINDOWSIZE

CTRLC

FROM

NOT

SIN

WRITE

CVT$$

FSP$

NUL$

SLEEP

WRKMAP

CVT$%

FSS$

NUM

XLATE

CVT$F

NUM$

XOR
ZER

CVT%$

GET

NUMl$

SPACE$

CVTF$

NUM2

SPAN

DATA

GOSUB

SPEC

DATE$

GOTO

ONECHR

SQR

DEF

ONERROR

STATUS

DELETE

OPEN

STEP

DENSITY

IDN

STOP

BASIC-PLUS Cross-Reference Program (BPCREF)
The BPCREF (BASIC-PLUS Cross Reference) program produces a
cross-reference listing of a translated BASIC-PLUS (.BAC) program.
When you enter BPCREF, you must specify the files you want processed.

5-50

Programming Information

To Run the Program
RUN $BPCREF

Format

BPCREF command? output.crf=input.bac[,input.bas][/switches]
where:
output.crf

Is the cross-reference listing file

input.bac

Is the translated file to process

input.bas

Is the source file to include in the listing

Iswitches

One or more optional qualifiers

Usage Notes

You do not have to specify output. If you do not specify output, do not
specify the equal sign (=). BPCREF automatically produces an output
file having the same name as the input file, but having the .CRF file
type.
BPCREF Switches

IHEL[P]
Displays information about BPCREF command formats.
INOD[ELETE]
Informs the spooling program not to delete the output files after
printing.
INOH[EADER]
Omits header lines in the output file. The resulting .CRF file is more
suitable as an input file to the FILCOM program.
IP[AGE]:nnn
Specifies nnn as the number of lines per page to print in the output
listing. The default is 60 lines per page.
IQ[UEUE]
Automatically queues the output file to the line printer. BPCREF
deletes the output file after printing unless you use the INODELETE
switch.

Programming Information

5-51

IS[OURCE]
Includes the source file in the output file. Use this switch when the
.BAS file is in the same account and has the same file name as the
.BAC file. Otherwise, specify the source file in the BPCREF command.
IW[IDTH]:nnn
Sets the width of the cross reference listing to nnn columns per line.
The default width is 132 columns; the minimum width is 72 columns.
IGL[OW]:nnn
IGH[IGH]:nnn
Used as a pair, these switches specify a global listing. BPCREF prints
line numbers and variables referenced both inside and outside the
program boundaries indicated by the line numbers nnn. BPCREF does
print line numbers or variables referenced only inside or outside the
boundaries. The default value for IGL is 0 and the default value for
IGH is 32767.
ILL[OW]:nnn ILH[IGH]:nnn
Used as a pair, these switches specify a local listing. BPCREF prints
the line numbers and variables referenced inside the program boundaries indicated by the line numbers nnn. BPCREF does not print line
numbers or variables referenced outside the boundaries or referenced
both inside and outside the boundaries. The default value for ILL is 0
and the default value for ILH is 32767.
INO[CREF]
Omits the full cross-reference listing. Use it when you want only a
local or global listing.

Devices
This section contains the MODE value, RECORD value, and SPEC%
information for six devices:

•
•
•
•
•
•
5-52

Disks
Flexible diskettes
Magnetic tapes
Line printers
'Thrminals
Pseudo keyboards

Programming Information

Disks
Table 5-6 and Table 5-7 list the MODE values for tile-structured and
non-tile-structured disk access.
Table 5-6:
Decimal

MODE Values for File-Structured Disk Access (FIRQ8 +
FQMODE)
Octal

Function

Normal read/write

Update

Append

Guarded update

Special extend (RSTSIE updates file's size and
retrieval pointers during extend operations)

16.

Create contiguous file

32.

Create tentative file

64.

100

Create contiguous file conditionally

128.

200

No supersede

256.

400

Random data caching (requires TUNE privilege)

512.

1000

Create file and place at beginning of directory
(with 2000)

1024.

2000

Create file and place at end of directory

2048.

4000

Sequential data caching (with 400)

4096.

10000

Read normally regardless

8192.

20000

Open file read-only

16384.

40000

Write UFO (requires WRTNFS privilege)

Programming Information

5-53

Table 5-7:

MODE Values for Non-File-Structured Disk Access (FIRQ8
+ FQMODE)

Decimal

Octal

Function
Access device clusters.

128.

200

Access disk blocks.

512.

1000

Read beyond last writable portion of disk;
suppress error logging (RSTSIE uses this mode
in its online DSKINT program. Digital does
not recommend this for general use).

16384.

40000

Write to a mounted disk (requires WRTNFS
and SYSMOD privileges).

SPEC% Function for Disks
The SPEC% function for disk files has the fonnat:
VALUE%=SPEC%(FUNCTION%, BLOCK, CHANNEL%, 0%)
where:

5-54

VALUE%

Depends on the particular function code you specify in
FUNCTION%. In most cases, VALUE% is equal to the
BLOCK parameter.

FUNCTION%

Is a function code that specifies the desired operation.
During normal 110 operations, a block, or range of blocks, is
implicitly locked when you read the file with a BASIC-PLUS
GET statement. The SPEC% function allows you to convert
implicit locks to explicit locks and to release selected locked
blocks. The code specified in FUNCTION% determines the
use of SPEC%. The codes are:

Programming Information

FUNCTION% = 0%

Releases all locked blocks.

FUNCTION% = 1%

Releases the current implicit lock.

FUNCTION% = 2%

Converts the current implicit lock
to an explicit lock.

FUNCTION% = 3%

Releases the explicitly locked
block specified in the BLOCK
parameter. If BLOCK is 0, all explicitly locked blocks are released.
However~ implicitly locked blocks
remain locked.

FUNCTION% = 4%

Converts an implicit lock to an
explicit lock and release the
implicit lock.

BLOCK

Specifies the starting block number for releasing an explicit
lock. Note that BLOCK must be a floating-point number.

CHANNEL%

Is the 110 channel on which the operation is to be performed.

Is the handler index for disk devices.

Flexible Diskettes
Table 5-8 and Table 5-9 list the MODE and RECORD values for
flexible diskettes.
Table 5-8:
Decimal

MODE Values for Flexible Diskettes (FIRQB + FQMODE)
Octal
Function

16384.

40000

Read and write in block mode (default)
Read and write in sector mode

Programming Information

5-55

Table 5-9:
Decimal

RECORD Values for Flexible Diskettes (XRB + XRBLK)
Octal
Function

8192.

Access logical record 0

16384.

20000
40000

32767.+1.

100000

Perlorm this 110 operation in block mode

Write deleted data mark

SPEC% Function for Flexible Diskettes
The SPEC% function for flexible diskettes has the fonnat:
VALUE%=SPEC%(FUNCTION%,PARAMETER,CHANNEL%,18%)
where:
VALUE

5-56

Programming Information

Depends on the function code you specify in FUNCTION%.

FUNCTION%

Is a function code that. specifies the de~dred operation. The
codes are:
Returns the density of the curFUNCTION% = 0%
rently mounted diskette in the
format:
DENSITY% = VALUE% AND
255%
If DENSITY%=l %, the diskette is
single-density; if DENSITY%=2%,
the diskette is double-density.

Note that PA-'R-..A_"METER must
also be o.
FUNCTION% = 1%

Causes the diskette driver to
recompute density. If the diskette
has been changed in the drive
without closing and reopening
the 110 channel, issue this code
prior to any 110 operation on
the diskette. This function also
returns the computed density as
described in FUNCTION%=O%.
Note that PARAMETER must be

O.
FUNCTION% = 2%

Reformats the current diskette
to the density in PARAMETER.
PARAMETER equals 1 for singledensity and 2 for double-density.
Note that this operation is allowed only on RX02 drives and
that any data on the diskette
before the operation is lost.

PARAMETER

See the previous description of FUNCTION%.

CHANNEL%

Is the 110 channel on which the operation is to be performed.

18%

Is the handler index for flexible diskettes.

Programming Information

5-57

Magnetic Tape
Table 5-10 lists the MODE values for file-structured magnetic tapes.
Table 5-10:

MODE Values for File-Structured Magnetic Tape (FIRQB
+ FQMODE)

Decimal

Octal

Function

Read file label at current tape position

Do not rewind tape when searching for file

16.

Write over existing file

32.

Rewind tape before searching for file

64.

100

Rewind on CLOSE

128.

200

Open for append

512.

1000

Write new file label without searching

1024.

2000

For ANSI tapes. When record length (values

o - 4095) of the clustersize is 0, set the record
length equal to the value specified for filesize
16384.

40000

Search for DOS-formatted file label

24576.

60000

Search for ANSI-formatted file label

MODE Values for Non-File-Structured Magnetic Tape (FIRQB +
FQMODE)
MODE values in non-file-structured magnetic tape processing have the
format:
MODE(FIRQB+FQMODE) = D + P + S
where:

5-58

D(density)

Is 12.(14) for 800 bpi and 256.(400) for 1600 bpi, phaseencoded.

P(parity)

Is 0.(0) for odd and 1.(1) for even. Digital recommends the
use of odd parity, because you cannot write binary data
when you use even parity.

Programming Information

S(stay)

Is 0.(0) to clear MODE value aft.er CLOSE and 8192,(20000)
to retain MODE value after CLOSE.

SPEC% Function for Magnetic Tape
The SPEC% function for magnetic tape has the format:
VALUE%=SPEC%(FUNCTION%,PARAMETER,CHANNEL%,14%)
where:
VALUE%

Depends on the function code specified in FUNCTION%.

FUNCTION%

Is the function code. The SPEC% function performs various
operations on tapes as determined by the FUNCTION%
code. These codes are:
Rewinds and puts it off line
FUNCTION% = 1%
FUNCTION% = 2%
Writes tape mark
FUNCTION% = 3%
Rewinds
Skips record
FUNCTION% = 4%
Backspaces over record
FUNCTION% = 5%
Sets density and parity
FUNCTION% = 6%
Returns tape status function
FUNCTION% = 7%
Returns file characteristics
FUNCTION% = 8%
Rewinds on CLOSE
FUNCTION% = 9%
Writes EOV labels on CLOSE
FUNCTION% = 10%
Acknowledges error condition
FUNCTION% = 11%
(for asynchronous 110)
Sets extended density
FUNCTION% = 12%

PARAMETER

Depends on the function code specified in FUNCTION%.

CHANNEL%

Is the 110 channel on which the operation is to be performed.

14%

Is the handler index for magnetic tape.

Line Printers
Table 5-11 and Table 5-12 list the MODE and RECORD values for line
printers.

Programming Information 5-59

5-60

Table 5-11:

MODE Values for Line Printers (FIRQB + FQMODE)

Decimal

Octal

Function

1. to 127.

1 to 177

Sets form length to number of lines per page
for software formatting (512., 1000) and automatic page skip (2048., 4000). (This is the
QUE system program's LPFORM option.)

128.

200

Changes the character 0 (zero) to 0 (letter 0).

256.

400

Truncates lines that are longer than unit was
configured for instead of printing the rest of
the line on the next physical line on the page.

512.

1000

Enables software formatting. Forms control
characters are >= 200(8).

1024.

2000

Translates lowercase characters to uppercase
characters. Applies only to uppercase and
lowercase line printers.

2048.

4000

Skips six lines (that is, skips over perforation
line) at the bottom of each form.

4096.

10000

Moves paper to top of hardware form.

8192.

20000

Suppresses form feed on close.

Table 5-12:

RECORD Values for Line Printers (XRB + XRMODE)

Decimal

Octal

Function

Prints over perforation (disables MODE 4000
for this output step).

Does not return control to program until output
is complete or an error occurs.

Clears pending output buffers before buffering
characters for the request.

32.

Truncates long lines (enables MODE 256% for
this output step).

4096

10000

Enables binary output, pass all characters to
the device "as is".

Programming Information

Table 5-12 (Cont.):
Decimal

RECORD Values for Line Printers (XRB +
XRMODE)
Function
Octal

8192.

20000

Returns control to program if output stall
is to occur. (See .WRITE directive for more
information.)

Terminals
Table 5-13, Table 5-14, and Table 5-15 list the MODE and RECORD
values for terminals and terminal input/output.
Table 5-13:
Decimal

MODE Values for Terminals (FIRae + FaMOD)
Octal
Function

Enables binary input from a terminal

Is reserved for TECO

Suppresses automatic CRILF at right margin

Enables echo control (turns off other modes
and automatically enables MODE 4)

16.

Guards program against CTRUC interruption
and dial-up line hibernation

32.

Enables incoming XONIXOFF processing

64.

100

Is reserved

128.

200

Enables use of RUBOUT as a delimiter on
video terminals

256.

400

Sets escape sequence mode

512.

1000

Uses no conditional sleep mode

16384

40000

Enables transparent control character output

Programming Information

5-61

Table 5-14: RECORD Values for Terminal Input (XRB + XRMOD)
Decimal and Octal
Values
Function
8192.
20000

Performs conditional input (executes input request
without waiting for data to be available).

32767.+1.+K
100000+K

Performs multiterminal service input from assigned
keyboard number K

32767.+ 1.+16384.+S
140000+S

Performs multiterminal service input from any
assigned keyboard:
S=0
Waits until input is available
from any terminal. The err ?Data
error on device may occur due to
a race condition with CTRUC.

Table 5-15:
Decimal

5-62

1.<S<255.
1<S<377

Waits up to S seconds for input
from any terminal and then
return ?Data error on device if no
input is available.

S = 8192.
S = 20000

Requests input immediately;
return ?Data error on device if no
input is pending.

RECORD Values for Terminal Output (XRB + XRMOD)
Octal
Function

256.

400

Declares echo control field (use
with MODE 10).

4096.

10000

Outputs binary data to terminal.

8192.

20000

Returns control to program if output stall is to occur. (See .WRITE
directive for more information.)

16384.

40000

Uses transparent control character output.

32767.+1.+K

100000+K

Performs multiterminal service
output to assigned keyboard K.

Programming Information

SPEC% Function for Terminals
The SPEC% function for terminals has the format:
VALUE%=SPEC%(FUNCTION%,PARAMETER,CHANNEL%,2%)
where:
VALUE%

Depends on the function code specified in FUNCTION%.

FUNCTION%

Is the function code. The SPEC% function performs various
operations on terminals as determined by the FUNCTION%
code. These codes are:
FUNCTION% = 0
Cancels CtrllO
FUNCTION% = 1
Sets tape mode
FUNCTION% = 2
Enables echo and clear tape mode
FUNCTION% = 3
Disables echo
FUNCTION% = 4
Sets ODT mode
FUNCTION% = 7
Cancels all type ahead
FUNCTION% = 9
Clears all private delimiters

PARAMETER

Specifies the terminal on which the operation is to take
place. If PARAMETER is 0, the operation is performed
on the currently open terminal. If you specify a keyboard
number in PARAMETER, the operation is performed on
that terminal. Note that the keyboard must be assigned to
the calling job but must not be open.

CHANNEL%

Specifies the 1/0 channel for the terminal in PARAMETER.

Is the handler index for terminals.

Programming Information

5-63

Pseudo Keyboards
Table 5-16 and Table 5-17 list the MODE and RECORD values for
pseudo keyboards.
Table 5-16:

MODE Values for Pseudo Keyboards (FIRQB + FQMODE)

Decimal

Octal

Function

Kills controlled job when the pseudo keyboard is
closed

Detaches controlled job when the pseudo keyboard is
closed

16.

Creates a new pseudo keyboard when used with PKO

Table 5-17:

RECORD Option Bit Values for Pseudo Keyboard Output
(XRB + XRMOD)
Value

5-64

Bit

Decimal

Octal

Result

If set, the system does not check job
status before sending data to the pseudo
keyboard.

If set, the system tests whether pseudo
keyboard is waiting for a system command (CTRIJC state) or is waiting for
program input (KB wait state).

If set, the system does not send data to
the pseudo keyboard but instead returns
control to the controlling job.

If set, and there are no small buffers for
keyboard input, the system waits until
small buffers are available. However,
your program receives the NO ROOM
error if the output buffer chain is full.

16.

If set, the system kills the job currently
running at the pseudo keyboard.

Programming Information

SPEC% Function for Pseudo Keyboards
The SPEC% function for pseudo keyboards has the format:
VALUE% =SPEC%(O%, PARAMETER%, CHANNEL%, 16%)
where:
VALUE%

Is a flag word that contains information about the controlled
job's keyboard. By testing bit 5 in VALUE%, you can
determine whether keyboard echo is enabled or disabled.
The tests are:
VALUE% AND 32% <> 0% Keyboard echo is disabled
VALUE% AND 32% = 0% Keyboard echo is enabled

PARAMETER%

Specifies the operation to perform:
0%
Reads the flag word
255%
Enables echo
-1%
Disables echo
Specifies the I/O channel where the pseudo keyboard is
open.
Is the device handler index for pseudo keyboards.

16%

Character Sets
This section contains the decimal and octal numerics for the following
character sets:

•
•
•

ASCII
RADIX-50
8-BIT

RADIX-50 Character/Position Table
This format allows three characters to be stored as a two-byte integer
(one 16-bit word). The RAD$ function converts a Radix-50 word to its
three-character representation.

Programming Information

5-65

Table 5-18 shows the complete set of characters that can be represented in Radix-50 format, their ASCII octal equivalents, and the
Radix-50 value for each character.
Table 5-18:
Character

RADIX-50 Character/Position Numeric Values
ASCnOCTAL
EQUIVALENT
RADIX-50 Equivalent (Octal)

space

A-Z

101-132

1-32

0-9

60-71

36-47

The following table lets you easily translate between the ASCII character set and its Radix-50 equivalents based on position within a string.
The table contains the decimal value of each character as well as its
octal value.

5-66

Programming Information

Table 5-19:

Single
or First
Character

A
B
C

E
F
G

I
I

L
M
N
0
P
Q
R

S
T
U
V
W

X
y

Z
$

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

ASCII-to-RADIX-50 Conversion

Octal

Decimal

000001
006200
011300
014400
017500
022600
025700
031000
034100
037200
042300
045400
I 050500
053600
056700
062000
065100
070200
073300
076400
101500
104600
107700
113000
116100
121200
124300
127400
132500
135600
140700
144000
147100
152200
155300
160400
163500
166600
171700

1600
3200
4800
6400
8000
9600
11200
12800
14400
16000
17600
19200
20800
22400
24000
25600
27200
28800
30400
32000
33600
35200
36800
38400
40000
41600
43200
44800
46400
48000
49600
51200
52800
54400
56000
57600
59200
60800
62400

Second
Character

A
B
C

E
F
G

L
M
N
0
P
Q
R

S
T
U
V
W

X
y

Z
$

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

I
I

Octal

Decimal

000050
000120
000170
000240
000310
000360
000430
000500
000550
000620
000670
000740
001010
001060
001130
001200
001250
001320
001370
001440
001510
001560
001630
001700
001750
002020
002070
002140
002210
002260
002330
002400
002450
002520
002570
002640
002710
002760
003030

40
80
120
160
200
240
280
320
360
400
440
480
520
560
600
640
680
720
760
800
840
880
920
%0
1000
1040
1080
1120
1160
1200
1240
1280
1320
1360
1400
1440
1480
1520
1560

I
I

Third
Character

A
B
C

E
F
G

I
I

L
M
N
0

P
Q
R

S
T
U
V
W

X
Y
Z
$

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

I
I

Octal

Decimal

000001
000002
000003
000004
000005
000006
000007
000010
000011
000012
000013
000014
000015
000016
000017
000020
000021
000022
000023
000024
000025
000026
000027
000030
000031
000032
000033
000034
000035
000036
000037
000040
000041
000042
000043

1
2
3
4
5
6

000044

000045
000046
000047

I
I

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
i6

I
I

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Programming Information

5-67

Table 5-20:

ASCII Character Set

ASCII
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

Octal

Character

000

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT

001
002
003
004
005
006

007
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
040
041
042
043

LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
SP
!
"
#

Remarks
Null, FILL character
CTRL/A
CTRL/B
CTRL/C
End of transmission, CTRLlD
CTRL/E
CTRL/F
Bell, CTRLlG
Backspace, CTRL/H
Horizontal tab, CTRLlI
Line feed, CTRL/ J
Vertical tab, CTRL/K
Form feed, page, CTRL/L
Carriage return, CTRL/M
CTRL/N
CTRL/O
CTRL/P
CTRL/Q" , XON
CTRL/R
CTRL/S" ", XOFF
CTRL/T
CTRL/U
CTRL/V
CTRL/W
CTRL/X
CTRL/Y
CTRL/Z, end of file
Escape"" "
File Separator
Group Separator
Record Separator
Unit Separator
Space or blank
Exclamation point
Quotation mark
Number sign

"CTRL/Q, or XON, resumes output if the TTSYNC terminal characteristic is set.
"'CTRL/S, or XOFF, stops output if the TTSYNC terminal characteristic is set .
• • " AL TMODE(ASCII 125) or PREFIX (ASCII 126) keys, which appear on some terminals,
are translated interna!!1J into ESCAPE if the AL T MODE terminal characteristic is set.

5-68

Programming Information

Table 5-20 (Cont.):

ASCII Character Set

ASCII

Decimal

Octal

36
37

044
045
046
047
050
051
052

39
40
41
42
43

..... ,..,.,

59
60
61
62
63
64

65
66

67
68
69

Dollar sign
Percent sign
I Ampersand
Apostrophe
Left parenthesis
Right parenthesis
Asterisk
Plus
Comma
Hyphen or minus
Period or decimal point
Slash
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Colon
Semicolon
Left angle bracket, "less than" sign
Equal sign
Right angle bracket, "greater than" sign
Question mark
At sign
Uppercase A
Uppercase B
Uppercase C
Uppercase D
Uppercase E

(
)

055
056
057
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
100
101
102
103
104
105

I 054

47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

$
%

vo.:>

44
45

Remarks

Character

/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;

<
=

>
?
@

A
B
C
D
E

Programming Information

5-69

Table 5-20 (Cont.):

ASCII Character Set

ASCII

Decimal

Octal

Character

70
71

106
107
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147

F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84

85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103

5-70

a
P

R
S
T
U
V
W
X
y

Z
[

1
"-

a
b
c
d
e
f
g

Programming Information

Remarks
Uppercase F
Uppercase G
Uppercase H
Uppercase I
Uppercase J
Uppercase K
Uppercase L
Uppercase M
Uppercase N
Uppercase a
Uppercase P
Uppercase Q
Uppercase R
Uppercase S
Uppercase T
Uppercase U
Uppercase V
Uppercase W
Uppercase X
Uppercase Y
Uppercase Z
Left square bracket
Backslash
Right square bracket
Circumflex
Underscore
Grave accent
Lowercase a
Lowercase b
Lowercase c
Lowercase d
Lowercase e
Lowercase f
Lowercase g

Table 5-20 (Cont.):

ASCII Character Set

ASCII

Decimal

Octal

104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138

150
151
152
153
154
155

1"''-

100

157
160
161
162
163

h
i
j

k
m
n
0

p
q

164
165
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
210
211
212

Remarks

Character

u
v
w
x
y
z

DEL

IND
NEL
SSA
ESA
HTS
HTJ
VTS

Lowercase h
Lowercase i
Lowercase j
Lowercase k
Lowercase I
Lowercase m
Lowercase n
Lowercase 0
Lowercase p
Lowercase q
Lowercase r
Lowercase s
Lowercase t
Lowercase u
Lowercase v
Lowercase w
Lowercase x
Lowercase y
Lowercase z
Left brace
Vertical line
Right brace •••
Tilde •••
Delete
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Index
New line

Horizontal tab set
Vertical tab set

'CTRL/Q, or XON, resumes output if the TTSYNC terminal characteristic is set.
• 'CTRLlS, or XOFF, stops output if the TTSYNC terminal characteristic is set.
••• ALTMODE(ASCII 125) or PREFIX (ASCII 126) keys, which appear on some terminals,
are translated internally into ESCAPE if the ALT MODE terminal characteristic is set.

Programming Information

5-71

Table 5-20 (Cont.):

ASCII Character Set

ASCII
Decimal

Octal

Character

139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172

213
214
215
216
217
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
250
251
252
253
254

PLD
PLU
RI
SS2
SS3
DCS
PU1
PU2
STS
CCH

5-72

Remarks
Partial line down
Partial line up
Reverse Index
Single shift 2
Single shift 3
Device control string

MW
SPA
EPA

CSI
ST
OSC
PM
APC
i
¢

V
§
J:I

Programming Information

Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Control sequence introducer
String terminator

Reserved
Inverted exclamation point
Cent sign
Pound sign
Reserved
Yen sign
Reserved
Section sign
General currency sign
Copyright sign
Feminine ordinal indicator
Angle quotation mark left
Reserved

Table 5-20 (Cont.j:

ASCII Character Set

ASCII
Decimal

Octal

173
174
175

255
256
257
26u261
262
263

176

177
178
179

~ov

~O'T

181
182
183

265
266
267

184

270

185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206

271
272
273
274
275
276
277
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
310
311
312
313
314
315
316

Character

Remarks
Reserved
Reserved
I Reserved
Degree sign
Plus/minus sign
Superscript 2
Superscript 3
neserveu
Micro sign
Paragraph sign, pilcrow
Middle dot
Reserved
Superscript 1
Masculine ordinal indicator
Angle quotation mark right
Fraction one quarter
Fraction one half
Reserved
Inverted question mark
Uppercase A with grave accent
Uppercase A with acute accent
Uppercase A with circumflex accent
Uppercase A with tilde
Uppercase A with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Uppercase A with ring
Uppercase A with dipthong
Uppercase C with cedilla
Uppercase E with grave accent
Uppercase E with acute accent
Uppercase E with circumflex accent
Uppercase E with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Uppercase I with grave accent
Uppercase I with acute accent
Uppercase I with circumflex accent

I
I

»
Ij4
Ij2
<-

A
A
A
A
A
A
f(

E
E
E
E
1
f

Programming information

5-73

Table 5-20 (Cont.):

ASCII Character Set

ASCII
Decimal

Octal

Character

207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240

317
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
340
341
342
343

5-74

344

345
346
347
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
360

b
6
6

a
b

CE
(/)

U
0

0
0

Y
A

a
a

ill
~

e
e

e
i
i
i
i

Programming Information

Remarks
Uppercase I with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Reserved
Uppercase N with tilde
Uppercase 0 with grave accent
Uppercase 0 with acute accent
Uppercase 0 with circumflex accent
Uppercase 0 with tilde
Uppercase 0 with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Uppercase OE ligature
Uppercase 0 with slash
Uppercase U with grave accent
Uppercase U with acute accent
Uppercase U with circumflex accent
Uppercase U with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Uppercase Y with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Reserved
German lowercase sharp s
lowercase a with grave accent
lowercase a with acute accent
lowercase a with circumflex accent
lowercase a with tilde
Lowercase a with diaeresis or umlaut mark
lowercase a with ring
lowercase ae dipthong
lowercase c with cedilla
lowercase e with grave accent
lowercase e with acute accent
lowercase e with circumflex accent
lowercase e with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Lowercase i with grave accent
lowercase i with acute accent
lowercase i with circumflex accent
lowercase i with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Reserved

Table 5-20 (Cont.):

ASCII Character Set

ASCII

Decimal

Octal

241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

361
362
363
364
365
366
367
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377

Character

n
I

0
6
0

0
0
00

{Il

U
U
U
u

Remarks
Lowercase n with tilde
Lowercase 0 with grave accent
Lowercase 0 with acute accent
Lowercase 0 with circumflex accent
Lowercase 0 with tilde
Lowercase 0 with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Lowercase oe ligature
Lowercase 0 with slash
Lowercase u with grave accent
Lowercase u with acute accent
Lowercase u with circumflex accent
Lowercase u with diaeresis or umiaut mark
Lowercase y with diaeresis or umlaut mark
Reserved
Reserved

Programming Information

5-75

RSTS/E System Errors
Table 5-21 lists the severity standard in RSTSIE error messages.

Table 5-21 : Severity Standard in Error Messages
Character

Severity

Meaning

Warning

Execution of the program can continue but may not generate the
expected results.

Error

Execution cannot continue unless
you remove the cause of the error.

Severe Error

Execution cannot continue, and you
probably cannot remove the cause of
the error. In most cases, there is no
opportunity for recovery.

none

Information

A message beginning with neither a
question mark nor a percent is for
information only.

Table 5-22 lists the RSTSIE error messages.

Table 5-22:

RSTS/E Error Messages

Mnemonic

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

1
2

BADDIR
BADNAM

5-76

Full Error Text

??Bad directory for device
?Illegal file name

INUSE

?Account or device in use

NOROOM

?No room for user on device

NOSUCH

?Can't find file or account

NODEVC

?Not a valid device

NOTCLS

?IIO channel already open

NOTAVL

?Device not available

NOTOPN

PRVIOL

10
11
12

Programming Information

?IIO channel not open
?Protection violation

Table 5-22 (Cont.):

RSTS/E Error Messages

Mnemonic

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

Full Error Text

EOF

?End of file on device

ABORT

??Fatal system 110 failure

DATERR

?Data error on device

HNGDEV

?Device hung or write locked

HNGTrY

?Keyboard wait exhausted

FIEXST

?Name or account now exists

DTOOOF

?Too many open files on unit

BADFUO

?lllegal SYS() usage

INTLCK

?Disk block is interlocked

WRGPAK

?Pack IDs don't match

NOTMNT

?Disk pack is not mounted

PAKLCK

?Disk pack is locked out

BADCLU

?Illegal cluster size

PRIVAT

?Account does not exist

INTPAK

%Disk pack needs REBUILDing

BADPAK

??Disk pack mount error

DETKEY

?IIO to detached keyboard

CTRLCE

Programmable I\C trap

SATTBD

??Corrupted file structure

DEVNFS

?Device not file-structured

BADCNT

?lllegal byte count for 110

NOBUFS

?No buffer space available

B.4

?Odd address trap

B.10

?Reserved instruction trap

B.250

?Memory management violation

B.STAK

??SP stack overflow

B.SWAP

??Disk error during swap

B.PRTY

??Memory parity failure

Programming Information

5-77

Table 5-22 (Cont.):

5-78

RSTS/E Error Messages

Mnemonic

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

Full Error Text

MAGSEL

?Maptape select error

MAGRLE

?Maptape record length error

NRRTS

??Non-res run-time system

VCSERR

?Virtual buffer too large

VCAERR

?Virtual array not on disk

SIZERR

?Matrix or array too big

VCOERR

?Virtual array not yet open

BSERR

?lllegal I/O Channel

LINERR

?Line too long

FLTERR

%Floating point error

EXPERR

%Argument too large in EXP

FMTERR

%Data format error

FIXERR

%Integer error

BDNERR

%lllegal number

LOGERR

%lllegal argument in LOG

SQRERR

%Imaginary square roots

SUBERR

?Subscript out of range

MINVER

?Can't invert matrix

ODD

?Out of data

ONBAD

?ON statement out of range

NEDERR

?Not enough data in record

IOLERR

?Integer overflow, FOR loop

DIVBYO

%Division by 0

NORTS

?No run-time system

FIELDE

?FIELD overflows buffer

NORACS

100

?Not a random access device

NOTMTA

101

?lllegal MAGTAPE( ) usage

ERRERR

102

?Missing special feature

Programming Information

Table 5-22 (Cont.):

RSTS/E Error Messages

Mnemonic

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

Full Error Text

BADSWT

103

?lllegal switch usage

EOV

104

?End of volume

QUOTA

105

?Quota exceeded

106

??Unused error message 70

ST:MERR

107

?Statement not found

EXI'ITM

110

?RETURN without GOSlJB

EXITNR

111

?FNEND without function call

UNDFNI

112

?Undefined function called

COSERR

113

?lllegal symbol

TLOPNV

114

?lllegal verb

TLNZSP

115

?lllegal expression

TLNOIT

116

?lllegal mode mixing

TLIFFE

117

?lllegal IF statement

TLCONI

120

?Illegal conditional clause

TLNOTF

121

?lllegal function name

TLQDUM

122

?lllegal dummy variable

TLMFND

123

?lllegal FN redefinition

TLRNNM

124

?lllegalline number(s)

MODERR

125

?Modifier error

126

?Can't Compile Statement

OUTAS

127

?Expression too complicated

FUNERR

130

?Arguments don't match

TLTMAF

131

?Too many arguments

TLINCD

132

%Inconsistent function usage

CPNSDF

133

?lllegal DEF nesting

CPUPFR

134

?FOR without NEXT

CPUFNX

135

?NEXT without FOR

CPUPDF

136

?DEF without FNEND

Programming Information

5-79

Table 5-22 (Cont.): RSTS/E Error Messages
Decimal
Octal
Mnemonic
Value
Value
Full EITor Text
CPUPED

5-80

137

?FNEND without DEF

TLJNKY

140

?Literal string needed

TLNOFN

141

?Too few arguments

SASYNE

142

?Syntax error

SAFNOS

143

?String is needed

SASNOI

100

144

?Number is needed

TLURTP

101

145

?Data type error

TLXDIM

102

146

?1 or 2 dimensions only

FUCORE

103

147

??Program lost-Sorry

RESERR

104

150

?RESUME and no error

DIMED2

105

151

?Redimensioned array

TLIDIM

106

152

%Inconsistent subscript use

NOGOTO

107

153

?ON statement needs GOTO

EOSERR

108

154

?End of statement not seen

TLCNTD

109

155

?What?

TLPRNM

110

156

?Bad line number pair

EDBMCE

111

157

?Not enough available memory

EDEXON

112

160

?Execute only file

NRNERR

113

161

?Please use the RUN command

EDCONE

114

162

?Can't CONTinue

EDARSV

115

163

?File exists-RENAMEIREPLACE

PRERRS

116

164

?PRINT-USING fonnat error

UDMERR

117

165

?Matrix or array without DIM

PRNER1

118

166

?Bad number in PRINT-USING

NONOIM

119

167

?lllegal in immediate mode

PRNER2

120

170

?PRINT-USING buffer overflow

BADERR

121

171

?lllegal statement

DISERR

122

172

?lllegal FIELD variable

Programming Information

Table 5-22 (Cont.):
Mnemonic
STPERR
DlMERR
NOMATH
XCDCOR
SCAERR

RSTS/E Error Messages

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

123
124
125
126
127

173
174
175
176
177

128

200

?Tape records not A.t~SI

129

201

?Tape BOT detected

130

202

?Key not changeable

131
132
133

203
204
205
206
207
210
211

?No current record

212
213
214
215
216
217
220
221
222
223
224

?File is locked

225
226

?Not at end of file

134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150

Full Error Text
Stop
?Matrix dimension error
?Wrong math package
??Maximum memory exceeded
%SCALE factor interlock

?Record has been deleted
?lllegal usage for device
?Duplicate key detected
?lllegal usage
?lllegal or illogical access
?lllegal key attributes
?Invalid file options
?Index not initialized
?lllegal operation
?lllegal record on file
?Bad record identifier
?Invalid key of reference
?Key size too large
?Tape not ANSI labeled
?RECORD number exceeds max
?Bad RECORDSIZE on OPEN
?No primary key specified

Programming Information

5-81

Table 5-22 (Cont.):
Mnemonic

5-82

Programming Information

RSTS/E Error Messages

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

Full Error Text

151

227

?Key field beyond record end

152

230

?IIlogical record accessing

153

231

?Record already exists

154

232

?Recordlbucket locked

155

233

?Record not found

156

234

?Size of record invalid

157

235

?Record on file too big

158

236

?Primary key out of sequence

159

237

?Key larger than record

160

240

?File attributes not matched

161

241

?Move overflows buffer

162

242

?Cannot open file

163

243

?No file name

164

244

?Terminal fmt file required

165

245

?Cannot position to EOF

166

246

?Negative fill or string len

167

247

?IIlegal record format

168

250

?IIlegal ALLOW clause

169

251

??Unused ERROR message 169

170

252

?Indexed not fully optimized

171

253

?RRV not fully updated

172

254

?Record LOCK failed

173

255

?Invalid RFA field

174

256

?Unexpired file date

175

257

?Node name error

176

260

?Negative TAB not allowed

177

261

?Too much data in record

178

262

?OPEN error - file corrupted

Table 5-22 (Cont.):
Mnemonic

RSTS/E Error Messages

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

Full ElTor Text

179

263

??Unused ERROR message 179

180

264

?No support for op in task

181

265

?Decimal overflow

182

266

?Network operation rejected

183

267

?REMAP overflows buffer

184

270

?Unaligned REM..4.P variable

185

271

%RECORDSIZE overflows MAP

186

272

?Improper error handling

187

273

?TIlegal record lock clause

188

274

??Unused ERROR message 188

189

275

??U nused ERROR message 189

190

276

??Unused ERROR message 190

191

277

??Unused ERROR message 191

192

300

??Unused ERROR message 192

193

301

??Unused ERROR message 193

194

302

??Unused ERROR message 194

195

303

??Unused ERROR message 195

196

304

?REMAP string is not static

197

305

??Unused ERROR message 197

198

306

??Unused ERROR message 198

199

307

??Unused ERROR message 199

200

310

??Unused ERROR message 200

201

311

??Unused ERROR message 201

202

312

??Unused ERROR message 202

203

313

??Unused ERROR message 203

204

314

??Unused ERROR message 204

205

315

??Unused ERROR message 205

206

316

??Unused ERROR message 206

Programming Information

5-83

Table 5-22 (Cont.):
Mnemonic

5-84 Programming Information

RSTS/E Error Messages

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

Full Error Text

207

317

??Unused ERROR message 207

208

320

nUnused ERROR message 208

209

321

??Unused ERROR message 209

210

322

??Unused ERROR message 210

211

323

nUnused ERROR message 211

212

324

nUnused ERROR message 212

213

325

nUnused ERROR message 213

214

326

nUnused ERROR message 214

215

327

nUnused ERROR message 215

216

330

nUnused ERROR message 216

217

331

nUnused ERROR message 217

218

332

nUnused ERROR message 218

219

333

nUnused ERROR message 219

220

334

nUnused ERROR message 220

221

335

nUnused ERROR message 221

222

336

??Unused ERROR message 222

223

337

??Unused ERROR message 223

224

340

??Unused ERROR message 224

225

341

??Unused ERROR message 225

226

342

nUnused ERROR message 226

227

343

?String too long

228

344

?RECORDTYPES not matched

229

345

??Unused ERROR message 229

230

346

?No fields in image

231

347

?lllegal string image

232

350

?Null image

233

351

?lllegal numeric image

234

352

?Numeric image for string

Table 5-22 (Cont.):
Mnemonic

RSTS/E Error Messages

Decimal
Value

Octal
Value

Full Error Text

235

353

?String image for numeric

236

354

?TIME limit exceeded

237

355

?lst arg to SEQ$ > 2nd

238

356

?Arrays must be same DIM

239

357

?Arrays must be square

240

360

?Cannot change array DIMs

241

361

?Floating overflow

242

362

?Floating underflow

243

363

?CHAlN to non-existent line

244

364

?Exponentiation error

245

365

?Illegal exit from DEF*

246

366

?Error trap needs RESUME

247

367

?Illegal RESUME to SUBR

248

370

?Illegal subroutine return

249

371

?Argument out of bounds

250

372

?Not implemented

251

373

?Recursive subroutine call

252

374

?FILE ACP failure

253

375

?Directive error

254

376

??Unused ERROR message 254

255

377

??Unused ERROR message 255

Table 5-23 lists the RMS error messages.

Programming Information 5-85

Table 5-23:

RMS Error Messages

Mnemonic

Decimal
Value

Octal Value

Full Error Text

COMPLETION CODES
SU$SUC

000001

Operation succeeded

SU$DUP

000002

Inserted record has duplicate
key

SU$IDX

Error updating index

ER$ACC

-32
-48
-64
-80
-96

000003
177740

ER$ACT
ER$AID
ER$ALN
ER$ALQ

177720
177700
177660
177640

Activity precludes operation

Bad ANSI-format magtape file

Bad value in AID field
Bad mask in ALN field
Bad value in ALQ field

ER$ANI

-112

177620

ER$AOP

-128
-160

177600

Bad mask in AOP field

177540
177520
177500
177460
177430

Error reading attributes

177420
177400

Bad address in BPA field

ER$ATR

ER$BPS

-176
-192
-208
-232
-240
-256

ER$CCR

-288

177340

RAB already in use

ER$CHG

-304

177320

Illegal record key change

ER$CHK

ER$CUR

-384

177300
177260
177240
177220
177200

Bad bucket header

ER$CRE

-320
-336
-352
-368

ER$DAN

-416

177140

Bad value in DAN field

ER$ATW
ER$BKS
ER$BKZ
ER$BOF
ER$BPA

ER$CLS
ER$COD

5-86

File access error

Programming Information

Error writing attributes
Bad value in BKS field
Bad value in BKZ field
Beginning-of-file found
Bad value in BPS field

File processor error
Bad code in COD field
File processor error
Undefined current-record
context

Table 5-23 (Cont.):
Mnemonic

RMS Error Messages

Decimal
Value

Octal Value

Full Error Text

COMPLETION CODES
-432

177120

Record having RFA deleted

ER$DEV

-448

177100

Bad device specification

ER$DFW

-456

177070

File processor error

ER$DIR

-464

177060

Bad directory specification

ER$DME

-480

177040

Pool exhausted

ER$DNA

-488

177030

Bad address in DNA field

ER$DNF

-496

177020

No such directory

ER$DNR

-512

177000

Device not ready

ER$DPE

-520

176770

Device positioning error

ER$DTP

-528

176760

Bad code in DTP field

ER$DUP

-544

176740

Duplicate key not allowed

ER$ENV

-576

176700

Feature not in selected RMS11 environment

ER$EOF

-592

176660

End-of-file reached

ER$ESA

-600

176650

Bad address in ESA field

ER$ESL

-604

176644

Bad value in ESL field

ER$ESS

-608

176640

ESS field value too small

ER$EXP

-616

176630

File expiration date not yet
reached

ER$EXT

-624

176620

File processor error

ER$FAC

-656

176560

FAC field forbids operation

ER$DEL

ER$FAL

-664

176550

Operation not supported by
remote node

ER$FEX

-672

176540

File already exists

ER$FID

-680

177530

Bad value in FID field

ER$FLG

-688

176520

Bad mask in FLG field

ER$FLK

-704

176500

File locked by another task

Programming Information

5-87

Table 5-23 (Cont.): RMS Error Messages
Decimal
Octal Value Full Error Text
Value
Mnemonic
COMPLETION CODES

-712
-736
-752
-768
-776

176470
176440
176420
176400
176370

Bad address in FNA field

176360
176340

Device or file allocation failure

ER$IAN

-784
-800

Bad value in IAN field

ER$IDX

-816

176320

Index not initialized

ER$IFI

176300
176260
176220
176200

Bad value in IFI field

ER$IRC

-832
-848
-880
-896

ER$ISI

-912

Bad value in lSI field

ER$KBF
ER$KRF

-928
-944
-960

ER$KSZ

-976

176160
176140
176120
176100
176060
176040
176020
176000
175760
175750
175740
175710
175700

Bad value in LAN field

ER$FNA
ER$FNF
ER$FNM
ER$FOP
ER$FSS
ER$FUL

ER$lMX
ER$IOP

ER$KEY

ER$LAN
ER$LBL
ER$LBY
ER$LCH
ER$LEX
ER$LOC
ER$MEM
ER$MKD

5-88

Programming Information

-992
-1008
-1024
-1040
-1048
-1056
-1080
-1088

File not found
Bad file name
Bad mask in FOP field
Bad merged string

Too many XABs of same type
illegal operation for file
illegal record found in sequential file
Bad address in KBF field
Bad key
Bad value in KRF field
Bad value in KSZ field
Bad magtape label
Logical channel busy
Bad value in LCH field
Extension not needed
Bad value in LOC field
Memory address rollover
File processor error

Table 5-23 (Cont.): RMS Error Messages
Decimal
Mnemonic
Value
Octal Value Full Error Text
CO:MPLETION CODES
ER$MRN

-1104

175660

Bad value in MRN field or bad
record number

ER$MRS

175640
175630

Bad value in MRS field

ER$NAE

-1120
-1128

ER$NAM

-1136

175620

Bad address in NAM field

ER$NEF

-1152
-1160
-1172
-1176
-1184
-1200
-1216
-1232
-1248
-1256

175600
175570
175554
175550
175540
175520
175500
175460
175440
175430

Context not end-of-file

175420
175400

ER$RFA

-1264
-1280
-1296
-1328
-1344
-1360
-1376
-1392
-1408

175360
175320
175300
175260
175240
175220
175200

ER$RFM

-1424

175160

ER$NET
ER$NMF
ER$NOD

ER$NPK
ER$OPN
ER$ORD
ER$ORG
ER$PLG
ER$PLV
ER$POS
ER$PRM
ER$PRV
ER$RAC
ER$RAT
ER$RBF
ER$RER
ER$REX

Unmappable network access
error

Network link lost
No more matching files
Bad Node Name
No primary key for indexed file
File processor error
Ordering of XABs illegal
Bad mask in ORG field
Error reading file prologue
File prologue version level
unsupported
Bad value in POS field
Bad file date read
Privilege violation
Bad mask in RAC field
Bad mask in RAT field
Bad address in RBF field
File processor error
Record already exists
Bad value in RFA field
Bad code in RFM field

Programming Information

5-89

Table 5-23 (Cont.): RMS Error Messages
Decimal
Mnemonic
Value
Octal Value Full Error Text
COMPLETION CODES
ER$RLK
ER$RNF
ER$RNL
ER$ROP
ER$RPL
ER$RRV
ER$RSL
ER$RSS
ER$RST
ER$RSZ
ER$RTB
ER$RVU
ER$SEQ
ER$SHR
ER$SIZ
ER$SUP
ER$SYS
ER$TRE
ER$TYP
ER$UBF
ER$UIN
ER$USZ
ER$VER
ER$WCD

5-90

Programming Information

-1440
-1472
-1488
-1504
-1520

175140
175100
175060
175040
175020

Record locked

-1536
-1556
-1560
-1564
-1568
-1584
-1592
-1600

175000
174754
174750
174744
174740
174720
174710
174700

Bad internal pointer

-1616
-1632
-1656

174660

Bad mask in SHR field

174640
175610

Bad value in SIZ field

-1664
-1680
-1696
-1712
-1720
-1728

174600
174560
174540
174520
174510
174500

-1744
-1768

174460
174430

No such record
Record not locked
Bad mask in ROP field
File processor error
Bad value in RLS field
Bad value in RSS field
Bad address in RSA field
Bad value in RSZ field
Record too big for user buffer
Internal pointer corrupted
Sequential insertion records
not in order

Operation not supported over
network
System error
Index error
Bad file extension
Bad address in UBF field
Field value rejected by FAL
Bad value in USZ field
Bad file version number
lllegal wildcard in merged
string

Table 5-23 (Cont.):
Mnemonic

RMS Error Messages

Decimal
Value

Octal Value

Full Error Text

COMPLETION CODES
ER$WER

-1776

174420

Flle processor error

ER$WLK

-1784

174410

Device write-locked

ER$WPL

-1792

174400

Flle processor error

ER$XAB

-1808

174360

Bad address in XAB field

ER$XTR

-1824

174340

Extraneous data in fiie specification

FATAL ERROR COIliPLETiONS
ER$ACT

-48

177720

Illegal concurrent operation

ER$AST

-144

177560

Illegal operation at AST level

ER$BUG

-272

177360

Error in RMS-11 internal data

ER$CPB

-360

177230

Bad parameter block

ER$FAB

-640

176600

Bad FAB

ER$LIB

-1052

175744

Resident library not available

ER$MAP

-1072

175720

Error in internal buffer mapping data

ER$RAB

-1312

175340

Bad RAB

Syntax and Parsing
The following sections provide information on Command Syntax and
Parsing.

Command Syntax
The following lines show the proper syntax for a CCL command called
COl\fMAND. (Note that '<anything>' represents characters that the
CCL parser does not process):
COM[MAND] [<switch(es»] [/<anything>]
Programming Information

5-91

COM[MAND] [<switch(es»] [<space><anything>]
The command line may contain two switches: lSI and IDET.
The format for the lSI switch is:
[<space>]lSI[ZE]:[+][#]<digits>[.]
where:
lSI

Denotes the size in K words to which the program must expand.
Terminates the ISIZE switch.

Designates an increment in size over the program's usual size.
Without the plus sign, the digit's value is the total size in K
words to which the program should expand.

Indicates the digit's value is given in octal. The default is
decimal.

Is the value for size, in K words. Size can be neither less than
1 nor greater than 32 (decimal).
Explicitly indicates a decimal value for digits.

The format for the IDET switch is:
[<space>]IDET[ACH]
Where IDET indicates that the program is to rWl detached from the
job's console terminal.

Command Parsing
The run-time system passes the command line to the CCL parser.
When the CCL parser receives a command string, it:
1. Translates the string

2. Checks the string for a valid CCL command
3. Writes the fully expanded CCL command into core common, and
ensures that it is delimited by a space
4. Checks the remaining string for both of the valid CCL switches
5. Writes the remaining line (excluding CCL switches) to core common
6. Sets up the CCL program to run
7. Sets a flag from data in the CCL command definition block
5-92

Programming Information

8. Passes control back to the program's run~time system, which,
in turn, runs the program (at the appropriate line number for
BASIC-PLUS programs)
The BASIC-PLUS run-time system then:
1. Sets the STATUS variable
2. Checks the line number at which the program is to be entered
3. Checks whether the program is to be detached

BASIC-PLUS sets the STATUS variable according to the rules in
Table 5-24.
Table 5-24: BPSTATUS Variable Bits
Bit
Test
Meaning
0-7

(STATUS AND 255%)

If bit 13 is 0, this byte must be
O. If bit 13 is 1, this byte is the
size value n (in decimal) passed
in the /SIZE:n switch or is -n to
indicate that the size value was
passed in the /SIZE:+n switch (the
pI us character preceded the size
value). (To determine whether the
size value is negative, check the most
significant bit by the (STATUS AND
128%) test.)

Reserved for future use.

8-12
13

(STATUS AND 8192%)

If the /SIZE:n switch was specified,
this bit is 1.

(STATUS AND 16384%)

If the IDET switch was specified, this
bit is 1.

(STATUS < 0%)

This bit is always 1 (the value of
STATUS is always negative for a
COL entry.O

Programming Information

5-93

Appendix A

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility
Programs
This appendix describes the OPSER and obsolete system programs.

BATCH (OPSER-based)
BATCH lets you process work that can be run in your absence. You run
a batch job by first putting batch commands into a control file that you
create.
Privilege Required

•
•

Read access to the files you are submitting
Write access to use !DELETE

To Run the Program
RUN $QUE

Format

#Q BA:BATJOB.LOG=FILE 1. CMD ,FILE2. CTL
$BASIC Command

Calls a BASIC compiler to compile a source program.
Format

$BASI C[/switches][specification field][!switch][specifica tion fields]

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-1

Switches

/BPI
Uses the BASIC-PLUS compiler. The default is !BPI. The default file
type is .BAS.
/BP2
Uses the BASIC-PLUS-2 compiler. The default is /BPI. The default file
type is .B2S.
/EXECUTE
Creates an executable file. You can choose the file type according to the
following rules:
•
•

If you use BASIC-PLUS, give the file a .BAC file type.
If you use BASIC-PLUS-2, give the file a .TSK file type.

INOEXECUTE
Creates a temporary executable file, if one is needed, and deletes the
file when $BASIC processing completes.
/LIST
Produces the listing file filename .LST. The default is INOLIST.
INOLIST
Does not produce a listing file. The default is INOLIST.

!MAP
Creates the Task Builder map file filename .MAP. This switch causes
BASIC-PLUS-2 to run; it also causes a Task Build operation. The
default is INOMAP.
INOMAP
Does not create a map file. This switch causes BASIC-PLUS-2 to run.
The default is INOMAP.

/OBJECT
Creates the object file filename .OBJ. The /OBJECT switch causes the
BASIC-PLUS-2 compiler to run; it also causes a Task Build operation.
INOOBJECT
Creates the object file filename .TMP. This switch causes the BASICPLUS-2 compiler to run.

A-2

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

!RUN
Executes a previously compiled and task built program. If you
use lRu~~, you can indicate only one file specification and only one
switch: !EXECUTE.
INORUN
Perfonns the compiled and task build procedure, but does not execute
the final file.
$COPY Command

Copies files.
Format

$COPY filel/output file2/input
Usage Notes

You cannot use an asterisk (*) in file specifications with this command.
Switches

/INPUT
Copies files.
/OUTPUT
Creates new files.
$CREATE Command

Creates an ASCII file in the specification field.
Format

$CREATE file
Usage Notes

The ASCII file you create must follow the $CREATE command. You
must type $EOD as the last line of the ASCII file; otherwise, you
receive an error message. When it encounters a dollar sign ($) in the
first column of a line, $CREATE terminates. Therefore, do not specify
any commands preceding the ASCII file you create.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-3

$DATA Command

Enters data to a program that is compiled and run by one of the
language commands (for example, $BASIC). $DATA also makes sure
that the program runs (unless you specify the INORUN switch).
Format

$DATA
Usage Notes

$DATA is typed without specification fields or switches.
$DELETE Command

Deletes the files you specify.
Format

$DELETE filel.typ[file2.typ ... ]
Usage Notes

You must include a file name and file type in the specification field.
You cannot use an asterisk (*) in either the file name or file type field.
$DELETE has no switches.
$DIRECTORY Command

Lists files in an account you specify.
Format

$DIRECTORY [specification field]
Usage Notes

You can include file specifications in the specification field. If you do
not include any file specifications, $DIRECTORY lists the contents of
the current account in the batch log file. You can use an asterisk (*) in
either the file name or file type fields.

A-4

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Switches

/DIRECTORY
Creates a directory listing in a disk file instead of the batch log device.

/INPUT
Designates which files are to be listed.
$DISMOUNT Command

Cancels the logical to physical device assignment made by the
$MOUNT command.
Format

$DISMOU1\TT [/switch] logical name:
Switch
/WAIT

Holds the job until a response (as with the $MESSAGE command) is
received from the operator.
$EOD Command

Marks the end of data records included in data you input after commands such as $BASIC, $CREATE, $DATA, and $RUN.
Format

$EOD
$EOJ Command

Marks the end of a job. The $EOJ command dismounts all devices
mounted by the job and prints an appropriate message to the operator
that the logical device should be dismounted.
Format

$EOJ
Usage Notes

When BATCH reaches the end of a control file (or another $JOB
control statement) while processing a control file, the $EOJ command
is implied.
OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-5

$FORTRAN Command

Calls the FORTRAN-IV compiler to compile a source program and
generate an object program.
Format

$FORTRAN[/switches][specifica tion field]
Switches

/LIBRARY
Indicates a library file to link with the FORTRAN program.
/LIST
Produces the listing file filename .LST. The default is INOLIST.
INOLIST
Does not produce a listing file. The default is INOLIST.
!MAP
Creates the map file filename .MAP. The default is INOMAP.
INOMAP
Does not create a map file. The default is INOMAP.
IOBJECT

Creates the compiled file filename .OBJ. The default is INOOBJECT.
INOOBJECT
Does not create an object file. The default is INOOBJECT.
!RUN
Executes the previously compiled file. You must specify an object file.
INORUN
Compiles the source program, but does not execute the object file.
$JOB Command

Marks the beginning of a batch job.
Format

$JOB [/switches] [n,m]

A-6

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Switches
fCCL
Uses the system's interactive Concise Command Language (CCL).
If you specify this switch, any of the system commands that do not
conflict with existing BATCH commands can follow the dollar sign ($)
character.
/CPU=nn
Assigns a CPU time limit to the job. The value of nn is a decimal
number that is interpreted as seconds. If you specify /CPU without
/LIMIT, no elapsed time limit is enforced, and the only time limit is on
CPU time. If you specify /CPU and /LIMIT, both limits are enforced.

/NOCPU
Gives the job an unlimited amount of CPU time to complete.
!DeL
Disables all current BATCH commands that conflict with DCL commands and allows them to be processed by DCL. The job is spawned
under the DCL run-time system. If you do not include this switch, the
job is spawned under the RTll run-time system.
IERROR=[operand]
Specifies the level of error the batch processor accepts without terminating the job. The level is indicated by [operand], which can be
FATAL, WARNING, or NONE. If FATAL, all errors are accepted until
completion. If WARNING, a fatal error terminates the job, but warning errors are accepted. If NONE, any error terminates the job. The
default error level is determined at system start-up.
/LIMIT=nn
Assigns an elapsed time limit to the job. The value of nn is a decimal
number that is interpreted as minutes. Note that the elapsed time
taken to execute a job depends heavily on overall system loading.
INOLIMIT
Gives the job an unlimited amount of elapsed time to complete. If you
do not specify ILIMIT=nn or INOLIMIT, the job is given ten minutes
elapsed time to complete execution before BATCH terminates it.
INAME=job
Assigns a name to the job. Job names can be one to six characters long.
This name overrides the control file name as the identifier of the job.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-7

/NONAME
Indicates that no job name is defined. The system assigns a default job
name, which is the name of the control file.
IPRIORITY=n
Sets the job priority to n (or the next lowest multiple of 8) for batch
processing. If you are privileged, n can be between -120 and +127. If
you are nonprivileged, n is limited to a value between -120 and -8. The
default is -8.
IQUE
Queues the batch log file to LPO: (the default) or the device specified at
system start-up.

/NO QUE
Suppresses printing of the batch log file.
$MESSAGE Command

Logs a message on the operator services console.
Fonnat

$MESSAGE[/switch] message-string
Switch
/WAIT

Makes the program pause to wait for operator action. This condition
stays in effect until the operator responds to the message on the
operator services console. See the RSTS / E System Manager's Guide
for information on response procedures.
$MOUNT Command

Causes a logical to physical device assignment.
Format

$MOUNT devn:[/switch] devm:[!switch]

A-8

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Usage Notes

You must specify both the logical and physical devices. The physical
device refers to the physical device type. Enter the device and unit
number in the standard format (for example, MTl:). You can specify
logical device names that have one to six characters. Use the colon (:)
as the terminator for each device specification.
Physical Device Switches

IDENSITY:nn
Specifies density for magnetic tape.
!PARITY:[ODD]
[EVEN]
Specifies odd or even parity for magnetic tape.
!PHYSICAL
Identifies the device specification as the physical device. This is the
default.
IVID:[string]
Identifies the volume for the operator.
!WRITE
Tells the operator to write-enable the device or volume.
/NOWRITE
Tells the operator to write-protect the volume.
Logical Device Switch

/LOGICAL
Identifies the device specification as the logical device name. This
specification must correspond to the pack-id label for RSTSIE disks.
$PRINT Command

Prints the contents of files on the line printer.
Format

$PRINT file1.typ/switches [file2.typ ... ]

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-9

Usage Notes

You can use the switches available with the QUE system program for
all file specifications. See the QUE command for a description of the
switches. You can use an asterisk (*) in file specifications.
$RUN Command

Executes system programs.
Format

$RUN [file.typ]
Usage Notes

The file specifies the executable program. If you omit the file, the
system runs the current program.
$SORT Command

Executes the SORT-ll program that is supplied on RSTS/E systems.
See the PDP-II SORT/MERGE User's Guide for more information on
SORT-l1.
Format

$SORT [/switches] [output [/OUTPUT]] [input [!INPUT]] [spec/SPEC]
Usage Notes

You can abbreviate job switches to the first three letters. If you specify
more than one switch, separate them with slashes (/).
If you specify ISPECIFICATION, you cannot use the /KEYS and
/PROCESS switches in the command line. However, if you do not
use a specification file in the control statement, you must include the
/KEYS switch in the command field to control the sorting process.

You must always include the !FORMAT switch in the command field. A
file specification without a switch is used as the file to be sorted. If you
omit the file type in the file specification, the default is .SRT.

A-10

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Switches

IALLOCATION:n
Allocates space for an output file. The value n can range from 0 to
65535 blocks. If you do not specify the allocation, the default depends
on the sort process (see !PROCESS). If !PROCESS is Record or Tag, the
default is the input file size. If /PROCESS is Index or Address Routing~
the default is the number of records sorted.
IBLOCKSIZE:n
Specifies the tape block size for input or output. The default is a
512-byte block.
IBUCKETSIZE:n
Specifies the file's bucket size for output. The default is the bucket size
of the input file.
IC ONTI GUOUS

Specifies a contiguous file for output. The default is noncontiguous.
lDEVICE:x
Specifies the device used for scratch files for input. The value of x is a
one- to four-character device name.
IFILES:n
Specifies the number of scratch files for input. The value n can range
from three to ten.
IFORMAT:x:n
Specifies the file's record format (x) and maximum record size (n) for input. The value x can be FIXED, STREAM, VARIABLE, or UNKNOWN
and can be abbreviated to the first letter. You must specify this switch
and the record size if you use $SORT. The default format is VARIABLE.
IINDEXED_SEQUENTIAL[:x]
Specifies indexed file organization for input. The value x specifies the
number of keys.
IKEYS:abm.n
Specifies the sorting key field for input. You must specify this switch
if you do not include a specification file in the command line. You can
specify a maximum of ten keys separated by colons. For example:
IKEY:abm.n:abm.n: ... abm.n

OPSER and Obsoiete System Utility Programs

A-11

IPROCESS:x
Specifies the sorting process for input. The value x can be Record
sort (the default), Tag sort, Address Routing, or Index sort. You can
abbreviate each process to the first letter.
!RELATIVE
Specifies relative file organization for output.
/SEQUENTIAL
Specifies sequential file organization for output.
/SIZE:n
Specifies the file's cluster size for output.
You can specify up to three file specifications (separated by spaces)
in the $SORT control statement: an input file, an output file, and a
specification file. Use the following switches to distinguish these files
(they can be abbreviated to the first three letters):
!INPUT
Specifies the file to be sorted.
/OUTPUT
Specifies the file containing the sorted data.
/SPECIFICATION
Specifies the file containing the control information for the sorting
process.

QUE
QUE submits requests to the OPSER-based spooling programs. QUE
also lists pending requests, kills pending requests, and modifies pending requests.
Privilege Required

•
•
•

Read access to input files.
Write access to files specified using IDE (delete)
GACNT or WACNT privilege to submit requests under a PPN other
than your own

To Run the Program
RUN OPSER$:QUE

A-12

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Usage Notes

You can use wildcard characters for the file name and type, but not for
the PPN.
QUE Program Commands

Q
Specifies one or more files you want to process.
L
Displays a list of the currently pending requests for the spooling
program on your teTI!'linal.
S

Same as the L command, except that QUE displays a short fonn list.
K
Removes one or more jobs you indicate in the device specification and
job name.

M
Modifies the parameters of a job already in the queue.
F
Directs QUE to abort all current jobs in the queue.
H
Displays an infonnational message on your tenninal.
E
Terminates QUE and returns control to system command level.
Q Command Output Switches

IMO:n
The value n specifies the MODE that the spooling program uses in its
OPEN statement for the line printer.

ILE:nnn
Set forms length to nnn (1 to 127) lines per page.
ICO

Changes number 0 (zero) to letter 0 (oh).

ITR
Truncates lines longer than unit's configured length.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-13

ILP
Enables software fonnatting.

!UP
Translates lowercase to uppercase characters.
ISK

Skips six lines at bottom of each fonn.

IAF:spec
Initiates the current request after the value given in spec. Spec can be
one or more of the following:
dd-mmm-yy
H:mm
yy.mm.dd
H:mm:amlpm
+n D[AYS]
+n H[OURS]
IPR:n
QUE sets the priority to the value of n, which can be in the range 0
and 255. The default priority is 128.
/TY:xxx
Uses the fonnat specified by xxx for printing the file; xxx can be:
FORTRAN forms control
Embedded fonns control
Implied FORMS control
LF and CR printed before each record
IFO:fonn-name
Form-name specifies the name of the fonn on which the job is printed;
fonn-name cannot exceed six characters, and the first character cannot
be a digit.
IJC:n

The value of n specifies is the number of job copies you want to print.

A-14 OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Q Command File Name Switches

/CO:n
SPOOL prints the number of copies indicated by the decimal integer n.
The default is one copy.

INH
SPOOL suppresses printing of the file header.

IDE
SPOOL deletes the file after it is printed, if the protection code of the
file permits.
!MORE
Indicates to QUE that you have more text to type on the next physical
line. Used only at the end of a command line.

fBI
Indicates a binary file to the RJ2780 program, which must be in
transparent mode.

IRE
SPOOL restarts the file or job if a malfunction occurs in printing.

RESTOR
The RSTSIE RESTOR program lets you return files you backed up
before RSTSIE V9.0 (using the BACKUP program) to online use. The
RSTS/E V9.0 RESTOR utility includes the restore features previously
included in the BACKUP utility. RESTOR provides three operational
modes:
•
•
•

Restore, to rebuild Backup-created files onto a RSTS/E disk
Loadindex, to copy the primary index file from the last volume of
the Backup Set to a RSTSIE formatted disk
List, to print directory information contained in a Backup index file

Privilege Required

To run RESTOR, you need WACNT, WREAD, and WWRITE privileges.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-15

To Run the Program
RUN RESTOR$:RESTOR

The dialogue begins when you run RESTOR. The first question asks
which of the three operational modes (Restore, Lladindex, or List) you
want to perform. If you choose, you may create an indirect command
file. The dialogue then asks you where to create the work file into
which it will write the directory and error information. Additional
questions ask for information on which files and accounts to transfer. When the dialogue ends, the program writes a summary of your
commands into the listing file. Table A-I, Table A-2, and Table A-3,
summaries of the Restore, Lladindex, and List dialogues, follow.
Table A-1:

RESTOR Dialogue Summary

Question

Response and Meaning

RES[TORE], LOA[DINDEX], or LIS[T]?
RES[TORE] (/SA[VE])
Restores files. If you append ISA[VE], RESTOR creates an indirect command file
and asks question 1a.

INDIRECT FILE NAME<_SY:[CUR ACT]RESTOR.CMD>?
File specification
Creates an indirect command file with the specified name. Valid output devices are
disk and tape. Asked only if the SAVE switch is appended in question 1.

WORK-FILE NAME<_SY:[CUR ACT] Bddmmm.Jnn>?
File specification
Uses the specified file as the work file. If the default is accepted, RESTOR uses
either Bddmmm or Bymmdd as the file name format. If the system date format,
selected during installation, is alphabetic, the default name format is Bddmmm.
where:
dd

Specifies the day of the month

mmm Specifies the first three characters of the month
If the system date format is numeric, Bymmdd is the default name format.

A-16

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Table A-1 (Cont.):
Questio!!.

RESTOR Dialogue Summary

Respo!!.Se And Meening

where:
y

Specifies the last digit of the current year

m.m.

Specifies the number of the month

Specifies the day of the month

In the .Jnn file type, no represents the job number RESTOR is running under. You
can substitute any mou..'1ted, write-enabled disk for SY:.
3

LISTING FILE<_KB:>?
KBn: or LPn:
Writes the listing file to the specified keyboard or line printer ur..it.
File specification
Writes the listing file to the specified file on disk or tape. The default file name is
SY: [CUR ACT] RESTOR.LST.

INDEX FILE<PRIMARY>?
File specification
Uses the specified file as the index file. You can specify an auxiliary index file or an
index file created during a Loadindex operation. If you accept the default, RESTOR
uses the primary index file that is on the final volume of the Backup Set.

FROM DEVICE<_MT:>?
MT:, MM:, MS:, or disk name
Restores backed-up files from the specified medium. (Do not specify a unit number
here, only a device type. RESTOR requests the unit number later.)

FROM FILE(S) <[CUR ACT]*. *>?
BACKUP File specification(s)
Restores the specified files.

TO DISK<_SY:[*,*]>?
Disk name
Restores the specified files to the designated disk.

BEGIN AT<[*,*]*.*>?
BACKUP File specification
Restores starting with the file specified here. The default starts with the first file
matching the file specification in question 6. The answer must be a single file
specification. No EXCEPT modifiers are allowed.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-17

Table A-1 (Cont.):

RESTOR Dialogue Summary

Question

Response and Meaning

ENTER ACCOUNTS<YES>?
YES
Creates, on the destination disk, all accounts on the Backup Set that do not already
exist on the destination disk.
NO
Does not create any accounts. You cannot selectively create accounts.

SUPERSEDE<NONE>?
BACKUP File specification(s)
Overwrites the specified files on the destination disk with the backup versions.
If you accept the default, RESTOR does not supersede any files. (To supersede
files, you must include a file specification. RESTOR does not supersede all files on
the destination volume if you type ALL or YES. Instead of superseding the entire
volume, RESTOR replaces only files that have a file specification of ALL or YES.)

COMPARE FILE(S)<NONE>?
BACKUP File specification(s)
Compares the restored files to the backup versions after transfer. AB in the
SUPERSEDE question, you must provide a file specification here instead of an
answer such as ALL or YES.

Table A-2:

LOADINDEX Dialogue Summary

Question

Response and Meaning

RES[TORE], LOA[DINDEX], or LIS[T]?
LOA[DINDEX]?
Copies index file from the Backup Set to a RSTSIE formatted disk. If you attach
ISA[VE] to the LOA[DINDEX] response, RESTOR creates an indirect command file
and asks question 1a.

INDIRECT FILE NAME <_SY:[CUR ACT]LOADIN.CMD>?
File specification
Creates an indirect command file with the specified name. Valid output devices
are disk and tape. This question is asked only if you use the ISA[VE] switch in
response to question 1.

A-18

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Table A-2 (Cont.):

LOADINDEX Dialogue Summary

Question

Response and Meaning

WORK-FILE NAME<_SY:[CUR ACT]Bddmmm.Jnn>?
File specification
Uses the specified file as the work file. If you accept the default, LOADINDEX uses
either Bddmmm or Bymmdd as the file name format.
where:
dd

Specifies the day of the month

mmm Specifies the first three characters of the month
y

Specifies the last digit of the year

Tn""",

Specifies the number of the month

In the file type .Jnn, nn represents the job number RESTOR is running under. You
can substitute any mounted, write-enabled disk for SY:.
3

LISTING FILE<_KB:>?
KB: orLP:
Writes the listing file to the keyboard or the line printer. If you press RETURN or
LINE FEED, RESTOR sends the listing file to the keyboard <KB:>.
File specification
Writes the listing file to the specified disk or tape. If you type SY: and then
press RETURN, the RESTOR program creates the default listing file [CUR
ACT]LOADIN.LST.

FROM DEVICE<_MT:>?
MT:, MM:, MS:, or Disk Name
Copies the index file from the specified Backup Set device.

TO FILE<_SY:[CUR ACT] [BINDdd.lND]?
File specification
Loads the Backup Set index file into the specified file. You can copy the index to a
disk device only. The format for the default file name is BINDdd.IND, where dd is
the numeric day of the month.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-19

Table A-3:

LIST Dialogue Summary

Question

Response and Meaning

RES[TORE], LOA[DINDEX], or LIS[T]?
LIS[T]!SA[VE]
Runs the LIST dialogue. When you attach the ISAlVE] switch to the LIST response,
RESTOR creates a DCL command file after you respond to question la.

INDIRECT FILE NAME<_SY:[CUR ACT][LIST .C:MD]>?
File specification
Creates a DCL command file with the specified name. Question la appears only if
you use the ISA[VE] switch in response to question 1. Valid output devices are disk
and tape.

WORK-FILE NAME<_SY:[CUR ACT]Bddmmm.Jnn>?
File specification
Uses the specified file as the work file. If you accept the default by pressing
RETURN or LINE FEED, LIST uses either Bddmmm or Bymmdd as the file name
format.
where:
dd

Specifies the day of the month

mmm Specifies the first three letters of the month
mm

Specifies the number of the month

In the file type .Jnn, nn represents the job number RESTOR is running under. You
can substitute any mounted, write-enabled disk for SY:.
3

LISTING FILE<_KB:>?
KB: orLP:
Writes the backup directory information to the specified device. If you press
RETURN or LINE FEED, the backup directory is written to your keyboard. Type
LP: and press RETURN for a line printer listing.
File specification
Writes the backup directory information to the specified file. Type SY:, and press
RETURN if you want RESTOR to create the default listing file,
[CUR ACT]LIST.LST.

A-20

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Table A-3 (Cont.):

LIST Dialogue Summary

Question

Response and Meaning

INDEX FILE<PRIMARY>?
File specification
Extracts the index file from the specified file and writes it to the listing file. If you
accept the default by pressing RETURN or LINE FEED, LIST requests the index
volume. It then takes the directory information from the index volume and writes
the information to the listing file.

FROM DEVICE<_MT:>?
File specification
Asked only if you accept the default in the INDEX FILE<PRIMARY> question. The
file specification response must identify the device on which the index resides. You
can accept the magnetic tape default <_MT:> by pressing RETURN or LINE FEED.
The LIST program begins a MOtJNT dialogue, which asks you to mount the Backup
Set index volume and identify the target device.

File Specifications
Several questions in the dialogue require you to respond with a file
specification. The specification can include file name, account, and
dates of creation and last access. In addition, you can specify one or
more files as exceptions from a process.
The file specification has the format:
filenamelkeyword:comparison:date:time/exception (filename . . .)
where:
filename

Is a standard RSTSIE file specification.

keyword

Is either CR[EATION] or AC[CESS] and specifies that RESTOR
is to interpret the date and time as either file creation or access
dates and times.

comparison

Is either BEF[ORE] or AFT[ER] and specifies that RESTOR is
to process files created or accessed before or after the date and
time.

date

Specifies the date RESTOR uses to process files.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-21

time

Optionally specifies the time RESTOR ufles to process flles only
when you specify CREATION. Use the 24-hour format such as
14:49. The default is 00:01 on the specified date.

exception

Is EXC[EPT] and specifies that RESTOR is to exclude from
processing the specified files that follow. You can include all of
the previous elements in an EXCEPT phrase but do not include
another EXCEPT phrase. Separate multiple file specification
commas and enclose the list in parentheses.

RESTOR Interruption Commands
The RESTOR package includes interruption commands for your convenience. These commands enable you to detach, terminate, suspend,
and continue processing and to check the status of the run.
RESTOR shows it is ready to accept interruption commands by printing
an asterisk on the job's console terminal after the dialogue is complete.
You can type an interruption command as a response to a request in
the mount procedure or any time after the asterisk appears. Table A-4
provides a summary of the interruption commands.
Table A-4:

RESTOR Interruption Commands
Command and Meaning

ABO[RT]
Terminates processing immediately and returns control to your keyboard monitor.
CON[TINUE]
Continues processing after a PAUSE command.
DET[ACH]
Detaches job from KB:. RESTOR detaches if three conditions are met:
•
OPSER is running
• The listing file is not on KB:
•
No messages are currently pending for this copy of RESTOR.
RESTOR is given a receiver identification of BACKnn, where nn is its job number. All
interaction with RESTOR is done through OPSER.
END
Terminates after processing the current file.

A-22

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

Table A-4 (Cont.):

RESTOR Interruption Commands

-------------------------------

Command and Meaning

LAS[T]
Reprints, on KB:, the last text printed. If the program is awaiting a response, reprints
the question or prompt. If not, reprints the last message.
LEG[AL]
Prints (on KB:) a list of the commands and responses that are legal now. In the list,
**OTHER** means that a request for information from you is pending (for example,
Backup Set name). The response to such a request is any appropriate string. You
do not need to use quotation marks (") unless the response can be interpreted as an
interruption command. For example, you can legally name the Backup Set PAUSE, but
you must type the name in quotes ("PAUSE")
NOT[lCE]
Writes the specified text in the listing file. The NOTICE command has the format:
NOT[lCE] message
Message represents one line of text. No line terminators are allowed in the message.
OFF[LINE]
Same function as ABORT.
PAU[SE]
Suspends execution until you type CONTINUE. Any legal command typed during a
PAUSE is executed immediately.
STA[TUS]
Prints, on KB:, RESTOR status information.
TER[MINATE]
Closes the current volume at the end of the current file or at the end of the current
output volume, whichever comes first.

OPSER and Obsolete System Utility Programs

A-23

How to Orrlor Add-It-Inna l nOl"'''montatiO"
•

••

__ "

•

_" I

__II

_ " ""

.. I

Technical Support
If you need help deciding which documentation best meets your needs, call 800-343-4040
before placing your electronic, telephone, or direct mail order.

Electronic Orders
To place an order at the Electronic Store, dial 800-DEC-DEMO (800-332-3366) using
a 1200- or 2400-baud modem. If you need assistance using the Electronic Store,
call SOO-DIGITAL (800-344-4825).

Telephone and Direct Mail Orders
Your Location

Call

Contact

Continental USA,
Alaska, or Hawaii

800-DIGITAL

Digital Equipment Corporation
P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, New Hampshire 03061

Puerto Rico

809-754-7575

Local Digital subsidiary

Canada

800-267-6215

Digital Equipment of Canada
Attn: DECdirect Operations KA02l2
P.O. Box 13000
100 Herzberg Road
Kanata, Ontario, Canada K2K 2A6

International

Local Digital subsidiary or
approved distributor

Internal!

USASSB Order Processing - WMOlE15
or
U.S. Area Software Supply Business
Digital Equipment Corporation
Westminster, Massachusetts 01473

!For internal orders, you must submit an Internal Software Order Form (EN-01740-07).

Reader's Comments

RSTS/E Quick Reference Guide
AA-EZ13C-TC

Please use this postage-paid form to comment on this manual. If you require a written
reply to a software problem and are eligible to receive one under Software Performance
Report (SPR) service, submit your comments on an SPR form.
Thank you for your assistance.

I rate this manual's:
Accuracy (software works as manual says)
Completeness (enough information)
Clarity (easy to understand)
Organization (structure of subject matter)
Figures (useful)
Examples (useful)
Index (ability to find topic)
Page layout (easy to find information)

Excellent
0

Good

Fair

Poor

0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
D
0

0
0
0
0
0
0

I would like to see morelless
What I like best about this manual is
What I like least about this manual is

I found the following errors in this manual:
Page
Description

Additional comments or suggestions to improve this manual:

I am using Version _ _ _ of the software this manual describes.
N ametritle
Dept.
Company

Date

Mailing Address
Phone

DoNotTear- Fold Here -

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

momoDmo™

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST -CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO.33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
CORPORATE USER PUBLICATIONS
CONTINENTAL BOULEVARD MK01-21E12
PO BOX 9501
MERRIMACK NH 03054-9982

lit. •••• 11. II •••• 1.1 •• I.. 1111 .. 1.1 .. 1111 •• 1I. 1111111
Do Not Tear - Fold Here -

-I'

,,
I
I
I

,
In
,a
I~

S?eD
Q.

~
('II